IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) 1.0 I.I 1.25 •^ 1^ 12.2 1^ lifi lillM 1.4 1.8 1.6 6" ^4 ^ /a ^P: "^1 w >>* 4^'C < V ^ Oj^ Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 V gt7 :\ \ % V '^A 6^ CN'' ,t de la nattet* da I'exemplaira film«, et en conformitA avec les conditions du contrat de fllmage. Lea axamplairaa originaux dont la couvarture an papier eat imprimte sont filmia an commandant par la premier plat at an terminant soit par la derniire page qui comporte une oriprainta d'Impreaaion ou d'illuatration, soit par le second plat, salon la caa. Tous lea autraa sxampiairas originaux sont filmte an commanpant par la premiere paga qui comporte une amprainta d'impreaaion ou d'illuatration at an terminant par la derniAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un dea symbolea suivants apparaftra sur la demiAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le caa: la symbols — ^signifie "A SUIVRE ', le symboie V signifie "FIN". Lea cartea, pianchaa. tableaux, etc., pauvent dtre fiimte A dea taux da rMuction diffirents. Lorsqua le document est trop grand pour dtra reproduit an un seul clichA, ii est fiimi i partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche & droita. et de haut 9n baa, 9n prenant la nombra d'images nteessaire. Las diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thoda. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 ) ) ('^ * ^ / (''»// i^i ( ^i^/f-ir^ I ■j THE ELEMEJNTARY FEEICH CLASS BOOK FOR THE USE OF BEGINNEKS, CbNTAINIXO NUMEEOUS EXERCISES ON THE VERES ANT^ RECAPITULATORY LESSONS, ^^ ESPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR CJLNJLT)IA.lsr SCHOOLS. BT EMILE PEHNET, WCTDRKR ON FREXCII I.V UKIVERSITY COLLFftP ,w ^„r. TORONTO: JAMES CAMPBELL & SON, 1871. *^ f Entered according to the Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year One thousand Eight hundred and Seventy -one, by James Campbell & Son, in the Office of the Minister of Agriculture. T TOO i ^x.. '^.r /t> CONTENTS. 4 f^ / /^ Hifuf-^ I' •t. A. Adjectives. —Formation of the FeL^mine 12 Do. Plural 17 "Verbal 116 Agreement „ 153 Peculiarities of some Adjectives 153 Adverbs. —Adverbial Locution ..' 123 Article.— Definite, Indefinite .........*. 3 Syntax.. 1^^. Article after Collectives and Prepositions . . 150 Repetition of Article..; 150 AvAiwXy its use Iga 0. Ctdy its use , -o^ ^«2w«, '* ...!........!.... 159 ^^acwji, " 159 Conjunction ^2^ Syntax of , &c 221 Contraction of Article . 4 D. Demonstrative Adjectives 24 Pronouns 03 iv CONTENTS. P. Feminine of Nouns ^^'** of Adjectives Feench Words used in English.....''.'.'"',''' ^^ Gender of Nouns of several Nouns . ' Gens 137 ^ 140 I. Indefinite Adjectives Pronouns " Tlest, its use 38 Interjection ^^ 12!) M. M:Sme, Indefinite Adjective .... 156 N. Negative Sentence NouNs.-Proper, OoTn^n.''Z^ZZZZ^Z * ^l Formation of the Feminine of '..'.....'...'.'.'.'*.'" j, I>o. Plural of ... .. Syntax of ' ^^ Their peculiarities J NotrNsfrom foreign Languages. ..*.'.'.* -T^ Noujrs, Compound, Plural of 'Z IT, Number of Nouns. 14 *r t PAOK . 9 . 12 . 224 7 137 140 26 38 183 12!) .... 1.56 ... 19 ... 7 9 .. 14 .- 137 .. 140 .. 144 .. 144 .. 14 CONTENTS. V N. PAOR Numeral Adjectives 24 20, 300, 1000 .'.*...'.*.*.*.*!...*.... 156 0. Orthographical Signs 2 p. Participle.— Present hq Verbal Adjective......... ng Past 118 Syntax of the 194 excepte, suppose^ oui', passe, their peculia- rities 196 with etre and with avoir ]96 followed by an Infinitive 200 preceded by en 211 do. by en and anAdverb of Quantity. 211 Participles coHie, valu, pese, couru, &c 212 preceded by two sorts of g;i«e 212 of the verbs witHoiV, pouvoir, devoir 214 of Impersonal Verbs 214 of Reflective " 215 Participle laisse followed by an Infinitive 23 5 preceded by the Pronoun V for leovla 215 Partitive Article g Personal Pronouns £8-31 Plural of Adjectives li^- Possessive Pronouns 33 Adjectives 26 VI C'ONTENT.S. Pronouns Pbonunciati ON. I'AtfR 28 Quelque, its Quel . . 1130, que, its use. 169 15ft R. Recapituxatory Exercises ^1 U m B.LATXVK Pronouns''" ^'Z:, ''■''''' ''''' ^^2 Regimen of the Verb ^^ 186 a Syntax T. Tout, Indefinite Adjective 137 lOb V. Verbs.— Substantive, Attributive. 40 Complements of Verbs, Person, Number"eto. 42 Moods and Tenses of Correspondence of Tenses yerh to be 1^0. to have Regular Verbs, 1st Conjugation......... I>o. 2nd do. ........' ^o. 3rd do. ^^' 4th do. 190 50 51 53 55 66 57 I 28 2 169 16fl .21, 44, 131 (51, 202, 222 36 186 137 ido 40 er, etc. 42 48 190 60 51 53 65 56 57 CONTENTS. " V. Verbs. —Irregularities of '^'" Interrogative form Auxiliary, Neuter, Passive, Reflective'.'.' 186 Impersonal Irregular .... ' Syntax, Verb ...'..''*.'.' '.'.'''.' [ " * " * '^^' ^^^ Number of Verb after qui.^..,,,,, m Agreement of the Verb ,1 179 i #1 FRENCH GRAMMAR. PART I. CHAPTER I. 1. Grammar cornea from tho Greek word Oramma and signifies letter, ritoratnro, and is the art of speaking and writing correctly, according to rules established by reason and custom. 2. Words. — Adumb person expresses his thoughts by signs, and we express ours by means of sounds and words. Words then are tho signs of the thoughts. 3. (S^oimds are either simple as a, e, i, o, u, or articulate as in la, ma, ta, so,. 4. Letters.— There are in French twenty-five letters which are pronounced as given in the following table : a like a in English words father, farm, yard. b like Eng. hay. c d e f 9 3 h like Ensf. (t tc (i tt t( tt it say. day. a. ef. jay (soft). ash (a long). c Eng. jee (soft). ca in I Catastrophe, I u el. \ Caprice. m as in Eng. n '' " rt (t tt fM( li.<. Pi ' 2 WlOWtJNCIATIOW— ORTHOGBsAFHlCAL 81GNS. p like Eng. jpai/. ' ^. H 5 like en in Ciiiras30. ', ■ ^ r like Eng. air. « as in Eng. t as like Eng. o in note. 071 en an Itenutrh- man. The The 11 liquid is sounded like y in bej/ond, visillard, old jn liquid has the same sound as n in onion. 6. Orthographical signs are the accents, apostrophe, cedilla, dijercsis and hyphen. A ccents. —There are three accents : acute ( ' ), erave ( ^ ^ cir- cumflex f). ^ ^'^ ^ ^' The acute or accent aigu gives e the sound of Eng. a. The grave or accent grave gives e the sound of Eng. along but with raouth more opened. Tiio cir'^umfles or accent circonflexe is placed on long vowels or indicate! ^^^® contraction of two vowels in one as in age formerly, .a%ge ; or jn maitre, written at one time, matstre. * Apo,strophe:~The apostrophe is a fli^n ( M to mark thesup. pression of )i vpwel, as : the xaan,l'hwcl, as if in any words 'ench Lan- ho French begin ncr3 I English. 3d from a h9 proper siUard, old e, cedilla, re(^), cir- g. a. g. along, ng vowels as in dgCy natstre. It +Tioaiiri- _ ^. ^ 8 friend, t manncr,/«fo»;recoived Xr' * "•-»»""<>'-«d, /or; , ; pronounced sepVZf Xi « ?, • ?n '"^ *"* ""^^ ""^^t » &t«7; S(a«. ^' P°«*'.P«'«; mgcnuouB, Moi/; Saul, prffe^^^e'^a^SOj-^W the words which, ex.; worm, ver-S-ai ' '"" *"" ™« expression; silk- calf rr-^'"" ■"« '» J^^^t t- .ign» of pnnctuat on^ 4^ Comma, 2 Semicolon, 3 Col«n,^'-''i vvx^ 4 Full stop, 5 Note of interrogation, C Note of exclamation, 7 Note of suspension, 8 Parenthesis, Inverted commas, 10 Brace, [the addition of the participle ^""^^^"^^ ^^ ^^ English with Virgule ( , ) Point et virgule ( ; ) Deux points ( :) Point dHnterrogation ( ? ) -Pom« d'eocclamation ( ! ) Powi< de suspension ( \ ParentUse ( ) ^ Guillemets ( ^' ) L'9ccolade ( '•^'s^ ) iV- CHAPTER II. DEFINITE AimCLE.-INDEPmTE ARTICLE pluraMor" otC^t;:^^' »-"■ ""8- ^ ^ fem. sing. ; fe,, t»|t- tItdl';fes:f:.r^i,:^■»"*^^^ '« ^^-z thesons, Ex'^At^tr;^;;;;'':' ",r- ™,«= 5 -«• '«»»• -s- 3. The e ami +!.« i^ K' ^ 'i'®^' unetdche. ^ Bforo "' tYmute' '''"'*^ ^'^^^^^ ^^' ^^^ -^ omitted ^ Ihe friend, Vami ; the m,an. /'L^.^.. . .,. . , ., , .. ke coat, miabit. """' ' """""^ » ""« cmid, i'enfmit • itii'r "" ™'y ^^''-s^'^er, i, i,,„ev, ^,,,„,i„„ ^^^ INDEFINITE ARTICLE — CONTRACTION OP THE ARTICLE. Remark.— The pupil will do well always to leam the article with the noun. For verb, to have, avoir ; and, to be, Vocabulary. Stre. (See Page 50.) Friend, . _ _ Ami, m. silver, money, argent, m. stocking, has, m. wood, bois, m. easy, facile. chair, chaise, f. child, enfant. and, et. but. mais, miss. mademoiselle. sir, .. monsieur, (pronounce man as if mus.) wine, vin, m. yes, Old, (si, is used when in answer to a 4l«^V iiegative question.) no non. Cotton, leather, soft. Coton, m. cuir, m. mou, m. molle, f. mol before a vowel or h mute. lady, cloth, duty, task, dame, drdp, m. devoir^ m. 18, est. who, madam, qui. madame. pupil, where, elev'e. oil. bad. mauvais—e. diligent. appliqui — e. no, non pas, (empliatic.) EXEPtCISE I. Heinark. — All French exercises should be first read carefully in French, translated into English, and then committed to memory. 1. Oil est I'ami. 2. Avez-vous I'argent. 3. J'ai le bois. 4. Nous avons le ciiir. 5. lis ont les bas. 6. Ou est le monsieur. 7. Elle a le ba.-} et le coton. 8, La dame a le cuir et le bas. 9. lis ont le bois. 10. O^ est la demoiselle, 11. J'ai un devoir. 12. Elle a une chaise. CHAPTER III. ^ CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE. 1. The^article le is contracted with the prepositions d and de, when before a masculine noun commencing with a consonant or h aspirate, and becomes, of the, du; to the, au. » Ex. — Of the brother, dufrere; to the book, aulivre; M iX.^ 'U-.-.i.^'U^^ ,J,, 1 ,-7..... J._ XI- _ -_jif-_ _(•/ tiio uuii^iici., ivM. uuuvivvr j tu Liiu uuuuc, ii'.o cajc. Remark. edly. i ' -The Vocabularies are not given alphabetically design* j "'.•f^MiiHimi- E5 ARTICLE. ,^ the article with (See Page 50.) ton, m. tr, m. II, m. molle, f. before ft vowel or h inute. rn-e. ijp, m. ;oir, m. i. v'e. uvais—e. oliquS — e. fi pas, (emphatic.) sad carefully in I to memory. 5. J'ai le bois. 6. Ou est le La dame a le la demoiselle. LE. Itionsdande^e, h a consonant au. ^ au livre ; jj^f ^ etically design i CONTRACTION OP THE ARTICLE. 2. The f emmme is expressed by de la, d la, before a conso- rfant, but before masculine and feminine nouns cbmmencintr with a vowel or h mute, it is expressed by de V, <\ V. Ex.— Of the pen, de la plume; to the chair, a la chaise : of the honor, de Vhonneur ; to the friend, d Vamie. ( f. ) 3. There is not the same possessive form in French as in English : the name of the object possessed goes first, and that 01 the possessor last. The man's voice, La voix de Vhomme. The child's book, le livre de Venfant. 4. Nouns expressing ni^rials, specigs, country, always come last, united by the p1?eposition de. A gold watch, a silver ring, a silk dress. Une montre d'or. une bague d'argent une robe de soie. 5. Adjectives in French are often used as substantives. A bad man, a poor man, an idle man, Un michant. un pauvre; un paresseux. Hat, 1 carpenter, f shoemaker, coat, ,^ i wool, watch, gold, [.pen-holder, [pencil case, misery, old, Vocabulary. Chajyeau, m. charpentier, m. cordonnier, m. habit, ni. laine, f. montre, f. or, m. porte-plume, m. porte-crayon, m. mishe, f. vieux. Satin, velvet, torn, earth, fruit, drawing, history, book, tree, prize, chain, dress, robe, f. EXERCISE II. Satin, m. velours, m. dichirS. terre, f. fruit, m. dessin, m. histoire, f. livre, m. arbre, m. prix, m. chaine, f. V f 1. L habit du charpentier. 2. Le chapeau du pauvre. 3. Lefrmtdol'arbre. 4. L'histoire de I'dlfeve. 5. Le porte- crayon de la demoiselle. 6. La robe de la dame. 7 La montre du cordonnier. 8. La robe de satin Ha la ^arv^o y. La misere du pauvre. 10. Le prix de V4lhve. 11 ' Le 6 PAETITIVE ARTIOLK. fniitde laterre. 12. La robo de laine de la dame. 13. Les efforts du mresseux. 14. An jardin de 1^ dame. io. A rhistoire de T^l^ve. . ^ CHAPTER IV. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 1. The English words, some or any, are rendered in French by rfw masc dela, fern., rfe V, before a vowel orh mute ; and des, before the plural of either gender ; they must always be expressed m French, whether expressed or understood in Xingnsh. Bread, Du pain. meat, rfc la viande. children, des enfants. 2. The partitive article is used also before words expressing qualities or vices. " * Prudence, De la prudence, pride, de Vorgueil. 3. The indefinite article is declined as follows : A, or, an, Tiny masc, une, fern. of a, or, of an, dhvn, to a, or, to an, a un, iC dhme, d, line, 4. When the subject of an interrogative sentence is a noun. It should be placed before the verb, and the pronoun should agree m ,, nder, number, and pers- i Avith the subject. A-t, for the sake of euphony is placed between the verb and the pronoun as : Has the child finished his task? I L'enfant a-UilJim satdche? Vocabulary. ''«#•»: Umbrella, parasol, table, ring, pen, Farapluie, m. omhrelle, f. table, f. bague, f . plume, f. acajou, Til. Star, pain, grief, master, lesson, son. J stre, m. doulcur, f. chagrin, m. mattre, m. legon, f. Jib. I 'ik.^ NOUNS— PROPEE NOT7N8, cbmiOV NOUNS,- BTa ne. 13. Leu ame. 15. A ed in French h mute ; and ist always be iderstood in Is expressing m. ce IS a noun, loun should bject. ;he verb and i sa tdche ? (J, m. niTf f. "in, re, 1 "in, m. re, m. Spoon, beef, glove, village, vengeance, tyrant, heaven, cloud, for, dinner, Ctiillert f. (liq.) hmif, m. gant, m. village, m. vengea7hce, f. tyran, m. ciei, m. nnagey m. pour. Old man, hay making, daughter, put, custom, steel, story, stick, stone, advice, Vieillard, (liq.) /enotaon, f. file, mettez. coutume, f. acier m. conte, m. baton, m. pierre, f. arts, m. EXERCISE III. 1. Avez-vous des plumes? 2. J'aidu chagrin. 3. Nous avonsdu boeuf pour diner. 4. lis ont des lemons. 5. Avez- vous des gants ? 6. Oui, nous avons des gants. 7. EUes ont des douleurs 8. La le9on d'un maltre. 9. La bague d'une dame 10. Le fils a-t-il une le9on ? 11. La fiUe a-t-ello imo ombrelle ? 12 La vengeance d'un tyran. 13. Ont-ils une table d acajou ? Les astres et les nuages du ciel. CHAPTER V. NOUNS-PROPER NOUNS, COMMON NOUNS GENDER OF NOUNS. 1. The noun or substantive, is a word which serves to designate or to name every being or every thing, which is the object of our thoughts, as : God, man, earth, horse, virtue, charity, Dieu. homme, terre. thcval. vertu. chariU. 2. Every word to which one can attribute a quality good or bad, 18 a noun One can »^..y : a large town, une grande ville; & small village, un pc u village; ville and village are therefore nouns. *' There aye two sorts of nouns— proper and common. ,>. 8 NOITNS— PttOPEll ABTD COMMON, ETC. f^t' T^^ P^Per noun ia the name that can only be &m^h^A are proper nouns -""•?'"'.-'«"'. '»*«.«, ic» ^ipe,, &o., toih^S an'idTa'!;?!?''""' «'ere are some which present or obS of the .f. .""' ""ol'eotiott of individuals partial coUectron wS onwlv ^ '^^'''\ ^"^^ designate a Lion, lion. wolf, Zon^). Stag, cerf. cat, cA-a*. .uch'as^^' "■"""' "'^°'»''""*^»"^^ ^i^'J^ «e feminine, Woman, femme. hind, 6ic/ie. she-cat, cAa^^c. Mare, jument. hen, jooit^e. she-wolf, Zoitve. thenaS: t T^Ztfo^^' ^*"^^'' ^^ ^-«o" *» thf^rdt;7fttS^''?lP':^i^-Metha student to distinguish part of the noun. "° ""'^ ^"""'"oo learned as an insepa?ablo 3e aj^plied countries, 11 persona ^c, chevaL )e applied h. present idividuals 'J'Pe ; col- f hounds, vhich are ided into plete col- ngais, are >signate a ate quan- i troop of 3artitivej_ ier is the fictitious > Karnes Jinmine, ation to itinguish eparable \] POKMATION OF THB FEMININE OF NOUNS. VOCABULAKY. 9 Arm-chair, Faukuil, ni. volcano, volcan^ ni. wheat, bUj m. cocoa-nut tree, cocotier, m. thyme, hill, meadow, candor, modesty, universe, shore, clay, ship-owner, thym, m, colline, f. prairie, f. candenr, f modestie, f. univers, m. rive, f. argile, f. armateur. jearnest money, arrhes, f. pi asperge, f. asparagus, elbow, adder, cutlass, seam, pancake, cress, Ganges, ebony, coude, m. couleuvre, f. coutelas, m. couture, f. crepe, f. cresson, m. Gange, m. ibene, m. Use, custom, C/sagrf, m. Arabia, Arabic. mule, mttZef, m. rice, Wz, m. queen, reine. eel, anguille,t Cliq.) field, champ, m. pie, j9d( ^ewari-.— The pupil will give the English of the following nouns and prefix an article before each one. Argent, bois, has, chaise, vin, coton, cuir, drap, devoir cafd, hvre, plumes, honneur, voix, chapeau, laine, montre or, porte-plume, porte-crayon, mis^re, velours, terre, fruit' dessm, histoire, arbre, prix, chaine, orgueil, prudence, para-' pluie, ombrelle, bague, boeuf, village, vengeance, ciel, miage, douleur, chagrin, logon, coutume, baton, acier, pierre, avis, diner, fauteuil, volcan, araigne'e, anguille, anneau, v^t4, ebene, collme, prairie, candeur, ble', modestie. CHAPTER VI. /^ FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OP NOUNS. 1. General Bute.- . — The feminine of nouns is formed by - . sculinc. A friend, tin ami, m., umamie, f. ; an idiot, un idiot, nne idiote; a neighbor, un voisin^ une I MlW.. i .i^ I I 10 FORMATION OF THE FKMUTINE OF NOUN8. voisine; a villager U7ivillagcois,unevillageoise: a townsman uu bourgeois, low bourgcoisc. J > «> rownsman, i ovoi Jhn^^i^t""' r"' i^ "^^"^^ ^"^^"« ^" '' P^^* «* g^avo accent over the c preceding the r— a gardener, «n mrrfmicr une ^ard^nare- a foreigner, nn Urangcr, une itranglT ' rule : ^"""^'^'"^ '^^^ *^« ^^^^^f exceptions to the general Eno. Masc. Peasant, Paysan, foolish person, sot. Fern. Paysanne. sottc. duchcsse, juive. veuve. mortelh. quakeresse, abbesse. favorite. reine. duke, due, jew, juif, widower, veuf, mortal, mortel, quaker, quaker, abbot, abb6, favorite, favoH, A comrade, CTu or une camaradc. 1 slave, len or une csclavc. a pupil, nn or mjic ^i^vc. a savage, nn or -jwie sauvagc. ^il'to^cL^'' "masculine nouns ending in c mute change that An ass r/ji (^tne, • ?7nc dnesse, a count, M»i oom^c, une comtessc. a negro, hh ntgre, une nbgresse. a tiger, wji eijjrrc, une tigressc. and addT '''' " "' '*' '"' '''^ '^''"^^' *^^ ^"^^^ consonant A christian, C;^,i c/irJiie»,, Une chrStienne. anon ','«i Zion, wne iiomie. a dumb-person, un nmct, une muetic. a musician. un musieicn, une mustcienne. A certain number of nouns in cur change eur into euse, A judge, Lii connaisscur,^ Une connaisseuse. a traveller, v n voyagcuv, une voyageusc. r. VZMININX or NOUNS. U 8. The feminine of a great number of words is formed by the change of eur into ricK. Eno. A protector, a director, Masc. Fern. Un protecieur, line, protectrice. nn diredeur, nne directrice. 9. A few nouns change eur into eresae. An enchanter, Un encJmnteur, Une enchanteresse. a plaintiff, un demandeMr, une demanderesse. a defendant, un defendeur, une deftnderesae. 10. Nouns ending in x change it into se. An unfortunate, Un malheureux, Une malheureuse. a lazy person, nnparesseux, une paresseuse. Vocabulary. Broom, cheese, gardener, letter, inkstand, poultry, •^ead, milk, enough, citizen, cut, where, pronounce, sound. Balaiy m. fromage, m. jardinier, m. lettrej f. cncn'er, m. volaille^ f. plomhj m. laity m. assez. citoyen. coupez. oil. prononcez. S071, m. Cousin, error, ship, establishment, palace, remedy, I see, power, poor, drunk, sacred, do ypu like 1 execution, Cousin-'e. erreuvy f. navire, m. Hdblissementy m. palais, m. remede, m. je vols, pouvoir, m. pativre. bu Cfrom boire.) sacri. aimez-vous f execution, f. EXERCISE V. -V 1. Oil est la jardiniere ? Dans le jaidin avec son cousin. A. ua est votre amie ? J'ai vu votre amie hier avec votre cousine. 3. 'Voil^ une ^trangfere. 4. Le due est avec 1 abbesse. 5. Avez-vous jamais vu une quakeresse ? 6 II y avait beaucoup d'esclaves en Amdrique. 7. Le n^gre est dans le verger avec la n^gresse. 8. Voilk une pauvre muette. 9. Jai vula directrioe do l'<^tablissement. 10. Les pares- Seiises SOnt malhmirAnaoa 11 A.^.. . i :-\-.- f. % .. a &nesse I 12, Le palaia do I'imp^ratrice est superbe. 12 FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. CHAPTER VII. I FORMATION OF THE IFEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. 1. General Bulc -To form the feminine of an adjective 11/ ™K*^ *^ *^° masculine : charming, charmant cUr- mante, bad, mauvais, mauvaise; common, commun, com- mnne ; clear, clair, claire ; delicate, clelicaL delicate feminine-a faithful fnend, un ami fidhle or nne amieMHe. 3 Adjectives ending in x change x into ae for the feminine • rJ^^"^^' ^«^^As — as, Aussi — que. Barrel, Baril, m. {I silent.) addition, additj,ou, f. flat. plat-e. ■ deep, profond-e. stupid. bete, f. rose-color, rose. green, vert-e. chocolate, chocolat, m. remark, remarque, f. black, noir-e. this is, c^est. wool, laine, f. fashionable, d la mode. * nosegay, bouquet, * m. china, porcelaine, f. woolly, luineux—se. plaything, jGiijou, m. y Remark. — Words in the Vocabularies with an asterisk * are now used in the English Language. I* If. 14 Bushy, iowel, novel, laboriouB, jbox, timid, restive, hair, captive. KEMIKrilfB OF ADJEOTITM Tovffu. bijou, m. tnoiture, f. laborieux-Hc. hoUcy f. timide. r6tif-ve. I chevexu:, m.pl. I chevelure, f. captif-ve I Idle, fan, accusod, formal, small, dumb, frock-coat, dividing, hope, iventail, m. acaisS, m. formel-le. petit-e. muet-te. redingote, f. mitoyen-ne. espirance, f. to project, jailhr. (liq.) snow, It 18 a pity, c'est dommagei what, nothing, essential, flower, vegetable, appearance, noisy, quite, * rien. lessentlel-le. Jlnw, f. Ugume, ni. apparel} ce, f. bruyafit-~c. tont-d'fait. ancient, old. ancien-ne. neige, f . , , qui, que. hideous, hideux-se. afraid, timid, peurcux-se. sickly, maladif-^e. Breech loading cannon with several bar- rels. Mitrailleuse,l(li(i.) EXERCISE VI. 3. Cette jument est Sfefrkve ?V^?^ ^«* immortelle, timide, Jaborieusrou bL 1 K n 7''*'"° ^'^""'"^ ^^^'^^^ n^OTA a f iM A T ^ V , ^ ^,- Q"^^^^ »orte de cheveux lo p^ratnco de France se nommait Eug&ie • elIeV-LT»;moW " charmante, charitable et affable. 10 Cette nftu* "S^f'^^J. ^bSTa ' ^'^hlrT"- "• Ce«« "«:„': tS^ CHAPTER VIII. ^ NDMBEKS jr NOOTS FOMUTION OF THE irliuKAL. NtrMBEBS OF NOUNS— FORMATION OF THE FLURAL. 16 2. The flingular id the expreaRion of miity, and every noun Bignifymg only one person or thing is in the singular : a kinc unroi; thoHowcr, la jiiur. *' 3. The plural is the expression of plurality, and every noun Bignifying several persons or things is in the plural : the Jiings, les rots; the llowers, lesfleurs. 4. The words /c, la, iin, ce, ma, ta, sa, noire, voire, levr, always denote the singular form : les, mes, des, ces, ies, ses\ nos, vos, leurs, always denote the plural form. 5. The plural of nouns is generally formed by adding a • the orange-tree, Voranger, U^ Grangers; the man, Vhomme, les hommes. ' ' 6. Nouns ending in a, x or z, do not vary. V- - Enq. Sing. A country, Un pays^ a ruby, un ruhis, a cnicifix, un crucijix, a cypress-tree, un cyprh, an Englishman, un Anglais y Plural. Des pays, des ruhis. des crucifix, des cyprhs. des Anglais. 7. Nouns ending in au, eau, eu, take x in the plural. •^ If"^^' ^*^ ^9'n^^'^t Des agneaux. , a shrub, un arbrisseau, des arhrisseaux. a pipe, {tube,) un iuyau, des tuyaux. a farewell, un adieu^ des adieux. take x°^^ ^^ ^^ ^°^^°^ *^® general rule but tlie foUowing A jewel, an owl, a stone, a cabbage, Un hijoUy un hiboUf un cailloUy un chou, Des bijoux, des hiboux. des cailloux. des choux. 9. The greater number of nouns ending in the singular in ««, change al into aux for the plural. s *" A crystal, Un cnstal, Des cristaux. a metal, tm mital, des m6taux. A few however such as the following take s. Ball, JJn hal. 7i^o h^ja carnival, un carnaval, des camavak, ♦reat, wiHgal, desrigaU, 1 U NOUNS — FORMATION OF THE PLUAAL. 1 jj [ f ■ 1 ■ i ., 1 10. Tlie following nouns and a few others rarely used, form their plural as follows : Plural. Baux. bestiaux. coraux. travaux. (Sec Syntax.) soupiraux. aulx. Eng. Sing. Lease, Bail, cattle, betaily coral, corail, labor, travail, air-hole, soupirail, garlic, ail, The other nouns in ail, follow the general rule and take s. Fan, EvAntail) Evantails. porch, portail, portails. 11. Sky, cicl ; eye, ceil ; grand father, o/Ccul; become usu- ally deux, yeux and aieux. In certain cases however they become dels, ceils, ai'euls. Itemar^. — It^ is no longer allowed to suppress the t in polysyllabic nouns ending in ant or ent. With the French Academy we must say, Children, dcs cnfanis ; j)arent3, des parents. — The only excep- tion is, people, gens. j VoCABULAItY. Bam, Grange, f . nimble, quick, agile. animal, animal, m. attentive, attentif~ve. linen, web, toile, f . on the contrary, au contraire. cuckoo, oil, several, clever, cow, shop, pepper, bird, violet, fly, nail, a flag, tobacco, iron, certainly, coiicou, m. ludle, f. plusicurs. habile, vache. boutique, f. poivre, m. oiseau, m. violette, f. mouche, f . dou, m. drapeau, m, tabae, m. fer, m. certainement. Hunting, clerk, pair, Chasse, f. commis, m. paire, L blacksmith, marechal, m. "" . they work, ils iravaillent. jar, hocal, m. one, people, on. church, Sglise, f, week, semaine, f, obedient, obeissavt. ferocious, feroce. workman, ouvrier, m. cunning, riisS. makes use. se sert. miiler. meunier. early. lie bonne hcure. full. plein-e. lime-tree. tilleul, m. (lia.) hamlet. hameau, m. stove, poele, m. Remark. — For plural of adjectives, see Chapter IX. ^ TO RENDER A SENTENCE NEGATIVE. 19 EXERCISE VIII. 1. Le ferblanticr et son ouvricr ont fait de trtis bonnes laffaircs. 2. L'ebtsniste a de beaux matelas en crin. 3. II a lonne de bons conseils au voyageur — il les a re9U8 d'^in air iinodeste. 4. Je n'aime pas Ics personnes qui ont des nez januis. 5. Vous mcttrez de bona le'gumes et de la viande iFraiche dans le ragout. 6. Envoyez-moi deux poulets bien jras et un bon bifteck. 7. Cette petite fille a re9u des coups Ratals, on a envoy^ clierclicr un mddecin habile. 8. J'ai wyage' dans plusieurs pays austraux. 9. Mon pays natal a m grand pouvoir naval, et en consequence il y a aussi des lavires colossals. 10. Ces ouvriers sent tres soigneux, je jeur ai donn^ plusieurs choses h faire pour moi. 11. J'ai vu plusieurs gardes-nationaux — j'aime leur costume militaire. 12. II y a plusieurs croix noires autour de la tombe. Application. Give the English and put the following expressions in the llural. Un fils ingrat. , un mouvement spontane'. un boeuf gros et gras. un office ve'nal. . unc ras de. viande ir. '■^argent main' EXERCISE IX. 1. Le jeune Iiomme n'a pas de cravate. 2. Le charpen- Itier n'a pas do bois de chaiiffagc, il est trfes paiivre. 1 3. Le cordonnier n'a pas de cuir, il ne pent pas travailler. |4. L't^ieve n'a pas de canif. 6. II y a du bon bois de Icliauffage cette semaine. 6. Donnez-moi trois bonnes livres [de boeuf frais. 7. Les chevres ne sont pas tres timides, mais elles sont tres capricieuses. 8. Nous n'avons pas de fruit pour de'jeuner, c'est dommage. 0. II n'y a jamais personno idans ce jardin. 10. Vous n'avez pas achetd de belles era- Sates,— vous n'achetez jamais rien. 11. Louis XVI et Oharles I n'ont pas e'te' ddcapite's dans le meme pays. 12. Les 3oires de ce jardin ne sont pas belles. 13. Les ouvriers ^anadiens sont tr^s actifs, mais les ouvriers fran§ais le sont "iavantage. nes nobody ; re a vowel. me, f. * i-chauffage. >n, f. f. mt. n. m. F. f. s, m. ue. ■pie. ler. ir r RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES ON THE PREVIOUS CHAPTERS. 1st series. 1 ■'i^cj?^--- -The blowing exercises are to be written, and af tenvanls Repeated orally in French. EXERCISE I. DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE ARTICLE. (See Chapter II, page 3.) ^ 1. The lady has the cloth. 2. The task is easy. 3 The cloth IS good. 4. Where is the lady ? 5. The wine is bad. 0. Ihey have a chair. 7. We have a friend, (masc). 8. Who Vn%\7? ^^'^'^^^^S- ^' "^^^^ ^^«* *1^^ cotton and leather. 10. Who has a good task ? 11. The pupil is diUgent. 12. The cotton 18 soft. ? EXERCISE II. CONTRACTION OF THE ARTICLE AND THE [POSSESSIVE CASE. (See Chapter III, page 4.) 1. The carpenter's hat. 2. The pupil's history. 3. The lady s satin dress. 4. The child's chair. 5. The fruit of the earth. 6. The pupil's prize. 7. The boy's book. 8. The gentiemau-'s hat, 9. Of the Parisian fashions. 10. The lady s watch and chain. 11. To the drawing of the pupil 22 EECAriTULATOllY EXERCISES. Iti^ri^^.uH^-'^;^''^^^''- 13. A fine satin dress. U. From the lady to the child. 15. The stars of heaven. EXERCISE III. ^ THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. (See Chapter IV, page 6.) }inin^°^%*^r '^''^''^ ^'^^ vengeance ? 2. Give me some ma- hogany. 3. Give me some bread, butter and cheese. 4. Has the master a good pupil? 5. The master has a good pupil. 6^ That girl has pride and she i^. very young. 7. We liave grief. 8. Good customs are useful to the people. 9 Give some bread and a little piece of meat to that old man Lth^\T«'"'lTTrt''^^''^^^'*""^' 11- P"t«ome sugar m the tea. 12. They have sorrow. 13. Has the lady a fine das the VlllnorA a ^\l^^r'ny, 9 •' ring? 14. Has the village a church ? NOUNS- EXERCISE IV. -PROPER AND COMMON, GENDER OF NOUNS. (See Chapter V, page 7.) God, charity, earth, a small town, a large pack of hounds, a deep forest The army of the English. A crowd of men A troop of soldiers. A fat ox. A she-wolf. A volcano. Black .crape. A large frog. A clever dressmaker. A fresh eel A large cutlass The holy apostle. (The candor and modesty of that girl. The wheat of the fields. A rich ship-owner. The : customs of Arabia. The lid is lost. The mane of the mule The frien^l of the poor. The boy's task is long. The dutv of , the children. The fresh meat of the butcher. -"''^ ^'"^ ^^ EXERCISE V. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF NOUNS. • (See Chapt>jr VI, page 9.) wifb ViTJ^ *^^ ""'"o^^T ^""^ ^"' ^^^^- 2. The Emperor is I ThprP ,-, nT^''- ^' V^^ ^ ^^^^^^ ^^^ ^ quikeress. 4. There is a hon and a lioness, 5. Have you ever seen a dumb-person 6 Are there many slaves in America ? 7 The negress is m the field. rS. The wives of the citizens are in the palace, they speak to the Empress. 9. There are many female travellers m Switzerland. 10. There is the direcTess o+ +1,^ 7- ;«"",;„ "" ^"^^^ niimj female spectators at thQ execution. 12. .There. are many idle girls in this RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 23 38. 34. From me some ma- sse. 4. lias < good pupil. 7. We have le. 9. Give it old man. t some sugar e lady a fine DER OF c of hounds, 'wd of men. ;ano. Black A. fresh eel. nd modesty )wner. The )f the mule. Ihe duty of rouNs. EmiDeror is quakeress. ever seen a a? 7. The IS are in the are many- 3 directress ! s]!)ectators rls in this S school. 13. 1 see the townsman and his wife in the street. 14. The mms are very kind. 15. The abbess is in the hospital with the sick woman. EXERCISE VI. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES. (See Chapter VII, page 12.) 1. The face of the negro is hideous. 2. The little girl is timid. 3. The flower is quite fresh. 4. '* Little flower of the wood." 5. There is a beautiful leaf, it is quite dry. G. The lily is as white as snow. 7. This is a very essential remark. 8. The workman is very laborious. } 9. The hovel is very old. 10. The little girl has a very sickly appearance. 11. The leaf is green, but the flower is rose color. 12. The old woman is blind, dumb and decrepit. 13. This is a foolish observation, 14. The foolish hope of the accused. 15. The old coat and the old frock-coat are here. EXERCISE VII. NUMBER OF NOUNS— FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. •f- (See Chapter VIII, page 34.) , 1. The kings of England are celebrated. 2. The violets of the woods are delicate. 3. There are several jewels in that shop. 4. The adieux of Mary Stuart to France. 5. The fans of that lady are very handsome. 6. The shrubs in the garden of my friend are very green. 7. There were several owls in that barn| 8. The flags of the Dominion are respected. 9. The poets of England and France are celebrated. 10. The cuckoos are in the lime-trees. 11. The jars are full of oil and tobacco. 12. The webs of the spiders are well made. 13. The skies of the south of France are blue. 14. There are many people who are feroci. us and cunning. EXERCISE VIII. FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES, (See Chapter IX, pajje 17.) 1. I have given good advice to that child. 2. There were two black crosses near the tomb of the Prince. 3. Many naval combats wcro fought in the time of the intrepid Nelson. 4. He had the command . of . colossal ships. 6. The English If 24 DEMONSTRATIVE AND NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. are very fond of good beefsteaks and roast beef 6 The weary trave lera are resting on the cushions. 7 The ohv^- .';r ^o t'^^" ^"^ ^"^^*i^^- 1 «• Young gil3 a?e ve^ giddy 9. Moral stories are good for yotna childre7 10. There were several nat..nal guards onThe^arriS' 11.- I am very fond of theatrical effects. 12. The children of t'dwZier.f'^r-. ''• The beefsteaks areTmfh and badly cooked. U. The forests are grey in the twilight EXERCISE IX. ^ ^ TO RENDER A SENTENCE NEGATIVE. (See Chapter X, page 19.) 1. The penknife has no blades, it is broken 9 Thc,.^ no oranges this week. 3. I h^vo no grudge t^n^yZ" 14. On^ reckons iLltJ'.illt^TuZi^^ZU'''- CHAPTER XL ^ ^ DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES-NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. fii: Vll ^®°^^»s*ra*ive adjectives determine the significa- tion of the noun they precede. These adjectives are ? mas^ this, ce, cat; fern. cetU; plural, these, cL. ' ' noun Vbpfor«'«*^^*' "^^ employed before a mascuHne noun. Ce, before a noun commenc ng with a consonant or h aspirate, as : this book, celvvre; this Lnlet, ceC^au; and ce« before a noun masculine commencing ^th a v^wel or ^ ^u e as : this pink, ceta^illet; this pond, cet etangjtls or thtd custom cet usage Ges, these or those, for both genders S^^^^ ' these hamlets, ceshameau^^] these towns c2 3. The numeral adjectives determine the signification of nouns before which they am ^^^xMhr r,\r,^^A „5^^^.^*'^^,^^ of quantity, or an idea of rank or order: ' ^ ^ ""^ '^'^ tl TES. ef. 6. Th« The phyai- 3 are very f children. barricades, children of J tough and ilight. k VE. There are fainst you. deer in the Jtrioua but 'e were no ur garden, our town. le parsnips 3arrots are ripe yet. harvest. CRAL significa- ce : masc. masculine >nant or h '£au; and owel or h 1 ; this or h genders ;owns, ces cation of g un idea NUMKRAL ADJECTIVES, ETC. 25 rheso adjectives are as follows : — 1 Un, m., une, /. 16 Seize. 2 Deux. Vj Dix-sept. 3 Trois, 18 Dix-huit. 4 Quatre. 19 Dix-neuf. 5 Cinq, (o; sounded like it.) 20 Vingt, {t sounded.) 6 Six. (x likes.) 21 Vingt et un 7 Sept, {p silent.) 22 Vingt-deux, etc. 8 Huit, {t sounded.) 30 Trente. 9 Neuf, (/sounded. 40 Quarante. 10 Dix, (k like 5.) 60 Cinquante. 11 Onze. 60 Soixante. "^ 12 Douze. 70 Soixante et dix,^ »0 Quatre-vingt, {t silent.) 13 Treize. 14 Quatorze. 90 Quatre-vingt-dix. 15 Quinze. 100 Cent. Jteinark. — After 70, the French say sixty and eleven, etc., after 90, eighty and eleven, etc. The teacher will do well to require his pupils to write in French the other numbers from 20 upwards. 4. There are two sorts of numeral adjectives. 1. The Car- dinal numbers ; im, deux, trois, etc., which mark the nume- rical quantity of objects, and the ordinal numbers which mark the order or rank, as : first, premier; second, second or deuxieme; third, troisi^me, etc., etc. . |^ •* '"'' Vocabulary. Neighbor, ] statue, character, may-bug, harmony, hedge, rosebush, May Queen, hypocrite, apricot-tree, orange-trees, correct, credit, week, Prussians. butter, butcher, Voisin, m. voisine, f. statue, f. caractere, m, hanyieton, m. harmonie, ^, haie, f. rosier, m. rosiere, f. hypocrite, m. apricotier, m. orangers,m..-p. correct-e. crSdit, m. semaine, f . Frussieiis, heurre, m. boucher. Trial, manners, nephew, niece. news which, learned, joy, salad, aunt, all, I know, inhabitant, should be, lamb, cap, jbrandy, Epreuve, f. moeurs. m. pL neveii. iiihe. nouvellej f. quel. savant* (used in Eng. as a noun.) joie, f. salade^ f. tante. tons. ' je connais. habitant, * (/i silent.) devrait etre. agneau, m. casqiiette, f. eau-de'Vie. * 26 POSSESSIVE AND INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. Sent, To afflict, Affliger. yard, cour. to squeeze, ) to press, 'I'^^rer. to pain, crown, EXERCISE X. Unvoye,* (used in Eng. as a noun.) faire mal. couronner. 1. Je connais ces deux hommes, ils sont voisins. 2. J'ai un ciiapeau, deux casquettes et sept paires de souliers . 3 Ce joune honimo est le neveu de nion oncle et cette dame' est sani6ce ilsontuneassezgrandefamille, trois filles et sept Ills. 4 Leonzo Fevrier est mon jour de naissance. 5 Le- nueJ est le plus savant de ces messieurs. 6. J'ai achetd trois livres de beurrc, cinq livres de fromage et tout ce bois de chauffage 7. Cotto ^preuve a 4t4 trfes s^rieuse pour cette honnete famille. 8 Get hypocrite devrait etre puni, il est bien m^chant. 9. Envoyez-moi quinze honteilles d'eau-de- vie. xO. Le seigneur du village a couronn*^ la rosifere. 11 Lo seigneiir du hameau a re9u sept lettres trha importantes. 1^. Cette casqueitte est trop petite, elle me serre la tete, elle me fait mal. 13. Ces nouvelles que vous v^h'#-de recevoir Bont fausses. ^ 14. Les moeurs de ces hommes ne sont pas comme ^es notres, ce sont des habitants du Bas Canada. Xi). 11 y avait trois agneaux et plusiours ch^vres dans la prairie. n. i CHAPTER XII. POSSESSIYE ADJECTIVES— INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 1. The possessive adjectives determine the nouns which they precede, adding an idea of possession. Plural. ■\ . '■ ■ -^ . Singular. A Eng. Masc. Fern. My Mon Ma thy ton ta his, her, its sotb sa our noire notre your voire imfrc their hur leur Masc. and Fern. Mes tes ses . nos vos Jeurs INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES, ETC. 27 (used in laa noun.) r. J. 2. J'ai rs. 3. Ce dame est es et sept J. 5. Le- !hetd trois e bois de »our cette mi, il est d'eau-de- B. 11. Lo aortantes. tete, elle recevoir sont pas Canada. !s dans la rE as which em. 2. For euphony's sake mon, ton, son, are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before a feminine noun commencing with a vowel or /i irute ; my soul, mondmc; thy disposition, ton humeur. 3. No accent is placed over the a in noire, voire, when these words arc placed before a noun. 4. The indefinite adjectives are those which give to the nouns -which they precede, a vague, indefinite and general idea. Sin GULAR. A Plural. A Enq. Masc. ^ Fem. r " Masc. Fem. All Tout Tonic Tons Toutes such tel telle tels telles which quel quelle quels quellcs not any, no' mil nnlle nuls nullcs not one, no aucun aucune aucuns aucunes many a maint rtiaintc maints maintes certain certain ceriainc certains certaincs few quelquc quelqiie quelques quelques 5. Each one, cliaque, is used only in the singular and for both genders. 6 , Several, x>lusieurs, is only used in the plural and f QrJba13i genders. Qualities, .defects, vices, doak, patrimony, inlicritance, bfttle, tliat, to-morrow, household, ;almost, 'file, ;at the same time, people.reck- on. Yocabulary. .i'.riday, Qualites, pi. defauts, m. pi. vices, m. pi. una^itcaic, m. patrmioine, m. Jientage, m. houteille, f. ,cela. demain. ynenacje, m. presque. lime, i. i.d lafois. ^pn compte. iFfiudiTfidi. Aftnly, Plum, English, after to-mor- row. before yester- day, ' reside, yesterday, I set out, sharpen^ pleases me, .died, jml&rmnt. Prime, f. Anglais, aprts Remain. .avant Mer. demeurent, (3rd per. pi. ofrfe- meurer). hier. je pars. \aiguisent, (3rd per. pi. ,qf ai- .guiser). me plait, ■ynourut, (from .mourir). 28 i ' PERSONAL rRONOlTNS, ETC. You set out, Vous parte::. cargo, cargaison, f. i:itc]ioii-gar- pokujer, m. den, l)uets, hetteravcs, m, pi food, nouniture, f. wareliouse, Tlioyv/.'iitfor, lU^ attendent, (3rd per. pi. you wiU find, w«« trouiJc::, (from ^roMocr). success, rdimi^e, f. magasin, m. ^ EXERCISE XI. ^ 1. Mes habits sont presquo ncufs. 2. Mes onfon+Q rr,+ ^ quaht^s mais ils ont aussi beaucoup ce ddfautr ^ Nnf ' avons beaucoup do botteraves dans ?e potater nos domTs tiques les aiment beaucoup. 4. II v a cerHiTiP^^! bien ni^chantes au monde^ 6. Jo vous af d t n.S'"'"'? mamtes fois de ne pas fairo cela C Ilv a un o.nT^ f p^re recevoir de vos nouvelles dans la ouinzaino « M aimable fille est >t Paris avec sa m^ro en ce Cn"ni \ Ton esp^rance est vam., la reussite de cette aCentst pa^ Jro Dable. 10. Chaque fozs que je passe par le march^ Vnr^h J+o leur p6re et lis attendent avec impatience rhdrita<^e d'nn Z leurs oncles qui vient de mourir au Canada. 13 Nulle Ir irwf^>r^^^^ faire plusieurs chot"; Tla tbl 14. Toute v^nt^ n'est pas bonne ^ dire. 15. Plusieurs T^or* sounes se disputent dans la rue. IC. Les n^airdTMLam; bigue aiguisent leurs dents avec une lime. '^ ^i« ^>io^am. CHAPTER XIII. V PRONOUNS, PERSONAL PRONOUNS. \ ^Z?^''^''!' '' "- r^*? ^^^'^ ^«^«ed mostly for a noun ^. Ihere are five sorts of pronouns ; :i ^^ '■^ noun. 1 Personal. 2 Possessive. 3 Demonstrative. 4 Relative. 5 Indefinite. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 20 3. Tho personal prononna are those which designate movo particularly the throe granxniatical persons. 1st Pel-. — I, je; me, me; to me, 7aoi; we, us, nous. .'hid Per.— Thou, tu ; thee, tc ; to thee, toi ; yow, vous. 3rd Per. — He, it; they. Us; she, die; they, (f. ) elks; it, le, (m.), la, ( f . ) ; them, lea, (m. and f. i^l.); to him, to her, hti ; to them, masc. plu. , C'lix ; fem. plu. , elles. to them, lenr ; himself, sc; to himself, soi. of or from him, her, it, them, are rendered by en. to him, her, it, them, by y. 4. Tho conjunctive personal pronouns whether nomina- tive or objective precede the verb, the nominative coming first, as : we write to her, nonslni ecrivoiis; they love them. •>7s les aiment The negative, nc, separates tho nominative from the objective, as : he does not admire them, il oie les admire pas. In interrogations the nominative comfis after and the ob- jective before the verb, as : do you speak to him ? lul parlez- %-ons ? In the imperative used affirmatively, both direct and indirect pronouns come last, as : speak to me, paiiez moi ; take it, portez le. In the imperative negative the jjronoun precedes the verb, as : do not take it to my office, ne leporte:^ 2)as A mon bureau. 5. Me and te signify, me, to me or at me ; thee, to thee or at thee. He looks at thee, il te regarde ; he will give mo a book, il me donnera %m livre ; he will give thee a book, il te donnera un livre. 6. Nous, vous, signify also in certain cases, to us, to you. He has spoken to us, il nous-a parlc ; he will injure you, il wus oniira. 7. Lid signifies, to him, if speaking of a man ; to her, if speaking of a woman. Letir signifies, to them, and is used for both genders. 8. Eii signifies, from him, f i-om her, from them, (masc. and fem.), of or from that, as : when one loves a person, one often speaks of him or of her ; quand on aime une personne on c.ii parle souvent. 9. Y means, to that, to that thing, to those things : to do one's duty well, one must apply oneself to it j pour 6ie?j TdiTP. P.nn. devoir '''- ^"1!'^ "'i-' ninnl J nil (•']!• /' wre ■aut shj appliquer. 30 rEllSONAL PRONOUNS. ■VOCAIUJLAUV. Cinnfinion, Canvllc, f. contimo, centime, f. muslin, mousscline, f tool, outil, m. (i silent.) September, septembre. wo owe, nous devons. I believe, jc crois. clown stairs, en has. up stairs, en haut that one, celui-l^. fork, fourchette, f. frankness, franchise, f. Tower, thing, I know, crow, run. protection, cautious, Tour, f. chose, f. je connais. corheau. courent, (3rcl per. pi. from courir). ( support, ni. ( appui, ni. soigneux-se. pleasure, obscurity, pass me, look at, whole, "boHy, plaisir, m. obscuritS, f, passez-moi. rcgardez. cntier. corps stable (for cattle,) 6tablc, f. stable (for horses,) 6curie, I wonders, since, drawing room, to be anxious about, half penny, persecuted, persecutS. to maintain ( to keep, I semamtenir. hateful, haHssable. inind, esprit, m. path, chemin, xn. trust, confiancej i. to languish, languir. I thank you, je vous remer cie. thank you, merci, (fam.) turn, tour, m. *(m.) [always, ■* reproach. entirely, to multiply, will you have, genius, distaste, architecture, lawyer, _ brought up, Greeks, admiration, to doubt. merveillcs,(f.j)l ) puisque. salon, ra. sHnquieter de. sou, m. toujonrs. repi'oche. tout-d-fait. multiplier. voulez-vous. genie, m. dego{it, m. architecture, f. avocat. Sieve. Grecs. admiration, f. douter. i3fi EXERCISE XII. 2 ^rpl!,f??"^^'t ^■''''*?', J^Pense; puisque jepense, fexiste 2. Celui-1^ est haiasable qui parle touiours de lui i v s^^cl^rTp"^'^^"^^^ nUs^erons Sns da"n; queWs' si^cles. 4. Passez-moi cette fourchette. Vous 6tes Cn IZir ''^''f ''"'""'^"' ^' ^^ n^^intenir sage dans la pros Vfnt4, c'est savoir marcher sur la glace fi PVnnf^i • vousTu .uu. charmante cousine ? EUe est je pense 'en"bas, PERSONAL PRONOUN'S. 31 (lann lo salon. 8. Cciix qui ne s'inqnifctcnt paa do la justico, forccnt la justico Ji H'inqtiidter d'oux. 9. Si nos cnfauta nous (loivcnt v(5ndration, amour ct assistance, nous Icur dcvons h notro tour lo i)ain du corps ot do I'esprit. 10. Lo talent sans appui no sort h rien dans lo temps oh nous vivons. 11. No craignez pas do multiplier voa bicnt'aits ; mais no les repro- chez jamais si vous voulez en gofiter lo fruit. 12. Ma cra- vate do mousseline n'cst pas irha blanche. 13, Jo demeuro dans CO champ l^bas, dans cette chaumiero pres du bois. 14. La mhre expose sa vie pour I'enfant qu elle a dlov^. 15. Le chrdticn dit : jo pardonno do bon cceur h mes enncmia. CHAPTER XIV. FUNCTION OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. ELISION. 1. Jcj tu, il, Us are always employed as subjects. 2. Moi, toi, nous, vous, elle, elks, eux, lui,{maac.,)soi, may be employed :— 1st. As subjects of tho verb : wo read, nous lisons ; you listen, vous ecoutez ; they speak, ilsparlent 2nd. As complements of the verb : they call us, on nous appelle ; they look at you, on vous rcgardc. (The subject of the verb is the name of the person or of the thing performing the action expressed by the verb ; the complement, on the contrary, is the word which serves to complete the sense of the verb. ) 3. M^jUj^se^Jiii^Jltem. naed tor a elle,) are always comple- ments eitKer direct or indirect. 4. Le, la, les are always direct complements. 5. Lew, en, y are always indirect complements. 6. The direct complement is the word with which the action of the verb is immediately connected without any other word intervening ; They call us, on nous appelle. The indirect complement is the word with which the action of the verb is not immediately connected but separated by a preposition : One speaks of you, on parle de vous. 7. It is necessary to establish a nice distinction between le,*^ la, les, articles, and le, la, ks, pronouns. Le, la, les, articles precede the noun ; le, la, les, pronouns, precede the verb. The lion, le lion ; the bird, Voiseau ; ks oiseaux ; I know mm, je le connais; I know her, je la connais. The samje must be observed mth, kuVf pronoun, and, leur, possessivo *i 32 rERSONATi PRONOUNS, I hi adjective. Leur is a pronoun when it is not followed by a noun and signifies, to them ; in that case it never takes s X spoke to them, je leur aipade. Leur is a possessive adjective o ^mu ^^ ^^"^^^'^ ^y ••* Jioun. Their virtues, leurs vertm 8. The personal pronouns, je, me, U, se, la, h, placed before a word commencing with a vo.vel or h mute would cause a disagreeable hiatus. To avoid this, the final letter is suppressed and replaced by the apostrophe. Examples • I applaud, j'ajJ2>Zandis; he scratches me, il m'egratiane : I hav<^ been rich, fai ^U riche. Vocabulary. »^ He will arrive, II final letter is Examples : I tigne ; I liavQ 7 . Travaillez, mon ami, apres quelque temps d'e'preuve vous arriverez au terme de vos travaux et vous jouirez enfin d'uno Micite' o'ternelle. 10. Pour avoir un corps robuste il faut I'accoutumer c\ obo'ir Tame et Fhabituer h la sueur et aux efforts laborieux. 11. Mes jeunes amies, toutce rju'il y a de beau et d 'excellent dans la nature s'achete au prix de la peine et du travail; la providence Pa ordonn^ ainsi. 12. Voil^ ma belle-sceur. Ou done est-elle ? Je ne la vois pas. C'est ' eette dame qui porte une robe d'indienne. Oui, je la vois main- tenant. 13. Je ne comprends vraiment pas ce que votre ^ commis veut dire. —II est si gutiche— il s'exprime tou jours' d'une maniere tres absurde. 14. Avez-voua vu votre belle- mhre dernierement ? Non, nous ne la voyons pas trha sou- vent. 15. Les enfants sont en6ore dans le verger. Les voyez- vous ? Oui, je vais leur parler. CHAPTER XV. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS— DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 1. The possessive pronouns are those which take the place of a noun previously expressed, and which designate an idea of possession or property. The possessive pronouns are : — Singular. Plural. , * . . * Eno. Mine thine his, herf< ours yours theirs c Masc. Le mien le tien le sien le oiotrs le vutre le leur Fem. La mienne la tienne la sienne la 710 tre ia vdtre la leur Masc. Les miens les tiens les siens les n6tres les vdtres les leurs Fem. Les miennes les tiennes les siennes les notres les votres les leursi 34 DEMONSTRATIVE PROISTOUNS. / 2. A circumflex accent is placed over the 6 of oiotre, voire when these words are placed piter an article: this castle is ours, ce chateau est le notre ; these properties are vours, ces proprietes sont les votres. 3. The demonstrative pronouns are those which take the A^mt ^ 1^°""' ^^^ ^^^ ^^®^ *^ Po^^* ou* <^r designate. 4. 1 he demonstrative pronouns are : Eng. This this one that one Singular. A— ~\r Plural. A__ Masc. Fern. Masc. Fern. Celui ^ Celle Ceux Celles celui-ci celle-ci ceux-ci celles-ci celui-lcc celle-ld ceux-la celles-la 5. Ce,ceci, cela are us6d to point towards are yours, ces. which take the designate. RAL. A Fern, Celles celles-ci celles-la L thing Avithuut ; je n'ai'ine pas e to designate -Id, celles-ld to ered in French ?r, by celui-cij djective, when nate them par- }, Bo7i sens, appeler. associe. je cours. fecris. endormi. envoyez. frapper. jets, parti. pay sage, in. sortez. sortirai-je '{ irmnper. V JjKMONfS'PllATlVE PRONOUNS. 35 To huy, Acheter. Seen, Vn. immediately, sur-le-champ. to danse, danser. to write. ecrire. to sleep, dormir. to make, /aire. cultivated, cultive. newspaper. journal, m. nothing. ne-rien. I\Iarch, page. mars, page, f. to end, to lead to. ahoutir. to work. travailler. hare. lihre, m. screech-owl, chouette, i. vine. vigne, f. would become se naturalise- straw, paille, f. naturalized , raient (3rd per. respectful. respectueux. plu.) type, impression,i. kindness, hienfaits, m. pi. soul, dme, f. <^ye,_ ml, m. beam. poutre, f. Indians, Indiens. prisoner. prisonnier. t- ear, oreille, f. entrance. entree,* (also ear-rings. honcles d'oreilles,i. side dish). rat, rat. omen, augure, m. to gnaw, ronger. for all that. 2)our cela. that which, ce dont. painful, penihle. to renounce. renoncer. your mother. madame however, qiielque. votre mere. EXERCISE XIV. 1. Excusonales f autes d'autrui, n'avons-nous pas les notres ? 2. Les yeux du lifevre sont autres que ceux de la chouette. 3. Le plus mauvais pays est celui ou I'on n'a pas d'amis. 4. Ecoutez ton jours I'opinion des autres, mais ne renoncez pas pour cela k la votre. 5. Le cliemin de la vertu quelque pi^nible qu'il puisse paraitre est le seul qui conduise au bon- heur. 6. Pourquoi regardez-vous une poutre qui est dans I'oeil de votre voisin, vous qui ne voyez pas une paille qui est dans le votre. 7. La veritable Eloquence est celle du bon sens. 8. Ce qui fait le triomphe de la religion, c'est qu'elle console I'homme dans tons les malheurs. 9. Les Indiens ont les oreilles plac^es plus haut que les notres, 10. Ceci est d'un mauvais augure, 11. Ces boucles-d'oreilles me plaisent beaucoup — celles-ci sont en or massif, mais je pr(^f6re celles-lk, 12. Donnez-moi ceci, mon enfant, et portez cela k madame votre mere. 13, L'impression de ce joumal- ci est trfes mauvaise, je prdfere celle-lk, 14. Cette langue est plus r-'CiiQ et plus intercssanto ([uc la notre. 15. Je cours do temps en temps mais cela me fatigtie. 3G KELATIVE PRONOUNS. CHAPTER XVI. RELATIVE OR CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUN^ 1. The relative pronouns are those which, in the , V" ~ j^^ V,..- ...... ,^v^ viLuav wincn, m tiie same sentence, always relate directly to the noun or pronoun which they represent. They are called conjunctive^ecaurthey serve as jHnciioH or bond between that which precedes and that which follows. When one says : Flee from idleness which is the mother of all vices— i^wye^ la paresse qui est la mere de tons l^ Vices, the proiioun qui, serves to join the word paresse to the other words ; it is therefore a conjunctive pronoun. 2. The word which precedes the relative pronoun is called bXrett"" pronoun-that is, literally, which goes 3. The relative pronouns are : — Singular. Plural. ^ .-A.- Eng. Masc. Fern. What '^ Lequel Laquelle of which duqnel de laquelle to which auquel a laquelle qui, who what of which ) of whom I Avhich Masc. Lesquels desquels auxquels Fern. Lesquelles desquelles auxquelles of whom which \ where ] dont. cm. que, dont, wiiere \ '^ , ^ J wiiiuu quol, I /^ cv- 4. Qui, que, dont, quoi, oit do not vary, and serve for both genders and numbers. Ex. :-The house which belongs to me la maison qm m'appartient ; the houses which belonr. to us ks maisons qianoris appartiennent ; the room in which I am' lachamhreouje sms; the places where we were born, lesUeux ou nous sommcs nes. 5 Qui, que, quoi eye called absolute when they are used without antecedent, that is, when the antecedent^is under- S nil T « I ■~^'' ^""^ ^^",^ *^^* ^ ^''^ « /«^^ ^^^« •' ^^h^t shall 1 say to you ? que vous dirai-je ? C. The e of que is omitte ! when the pronoun is followed by a word commencing with a vowel. ' ^ IX Vocabulary. Alouette, f. hriller. Lark, to shinOj cage, cage, f. How, to reside, to hear, i- 1 Comment. denieurer. entendre. •>*i)sh« KELATIVE PRONOUJSS. 37 LOKOUJS^S. h, in the same V pronoun which v^e because they recedes and that dleness which is t la mere de tons word parcsse to 3 pronoun, ronoun is called illy, which goes LURAL. Fern. Lesquelles desquelles mi'xqnelles >m donf. ^ oft: i P- serve for both belongs to me, belong to us, ^n which I am, born, leslieux they are used dent is under- 'it cela? what is followed^by ^ 1 Comment, lemeurer. •ntendre. Country, foreigner, faithful, to thunder, to scold, far from, along time, to deserve, death, need, want, (lamp, life, to applaud, falsehood, astonished, to take care of, gratitude, delightfully, to rest, to bring near, to brush, to accustom one's self, bee, to entwine, to sing, Campagne^ f. Stranger. fidkle. gronder. loin de. longtemps. merittr. mort, f. hesoin, m. liumide. vie, f. applaudir. mensonge, m. etonne. soigner. reconnais- sance, f . a ravir. reposer. rapp^'ocher. brosser. s^accoutimier. aheille, f. s'enlacer. chanter. /— -^Merchant, to obey, to appear, poor man, loss, to weep, to catch, healthy, guilty, miser, every one, conduct, things, ) clothes, ) sorry, angry, boy, waiter, young man, rain, lie, to speak, care, good, improvement, injuries, it is necessary, unbearable, JSlegociant. oheir d. parattre. pauvre. perte, f. pleurer. prendre. sain-e. coupahle. avare. (jid que ce soit. conduite, i. effets, m. juche. gargon. jeune homme. pluie, i. mensimge, m. purler, soin, m. bien, m. amSiora- tion, f, injures, f. pL^ ilfaut. ' * insupportable. EXERCISE XV. ^ 1. La vigne abandonnee it elle-meme cherche un appui au- quel elle s'enlace. 2. Les alouettes desquelles vous parlez chantent k ravir. 3. Le cheval sur lequel Alexandre dtait mont^ s'appelait Buce'phale. 4. Le mensonge est un vice dont on ne saurait avoir trop d'horreur. 5. II y a deux choses I auxquelles il faut s'accoutumer sous peine de trouver la vie I insupportable ; les injures du temps et les injures des hommes. 6. Qui vous a dit de gronder cet enfant — il n'a rienfait. 7. Les enfants sont des marchandises qui sont dif- ficiles k soigner. 8. Les effets qui nous appartiennent n'ont I pas ete bien brosses par le domestique. 9. De quoi cette fille I parle4-elle ? Elle parle de la mauvaise conduite de ces en- ifants. 10. Nous faisons co que nous pouvons, mais nous Isommes bien fatigues. 11. L' Anglais dont la soeur est ici est ! d'une disposition aflfreuse, il est toujours faclie centre nous. 38 INDEFINITE I'HONOUNS. I '\ t I 12. I^es langues que vous apprenez vous seront utiles 1 *^ L-i maison que j occupe maintenant m>partient. 14 Las' oer .Ztf^.' -1 ^f .^^^^lles que nous avons dans notre jarclin sont d'une Industrie remarquable. CHAPTER XVII. INDEFINIT.; NOUNS. ,'.J'+^^®-'''*}®^"'*® pronouns aio tnose which desio-nate in an WrTc^ran^r^^^^^ ^^^^^ thingfoTv^^li^h cney recall an idea. The indefinite pronouns are as follows : We, one, people, they, On. each. others, other people, some one, whoever, another, one another, both, no one, none, not one, several, such, all, whoever, Trhatever, chacmi. autrui. qiieiqu^un. (lukonque. un autre . I tm I'antre. Vun et i'mUre. pets&ime. u^lc■un. pluskurs. tel, tout. qui que ce soli. quoi que ce soit. Hemarh-'AL these pronouns are of the 3rd person 3. Chcun makes chacune in the f emimne and has no plural matcuTr 'sin^S. ^^^ '''' '' '^''^ ''''' '^^ ^ ^^ ^ 'w^ 5. Qmconque is usually masculine singular^ ■4 •I INDEFINITE PEONOUNS. 39 b utiles. 1 3. La ''. 14, Les per- J e'tonne'es de sa Ills notre jardiu designate in an lings of which are as follows : 30. Un autre makes in the feminine U7ie autre, and in the plural, d'autres, les autres for both genders. 11. Flusie^trs is of both genders, and is only used in the pl'jral. . . • • \ 12. Per Sonne is sometimes a noun (then it id feminme,) sometimes an indefinite pronoun. Fersonne is a noun when l\ is preceded by the article or a determinative adjective ; it is a pronoun when it is alone. Ex.— No one came, jyersonne Ti/est vewiit. 13. AiLcun, mil, tel, plusienrs, certain, tout, are sometimes determinative adjectives, sometimes indefinite pronouns. They are adjectives when they are followed by a noun ; they are pronouns when they are used alone. Ex. — Such a one laughs to-day, tel rit aujounVhui ; no one is free from faults, nu\ n'est exemjpt de defauts. >^ •** To file, sickle, to please r'<3. offence, kindness tribute, :^ to envy, J to confess, full. ■'■i- sometimes, it. i aim, end, oit. ;i to aim, ■1 purse, steemed when 1 to fear, iiiit bien. i seriously. has no plural. to strike. ^it are always % a gossip. 1 riot, 1 to complain. atitre; in the 1 slanderer, inine plural, | to cry. s Vun V autre. | we went, to give to singular. i one'w self, juJar mtc^we, 1 ^ Vocabulary. S^ Limer. To cherish. Clierir. faux, f. to look for. chercher. •f 7 plaire. early. de bonne heure offense, f . to finish. finir. hienfait, m. to furnish, fournir. trihuty m. reading, lecture, f. envier. to receive. recevoir. avouer. labor. travail, m. plein-e. to find, trouver, parfois. to sell. vendre. but, m. , ( ( agreeable, agreable. sounded.) to have a grudge en vouloir a . tendre. against. bourse, f. to cost, eoMer. craindre. to teach, enseigner. serieusement. among. entre. f 'tapper. alive,5 viva7\t. bavard-e. to comfort. consoler. ret cite, f. to put on, mettre. se plaindre. every where. partout. mSdisant, m. gospel, evangile, m. pleurer. powerful, puissant. nous alldmes. to discover. decouvrir. se donner. to conquer, vaincre. to wish, vouloir. ^ enemy, ennemi, m. t- J^' tl 11 40 VEIlJi«- -HUBSTANTXVB AND ATTRIBUTIVE VERBS'. EXERCISE XVI m^rea Ips trill if n ti » i^^ Sjuiconqiie flatte ses cun a son d^faut oh toujours il revient iS qvi Vrin^n C plemes mains qui n'oblige personne 1^ p!;^; • 1-^'' ^ ^•valent mieux on'nn i zT i^?^^^"^®' , l*^- Parfois, pluaieiirs IK m mieux quun. 14. Aucun n'est prophfete chez soi- ls. Toutatteste le genie d'un Dieu Createur Ifi TpI 1; pns qui crovait TirPTi^r« '-reatour. Jb. lei est ---- — fe'""* pns qui croyait prendre. '<^f^'\)CA c^r- , CHAPTER XVIII. " P^ VERBS-SUBSTANTIVE VERB-ATTRIBUTIVE VERB. 1. The verb is the part of speech which expresses an np+inn ICta^eS^^^^^^^^^ °^ simp^the e"2ntr t~U^m^^^^^^^^^^ '* " ^^^J"^-*^'^ b^P— . numbers, 2. Grammarians only admit of one verb-the verb to be wlucii IS called suhstantiva verb, because it subsisIsW itself and does not contain any idea if attribution. All the^other verbs are called attributive, because they Result from tho combination of the abstract ^erb Hre, andean attribute as I love, y«me, which is equivalent to ie .m.^aW ; I run* je cours—je stus coumnt. ' ^ »" , x lun, 3 The subject of the verb is that to wh-ch the existenoo or the action expressed by the verb relates. ^'^^^^enco 4. llie subject of a verb may be : 1st A noun n« • Cr^n ^ee. eyevy thing Dienvoittou/ 2nd. A pronoun : We "read nous hsons. 3rd. An infinitive : To hate^is a t?rmen? to- est ^tntourment. 4th. An adverb of quantity "Xny per sons thmk so,^ heaucoup de personnes le pensent. ^ ^ ^ •^ l-''??''''^" '''' complement of a verb is the word or ot the verb vk«!t -'-'«"-i<<= •»'«( « the complement I V 1/ VERBS'. msoler los nns is les bienfaits. tribut queies iqiie flatte sea e cherche k se : et mechant a nt du mal les utrui par soi- i ses erreurs. ir.^ 11. Cha- Tel donne ^ ois, pluaieurs ete chez soi. ^16. Tel est [BUTIVE ses an action existence or ns, numbers, verb, to be, sts by itself Lll the other lit from the tribute, as : cint ; I run, le existenco n, as : God : We read, fment, ha'ir Many per- bhe word or ' All comes omplement VJ?R 3— SUBSTANTIVE ANI. ATTKIBUTIVB V£KBS. 41 4 Vocabulary. / rig, stm^, industry, monkey, to pillage, are i)0sted, swarm, lightly, whilst, quarrel, Hike, do you like ? rourceaii, m. aiguillon, n , indiistri&, f. singe, m. pillcr. sont posees, f. essaim, m. lestemetit. sec. tandis. qnerelle, f. faime. almez-vous ? I don't care, cela m'est eyal introduces s'introdmt. itself, to know, judge, I fear, T shall give, half, }/ ou will ex- cuse, are renowned, sont evil, unless, enclosure, connaUre. connaisseur* je Grains, je donnersii. moitie, f. vans exciiserez. To gather, gather, thief, ^ to begin to, booty, policeman. CueilUr. cueillent. larroUf m. sc mettre A. hutin, m. agent de po- lice, m. patte, f. d temps. Uever. fai si f aim. \ paw, m. time, to raise, I am so hun- he is igno- rant of, to doubt, bad, wicked, nor I either, powerful, tell me, to cultivate, you will con- quer, modesty, vnodestie, f. renom- firm, ferm^. mces, f . you wish, vous voidez. mal, m. analysis, anahjse, f. d, moins qiie. book-binder, relieur. enclos, m. painter, peintre. to draw on one's self, s^attirer. il ignore. douter. mschant, ni moi non plus. puissant. raconte%-moi. cultiver. vous vaincrez. i^ \\ EXERCISE XVlI. 1. L'abeille perca la peau du pourceau de son tendre aiguil- lon. 2. L'industrie des singes dans I'e'tat de liberte, pr^sente h, la fois des tableo.ux curieux et singuliers., 3. Un essaim d'abeilles poursuit et accable le petit gargon. 4. Qui cherche a se venger d'une legere oftense s'attire bien souvent plus de mal qu'il ne pense, 5. Je donnerai ce livre au relieur. 6. Ce monsieur ignore bien des choses, mais cependant il est tres habile. 7. Le larron se mit k I'ouvrage mais il fut inter- roinpu par im agent de police. 8. Je crains que vous n'ar- riviez k temps, a moins que vous ne courie?. 9. Arrive'e au lieu de I'expddition la moitie de la troupe s'introduit dans 42 (X)Mrr.EMKNTS OP VERBS—VERHS— PEKSONS, ETC. 1 enclos. 10 Les sentinellea sont poseos, et I'armtJe se met on marche dans lo plus profond silence. 31. Get hommo vient do Chez son associd-ils ont ou une querelle. 12. Dieu piinifc 1 orgiioil des enfants do Nod lui dlevaient la tour do Babel. IJ. Los armes do la Franco seront victoricuses. 14 Lcs Oanadienncs sont renomrnees pour leur beautd et lour anila- se il ct t •''t ' ''"'''' *""* ^^""^'^ ^"'"'^ ^'' «'^"^Pa2ne-je siiis CHAPTER XIX. COMPLEMENTS OF VERBS— VERBS-PERSONS NUMBERS, ETO. ' ^ 1. Verbs admit of two complements : the direct and tho indirect. 2. The direct complement is the idea which immediately refers to the action expressed by the verb ; that which com- pletes the meaning without the assistance of any other word It answers to who, qui ? for persons, and to what, quoi ? for things. I like study, j'aime VHude ; one esteems virtuous people, on estime les gens verhmix. 3. The indirect complement is the idea which refers to the action of the verb m an indirect, manner and which is only connected to the verb by one of fcho prepositions a, de, par. It ans^vers to, a qui ? a quoi ? de qui / dc quoi ? par quiVpar quoi ? To hurt one's interests, nuire a ses inUrek; to slander any one, medire de quelqu'un. 4. The persons of the verb are the differenu forms which it takes. There are three persons. A verb is of the first person when preceded by je, nom: i read, >. lis; we read, nous lisons; of the second person when preceded by tu, vous; thou readest, ticks; you read, vous lisez; of the third person when It IS preceded by a noun or by il, Me, Us, dies ; he studies, il fi«Mo?ie ; she works, die Iravaille; they pray, iU prient \ thev smg, dies chantent. "^ 5. There are two numbers in verbs as in nouns 6. There are five kinds of verbs : active, passive, neuter reiiective and impersonal. ' 7. The active verb expresses an action performed by its subject, as : the heavens declare the glory of God, les cieux racontent la gloire de Dieu. 8. The passive verb represents the action expressed by tjgUlii-AJW, ' C'OMFLEMENTS OF VERBS— VERBS— PEKSONH, ETC. 43 ect and tho it, as endured by ita subject, as : she is loved by all her friends, elle ed ahnce de toutes sns amUs, 9. The neuter verb is tho one which io neither active nor passive. Sometimes like tho active verb it expresses an action of the subject, but it differs fro;u it in this, that it has no complement. One can easily tell a neuter verb by i^lacing im- mediately after it, somebody, quelqu'un, or something, qnelqua chuse. To please, plairc, is a neuter verb as it is nnpossiblo to &ny plahe- qudquhm but plairc a qnelqn^nn. 10. The reflective verb sets forth an action which falls or ia reflected on the subject itself, and la conjugated with two pronouna of tho same person, as : I flatter myself, jc mejlattc. 11. Impersonal verbs are those which are employed only in the 3rd person sinjinlar, as; It rains, ilpkut: it snows, U neif/e. Vocabulary. To keep up, absent, address, bank, sympathy, since, to gain, prize, scholar, to meet, eye-brow, market, features, wonderful, hair-dresser. guided, not, post-ofSce, proverb, red, steeple, "threshold, bull, stupidity, {ipectacles, discover, opera glass, Entretemr. absent, adresse, f. ba'}iqiie, f. sympathie, f. dcpuis. (jagner, (liq.) prix, m. ecolier, 36 rejoindre, sourcil, m. •rnarche, m. traits, m. pi. merveilleux-se. perruquier. guide, point, paste, l. prove7'be, m. rouge. cMier, m. seuil, m. taureau. hetise, f. lunette, f. decouvrir. lorgnette, f. To bo cloudy, to pxit on one's hat, storm, to come, to proceed from, beauty, to apply, attentive, • jealoiisy, inclination, awl, meannoss, solder, to injure. soot, unfortunately, to cause, CasJtilliaii, cambric, chimney- sweep, cork. Sa couvrir, : orage, m. veriir, {venir fol. by prep, de, and an inf. , means, tohavo just.) beaute, f. s'appUquer. applique-e. jalousie, f. pente, f. alene, f. poingort, m. mesquinerie, i. soudure, f. mdre. suie, f, malheureusement. faire, (boforo an infinitive.) castillan, (liq.) batiste, f. ramoneur. bouchon, m. . !i ' ' m 4; iCKUAPlTULATOIlV KXKKCISEji. To unload, JMchanjer. banker. hannidev bank concert, note, to cut, hatter, banqaier. concert, ni, billet, (liq.) C(m2)er, chapel ler. Cork-screw, Tird-bonchon, m. ^f3,r, an loin, boot, Clady's,) bottine, f. to avoid, eoiter. ^•^"ff) inanchon, 311. to forbid, defcndre. EXERCISE XVIII. 1 Je d^com-re au loin e clocher do IMglise do notro village. 2. Cot enfant s'apphque^rouvrage, il est tr^a industrieiTx. .nais malheureusemont il est sourd. 3. II f aut dviter do nuiro .m'o3?hT- /• I^^^« f "£^il« . The peasants of this hamlet are very kind. 7. This news will be received with joy. 8. Those men yonder are Lower Canadians, their manners are not like ours, f 9. The 12th ui January, 1870, was a happy day in my life. 10. They ^ 41^ HECAPITUL ATOU V KX RR(nSF.S. 45 Tmvo bought many things f(»r to-morrow. 11. Those boots hurt me, they are too small. 12. This severe trial has afllicted this poor family. 13. Three hundred soldiers were made pri- soners. 14. There are nearly two millions of inhabitants in the city of Paris. 15. (Jno can attain {0)i pent aller) cele- brity by a thousand different ways. ^ -• EXERCISE XI. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES— INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES, (Seo Chaptor XII, pajjo 26.) <'~ 1. Ho has many beets in his garden. 2. \ye have told you many times not to do tliat. 3. My hopo is vain, I no longer hope to see my daughter. 4. My waistcoat is nearly new, but my coat is rather old. 5. We met several negroes in the street. 6. Every time I go by that shoi», I buy some- thing for my amiable little niece. 7. You sot out on Tharsdny. I hoj)e to receive a letter from you oh Mondajt*** 8. It is very difficult to do several things at once. 9. You will find your cousins in the garden. 10. No path of flowers leaa8(riR conduii. a) to glory. 11. The success of this impor- tant afiair is doubtful, his hope is vain. 12. Messieurs P. have just re "eived a cargo of oranges. 13. Our pears and apples are not abundant (f. pi.) this year. 14. No clerk is more inattentive than this one. 15. I see a policeman, several men are quarelling in tlie street. EXERCISE XII. PRONOUNS— PERSONAL PRONOUNS. ^ (See Chapter XIII, page 28.) 1. I believe your sister is coming. 2. Many are persecuted for their opinions. 3. That man always speaks of himself, it is a hateful habit. 4. I demand this from you ! entire; confi- dence and great frankness. 5. You flatter me. — No, he who flatters his master betrays him. <). Have you spoken to the lawyer 1 No, I never speak to him. 7. The genius of Charles Dickens will live for ever. 8. I asked his protection, but ho refused me this favor. I 9. You were, I believe, the last in the class, you languished in obscurity. 10. You iinished your task before all your rivals and you were victorious. 11. I am never anxious about (des) the affairs of others. 12. To do your duty well, you must applv yourself to it. 13-. You love him but you never speak of him. 14. He spoke to us of this, 46 liECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. exehcise XIII. FUNCTION OF PEIiSONAL PHONOUXS. (See Chapter XIV, page 31.) 1. You listen to the advice of your friends. 2. Thev call m, we must go at once. 3. She writes that she wil arrive «oon With the daughter of the minister. 4. J hear bv mv clerk that business is very dull. 5. One speaks of you and one blames your inattention and laziness. 0.^ I know her 'weH inkwTthr^'T"' ^-- Th^ W yon see witirjy mole: W fi *^e.fonof our minister. 8. I told them you were Jiere, they will come immediately! 0. The cat is verv wild hescratchesthechild'sface. 10. S^n who wiS? to be W^^^^^ in their country must be useful to it. 11 If vou wir], to 1.^ liappy, my friend, you must work, (JlfautJi^nn^t Have you seen my sister-in-law? She wishes tq'see yo ^^ 13 W t::oZr\r)T^' '^ ^fr %^^"^* -a«takes in l" accounts. 14. I have seen the Canadian Volunteers their enthusiasm was great, (they had much enthusiasm) ' EXERCISE XIV. /- ^^ POSSESSIVE PPONOUNS-DEMONSTRATIVr PKONOUNS. \^ (See Chapter XV, page 33.) 1. Has your brother my horse ? He has neither his nor mgner tnan ours. 3. These pens are good, but I Wer t'pliSe^s^ t S^-^^^^^^^^^^^-dyNvithmyrespSS compliments. 5. Has your sister my ear-rings ? She has neither yours nor mine, she has hersf 6. Are those vour to hanZet^ 8 T^Jf ^^^ f ''''*"^, '^ P''^^"^"^ ^''^ it leads +L wi ? * ^A^ ^^^'"'^ ""^ example instructs much more than that of precept.K.9. The wounds of the body are 1 ealed (^^ ferment); those of tiie soul are always opened.^ 10 Never llT *i\\^^^^^f «e8 which you have received as quickly S those which you have gi-anted. 11. i prisoner has the lb Jr?v of thinking, (nif.,; but not of acting, (inf.) 12 He who speaks to you is your benefactor. 13.^^1^ mus^c of the an cient Greeks was Hiffpront frr-ii nnr=, i^ •»'^ %^" ..r^" who die with regret-far ■S'^^'flZ^thefr cIS^Xm RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 4r t cautious, lie become iiatnralized in ours, mine. .15. Your eyes are better than EXERCISE XV. RELATIVE OR CONJUNCTIVE x^RONOUNS. (See Chapter XVI, page 36.) :?. The house which belongs to my father is very large. 2. The room in which I sleep is not healthy. 3. Who has done that 1 I believe your little sister is guilty of that abomi- nable action. 4. The places where we were born are dear to us. 5. You must (il fmd) avoid idleness which is the mother of all vices. 6. Which of those books have you read 1 i think I have read the second and third volumes. 7. The merchant of whom you spoke this morning is dead. 8. The house in which I live belongs to this foreigner.l 9. Far from the per- sons who are dear to us, every abode (toute demeure,) is a/^^J,cuA desert. 10. Whoever wishes to be loved must be amiable." 11. The life of the miser is a play of which one only applauds the scene which;ends it. 12. In the, (^ountrjo^^^here there are ■ lions, there are'^oga capable of, fighting tfierfi. 13. The looks in which anger is depicted (beinte). ,14. Do not grant your ,; confidence thr^if o'^o-::^'/:'^^^ would be the^-^" onq in which n<5 Msehooa could be f diina. i> i4A«. <3kj t.'t-*-*-'* *" ttk i EXERCISE XVI. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. (See Chapter XVII, page 38.) 1. People (on) end where they ought to commence. 2. When one is a christian of whatever sect it may be, one is not allowed to be a coward. 3. When one is ^oung, rich and pretty, like you ladies, one is loved. 4. Y ' 9ver is a gossip must suff"er sometimes. 5. Whoever reaub tie Gospel attentively will discover admirable things. 6. Whosoever ((^tti) chooses badly for himself, chooses badly for others. 7. We must not speak ill of others. 8. No one is a greater slanderer than that man.)c 9. No one was wounded during the riot. 10. There were 3nany intelligent persons at the meeting. 11. No one would injure his friends if he understood his interests. 12. Did ;any one ever doubt seriously the existence of God. 13. This man has always a grudge against some one. 14. Each one of the chiefs commands his troops. 15. Each one of those pictures has cost me eight Napoleons. 16. Women have each their caprices. 48 MOODS AND TENSES OP VERBS, V'.i EXERCISE XVII. VERBS— SUBSTANTIVE VERB— ATTRIBUTIVE VERB. (See Chapter XVIII, page 40.) 1. God sees everything and everything jomea from him. ^. It IS dangerous to go near a swarm of bees. 3. I shall f^'mi^^'i'.^i'*^^^'* !^?"k t^ *1^« child if he is good (sage.) 4. Ihe thief began his work but was interrupted by a police- man. 5. That merchant has just seen his partner, they have had a great quarrel. G. I am so hungry that I could eat a piece of dry bread. 7. The Canadian girls are renowned for their beauty and their amiabilityX 8. The people raise their Hands to God without ceasing and yon doubt even if he exists. 9. India produces ivory. 10. God forced man to cultivate the earth. 11. Every thing changes with time. 12. To love IS a want of the soul. 13. She has lived the space of a morning. U. Firm modesty honors innocence. lo. Analysis is the source of discoveries. EXERCISE XVIII. COMPLEMENTS- VERBS—PERSONS NUMBERS, ETC. ' (Sec CljapLcr XIX, patre 42.) 1. Superstition causes a fchousand accidents. 2. Sympathy unites our destinies. 3. Let us work ; work keeps up our Health. 4. lyrants always have a miserable lot. 5. Heaven protects virtue ! 0. Ma,n is born to reign overall the animals. 7. Ood wishes to be known and adored by his creatures 8 A moment can destroy an age of happiness. 9. H& was sur- rounded by the Lords of his court. 10. He wa,s guided by the forco of h.s genjnj, .11. Man is bom, lives and dies. 1^ Louis XI Vreijrned^eventy-two years. 13. We must not allow man to despisohimselt altogether. 14. It is warm. Let lis go for P.. walk. No, it is io?gy. J 5. Ttis^viTidy, 1 prefer staying at home. ir>. a Castillian proverb says that one must always atteck the bull by the horns CHAPTER XX. MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS. 1. Moods express the different modes or forms in wliich the verb presents to the mind existence or action. MOODS AND TENSES OF VERBS. 49 MBTTTIVE rs innocence. 2. There are five moods, viz : Indicative, Conditional, Im- perative, Subjunctive and Infinitive. ■ 3. The indicative presents the existence or the action in a positive manner, as : I read, je lis ; I was reading, je Usals. 4. The conditional presents the existence or action as subor- dinate to another action expressed or understood, as : I would read if I had a book, je lirais si favais un livre. 5. The imperative expresses the idea of command or prayer. Obey your parents, oheisscz a vos parents ; give me alms, if you please, faites moi Vaumone sHl vous plait. 6. The subjunctive expresses the idea of doubt, desire, wish, or fear, subordinate to another verb, without which it cannot form complete sense, as : I doubt whether he will do it, je douteqitHl le fosse; I fear lest he may come, je crains guHliie vienne. 7. The infinitive presents the existence or the action m an indefinite and general manner, as : To speak, parler ; to listen, icouter. 8. There are three principal tenses in verbs— the present, the past and the future— which are still further subdivided into eight, viz : The present, the imperfect, the past definite, the past indefinite, the past anterior, the pluperfect, the future absolute, and the future anterior. 9. The present expresses the existence or action as pre- sent, as : I read, je lis ; you listen, vous ecoutez. 10- The imperfect expresses the action passed as far as the moment when one is speaking is concerned, but it indicates that it was yet imperfect with regard to another action pas- sed, as : I was reading when you entered, jc Usais quand imis etes entre. 11. The past definite presents the existence or acHon as entirely past, as : I travelled last year, je voyageai Vannee passee. 12. The past indefinite indicates the existence or action as passed without making anything precise, as : I have played, j'ai joue. 13. The past anterior expresses the existence or the action as having taken place before another at a past period, as : When I had dined, I set out, quand j'eus dine je partis. 14. The pluperfect marks not only that the action is passed, but that it was also passed with regard to another past action, as : I had finished wlien you entered, j'flvai^^/^m quand vous etes entree. »^ 50 CONJUGATION OP THE VERB etre. 15. The future expresses the action as yet to come, as : 1 shall read this book, je lirai ce livre ; he will do his duty, il fera son devoir. 16. The future anterior expresses the action as yet to come, but anterior to another future circumstance, as : 1 shall have read this book before his return, J'aurai In ce Uvre avant son retour. 17. The verbs are divided into simple and compound tenses. The simple are composed of the simple word, as : I sing, je chante. The compound are those that have the verb to have or to he, as : To ha\e sung, avoir chante; they would have danced, ils auraient danse. 18. There are four conjugations in French. The first ends in er, as : To sing, chant-er~ih.e second in ir, as : To finish. fiu'-ir re, as 19. serve have. -the third"in oir : To receive, recev-oir — the fourth in : To sell, vendr-re. There are two verbs called auxiliaries because they to conjugate the other verbs : etre, to be j avoir^ to X. i CHAPTER XXI. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ETBE—TO BE. l^ INDICATIVE- — INDICATIF. Past inaejinite Passe indenni. Present. Present. I have been, J'ai m. i am, thou art, he is. Je suis. tu es. il est. thou hast been, he has been, we have becn^ tu as et6. il a HL nous avons t.t4. you have been, vous avcz ^t6. we are, you are. nous son^mes. vous dtes. they have been, ils out 6t4. they are, ils sont. Past anterior. Passe antfirieur. Imperfect. Imparfait. I had been, J'eus ete. I was. J'4tais. thou hadst been, tu eris M^. thou wast. tu dtais. he had been, il eut HL he wai!. il 6tait. we had been, nous eOmes iti. we were. nous Hions. you had been, vous elites it4. you Were, vous itiez. they had been. ils eurent Hd. tliey were. ils Haitnh Pa8t definite. PaasC defini. Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. I was, Je fits. 1 had been. J'avais iti. thou wa4«t.-. til. fun. thou hadst been. tu avals it6. he was. ilfut. he had been. %l avaitM. we were, nous fumes. we had been. nous avians H«. you were, vous fates. you had been, vous avicz et6. tney were. ilsfurent. they had been, ils avaient 4t^» CONJUGATION OF THK VERB aVOlT. 51 The first ends as : To finish, -the fourth in Pass6 ind^fini. Passe autfirieur, J'eus 4t6. tu eus ^.t^. il eut 6U. nouseOmesiti. vous elites H4. us eureitt U6. lus-que-parfait. J'avais iti. ta avals 6t6. %l aoaititi. nous avians 4M. V0U8 avicz eu. its avaient 4t4» Future, I shall be, thou shall be, he shall be, ■\ve shall be, you shall be, they shall be, Futur. Je serai, tuseras. il sera, nous serins, vous serez. lis seront. Future anterior. Futur antCrieur. I shall have thou shalt have he will have we shall have you shall have they shall have I fl> a J J'aurai ^tt'. tu auras iti. tl aura M. nous aurons 6td. vous aurez M. Us auront liti. CONDITIONAL— COSDITIONEL. Present. 1 should be, thou shouldst be, he wouid be, we would be, you would be, they would be, Past. I should thou shouldst he would we should you would they would ^ v *? a* a n Tresent. Je serais, tu serais, il serait, nous serions. vous seriez. Us seraient. PassS. J'aurais 4ti. tu aurais iti. il aurait it4. nous aurions dte. vous auriez dte. Us auraient etd. ^\ IMPERATIVE— IMP^RATIK. Pres, Past. BUBJUKCTIVE— SUBJOJJCTIF. Present. That 1 may be, that thou mayst be that he may be, that we may be, that you may be, that they may be, lmx>erfect. Pr6sent. Queje sois. que tu sois. quHl soit. que nous soyons. qtie vous soyez. quHls soient. Imparfait. Queje fusse. That [ might be, that thou mijfhtst be, que tti fusses. that he might be, quHlfut. that we might be, que nousfussipns. that you miglit be, que vousfussiez. that they might be, qiCilsfussent. Past. Passg. ■> That I may ^ Qiiefaie iti. that thou mightst » que tu aies 4t6. that lie may that we maj' that you may that they may » quHl ait did. g* que nous ayons dtd. 2 que vous axjez dtd. J quHls aient dtd. Pluperfect. Plus-qae-parfait. That I might X- Quefeusse dtd. that thou mightst^ que tueusses dtd. that he might » qu'il eut dtd. that we might ^ que nous exissions dtd that vou might g que vous eussiez dtd. thkt they might -K quHls eiissent dtd. INFINITIVE— INFINITIF. PRES.— To be, etre Past.— lo have been, avoir dtd. PARTICIPIiES— PARTICIPES. Pres.— Being, etant. (Be, Sois. < let us be, soyons. ( be, soyez. /Have l.een, Aie dtd. < let us have been, ayons dtd. (have been, ayezdtd. CONJUGATION OF THE VERB J[ FOIi^—TO HAVE. p (Been^' dtd. ^■^^^'tliavhigbcen, ayant dtd. INDICATIVE- Present. I have, thou hast, ho has, we have, you have, they have, INDICATIF. Present. J'ai. tu as. it a. nous avons. vous avez. tls ont. Imperfect. I had, thou hadst, he had, we had, you had, they had, Imparfait, J'avais. tu avais. U^avait. nous avio'ns. vous aviez. ils avai^'-nt. 52 CONJUGATION OF THE VERB ClVOir, Past definite. rass6 (I6ttn!. !!!ii I liad, etc. Teus. tu eas. il cut. noun efinies. votiH eutes. Us exireiit. Pant indefinite. Pass6 indfifinl. I liavc had, etc. J'«i ev,. tu as eu. il a eu. nous avons eti. vousavez eu. ■lis ont eu. Past anterior. Passe ant6rieur. I liad had, etc. J'eus eti. tu eus eu. il exit eu. nous cihnes eu. vous eutes eu. , ilseurent eu. Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. J'avais eu. tu avais eu. il avait eu. nous avians eu. vous aviez eu. Us avctient eu. Futur. J'aurai. tu auras, il aura, nous atirons. vous aurez. Us aurnnt. Future anterior. Futur auterieur. I liad had. etc. Future. I shall have, etc. I ahall have had etc. J'aurai eu. tu auras eu. il axira eu. notisaurons r,u. vous aurez eu. Us auront eu. COXniTIOXAIi— COKDITIONKIi. Present. I shoiild have, etc. Present, J'aurais. tu atirais. il aurait. nous aurio7is. votis auriez. Us auraieiit. Past. Pass6. I should have J'aurais eu. had, etc. tti aurais eu. il aurait eu'. nous aurionscit, wus auriez eu. Us auraient eu. IMPKRATIVE— IMriaATlK. ( Have, Ale. Prks. i let us have, ayons. (have, a]iez. ( Have had, A ie eu. Past. •< let us have had, aijons eu. ( have had, ayez eu. SUBJUNCTIVE— SUIWOXCTIF. \ Present. PrC-seiit. That I may Qtie faie. have, etc. qxie tu aies. qu'il ait. que nous ayons. que vous ayez. qiCilsaient. Imperfect. Imparfait. That I might Que feusse. have, etc. qtie iu^tisses. qu'il eut. que nous eussions. que vous eussiez. qu'ils eussent. Past. Passe. Tliat I may liave Que faie eu. , had, etc que tti aies eu. qu'il ait eu. quo nous ayons eiu que vous ayez eu. qu'ils aient eti. Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. That I might Quej'etisse eu. have had, etc. que in eus'ses eu. qu'il eiiteu\ que nous eussions eu. que vous eussiez eu. qu'ils CAissent eu. INFINITIVE— IXFIXITIF. Pres. — To have, avoir. Past. — To have had, avoir eu. PAUTICirLES-PARTICIPES. l*RES.— Having, ayant. Past i ^^> *"» ""^j ''"^j ^'*^^- • \ Having had, ayant eu. I 'aura is eu. lauraiscu. auralt eu'. im.i aufionsev. nu auriez eu. s aumlcnt eu. Aie. ayons. aijcz. A ie eu. ayons eu. ayaz eu. ! had. 1— SUB.IOXCTIF. V PrC'sent. «e faie. le til aies. Oil ait. ie nous ayons. le voiis ayez. Cilsaient. Imparfait. ue j'eusse. te iueusses. Cil cut. te nous eussions. le vous eussiez. t'ils eussent. Passe. ue faie eu. , le tu aies eu. ''il ait CM. 10 nous ayons eiu '.e vousaycz eu. I'ils aient cti. Plus-que-parfait. •(ej'ettsso eu. te ill eiLs'ses eu. ''11 eOteiix e nous eussions eu. le vous eussiez eu. ',Hls eussent eu. — IXFIXITIF. avoir, id, avoir exi. — PARTICIPES. ayant. eu, eue, cus, cues. d, ayant eu. VIRST CONJUGATION IN Cr. ^>^ EXERCISE XIX. VERBS ETRE AND AVOIR. 72c»u'. > tu aurais " il aurait " nous aurions aim-iK vous auriez " ilsauraient " IMPERATIVK— IJiriflllATIF. PaF.«. Past. ( Love, I let us love, ( love, A im-e. aiin-ons. aim-cz. j Uave loved, Aie aiin-^. •< let ua have loved, ayons a . ,ti-4. ( have loved, aijez aim-^: SUBJUNCTIVE— SUBJONCTIF. V Present. That 1 may love, etc. Present. Qxic j'aim-e. que tu aim-es. qu'il aim-e. que nous aim-ions, que vous aim-iez. qti'iliaim-ent. Imparfait. Que j'aim-asse. que tu aim-asses, qu'il aim-dt. que nous aim-ass'ions. que vous aim-assicz. qu'ils aim-assent. Passe. Que f aie aim-4. que hi aies " qu'il ait " que nous ayons ainir^' que vous ayez " qu'ils aient " Plus-que-parfait. Quefeusse aim,-<'-. que txieusses " qu'il eAt " que n. eussions aim-'^ . que vous eussiez " qu'ils eussent *' INFFNlTlVB— ISFINITIF. PKng.— To love, aim-er. Past.— To have loved, avoir aiwr-d. PARTICIPLES— PARTICIPES. Pres. — Loving', nim-ant. PAST.-Loved, \aim^s, avmr^es. Imperfect That I miaht love, teco. Past. Tliiii I may have loved, etc. Pluperfect. That I might have loved, etc. II SECOND CONJUOATION IN ir. 55 ■SUBJONCTIF. j'aitn~e. in aim-es. I aim-e. nous aim-ions, vous aim-iez. l^aim-ent. faim-asse. tu aim-asses. I aim-dt. nous aim-ass'ions. vous atm-assiez. Is aim-assent. lus-que-parfait. aim-er. cd, avoir aim--(i. -PARTICIPE8. aim-ant. aim-i^t aim-t'<% 2nd CXmJUGATION- verbs IN IR. INDICATIVK— ISBICATIF. FutUVC. FuiUl.*. Present. I finish, etc. Imperfect. I finished, etc. PrCseiit. Je fin-is. tu fin-is. il fin-it. nous fin-issons. vous fin-issez. Us fin-issent. Imparfait, Je fin-issais. tu fin-issais. ilfin-issait. nous fin-isiions. vous fin-issiez. Us fin-issaient. Past definite. " PassS dSfini. 1 finished, Je fin-is. etc. tu fin-is. il fin-it. nous fin-imes, vousfin-ites, lis fin-irent. Past indefinite. Pass§ ind§fini: I have finished, J'ai fin-i. etc. tu as " ila " nous avons fin^. vov^ avez " Us ont '• Past anterior. Passfi ant6rieqr. i had finished, etc. Pluperfect. I had finished, etc. J'eusfinr-i. tu eus ** il exit " nous eHmes fiiv-i. vous eUtcs " Us eurent *' Plus-que-parfait. J^avais fin-i. tu avais " il avait, " OTous avions fin-i. vous aviez '* Us avaient, •* I shall finish, Je fin-irai. etc. tu fin-iras. il fin-ira. nous fin-irons, vous finirez. Us fijir-iront. Future anterior. Futur antCrieur. I shall have J'aurai fin-i. finished, etc, tu auras " il aura " _ ^ noxis aurons fin-i. vous aurcz " Us auront " CONDITIONAL— CONDITlONEIi. Present. PrCsewt. I should finish, Je fin-irais. etc. tufivr-irais. ilfin-irait. nous fin-irionR. vous fin-4riez. Us fin-iraient. Past. I should have finished, etc. Passg. J^aurais fin-i. tu aurais " il aurait " noits aurions fin-i. vous auriez " Us auraient " m H a 0-1 IMPERATIVE— IMP^RATIF. ( Finish, fin-is. i let us finish, fin-xssons. { finish, fiiv-issez. ( Have finished, aie fin-t. i let us have finished, oj/07is fin-i. { have finished, ayez fivr-i. BUBJUNCTIVE— SUBJONCTIF. Present. That I may finish, etc. Present. Que je fin-isse. que tti fiiv-isses. qu'il fin-isse. que nous fin-issions. que vous firtr-issiez. qu'ils fin-isseni. 56 THIRD CONJUGATION IN Oir. liiii Imperfect. Tliat I might finish, etc. Past. Imparfait. Qtie je fin-iMe. que tu fin-isses. qu'il fin-it. que nous fin-issumn. que vouH fin-issicz. qu'ils fin-issent. Pasa6. ¥ y That I may have Que faie fin-i. finished, etc. que tu aiesjin-i. qu'il ait " que nous ai/ons fin-i. que vous ayez ' ' ^yA qu'ils aient " Pluperfect. Plu8-(iue-parfait. That I might Qiyc j'eusse fin-i. have flnislicil, (j»ie tu eusset; " etc. qu'il eiit " que nouseussioHsfin-i. que vous eussiez " qib'ils eussent " INKIN'ITIVK— INFINITIF. PRES.— To finish fin-ir. Past. —To have finished, a voir fin- i I'ARTICI I'LE8— PARTICIPES. PuKS.— Finishinjf, fln-issant PAST. -Finished, \M-i,fin-ieJn-i.. 3rd CONJUGATION— A^ERBS IN OIB >J INDICATIVE— INDICATIF. Present. I receive. etc. ' *l' ^ Imjjerfect. I received, etc. Er6sent. Je reg,-oi8. tu re^-ois. H re^-oit. nous rec-evons: ■vous rec-evez. Us re<;.-oivent. Imparfait. Je TTcev-ais. tu recev-ais. il recev-ait. ncus receo-ions. vous recev-iez. Us receo-aient. Past definite. I received, etc. Pass6 d6fini. Je reg-us. tu reg-^is. U reg-ut. nous rcg-umes. vous reg-Mes. Us reg-urent. Past Indefinite. Pass6 inddfini. I have received, J'ai reg~u. <^/LZ.\.., etc. tu as " U a " nous avons reg-u. vous avez " Us ont *' Past anterior. Pass6 antSrieur. ■^i I had received, J'eu^ reg-^i. '- i^i- etc. tu eus " U eut " notis eihnps reg-u. vous eUtes "■ Us eurent " Pluperfect. Plus-que-purfait. I had received, J'avait> .""'-u. etc. tu avais " U avait " nous anions reg-u, vous aviez *' its avaier.f " Future. Futur. I shall receive, Je recc v-rai. etc. tu recev-ras. Urecev-ra. nous recev-rons. vous recev-rez. Us recev-ront. Future anterior. Futur aut6rieur. I shall have J'aurai reg-u. received, etc. tu auras " U aura " nous aurons reg~u. votis aurez " Us auront " CONDITIONAL— CONDITIONEIi."*" Present. Present. I should re- Je recev-rais. ccivo, etc. tu recev-rais. U recev-rait. nous recev-rions. vous recev-riez. Us recev-raient. Past. Pass6. I should have J'aurais reg-u. received, etc. tu aurais " U aurait " no^is aiiriG~tis rcf-t*. vous auriez " Us auraient «« .aTICIPES. us-que-purfait. itrions rec-a. IMPBRATIVK— lUPilRATHF ,A (Receive, i^-oi^-dt^ a ■< let «« receive. recev-ongl ., FOURTH COKJUOATION IN re. V recev-oiii recev-~ez. 'A ■^ , icuUB receive, fn ( receive, ^- ( Have received, Aie re^-v. ^ J let us have received, ayon8rei;-n fe ( have received. ayczrei;-v. SUBJ UNCTIVl— SUBJONCTl K. Present. Pr6.sent. 'J'hat I may re- Que je rer^-oiyc. ceive, etc. Itnjjerfcct. That I might receive, etc. Past. V. ra886. i)! 4 i1 That I may Que faie rec-u have received, qve tiiaien etc, qu'il ait " que noun ayons re(-u. que vous nyfz " qu'ils aicnt " Piuperfect. Plus-que-parfait, That I might Que j'eusse re(-u. have received, Que tu^ixsen " etc. qu'il em ref-u, que tious eusftions " qu^ t'oi/s eusHtez " qu'ilg euijent " 1 SKIXITIVE— INFIXITIK. Prks.— To receive, recev-oii: Past.— To liave received, avoir rer^-Ai. PARTICIPLKS— PARTICIPKS. recev-ant. re^-u, ue, ma, nes. Pabt. \ having ( received, ayant rei'-it. que tu ri'i;-oiveg. qu'il re^-oive. que nous recen-ions. que vous recev~iez- qu'ils rer-oivent. Imparfait. Que je reg-usse. que tu re^-usses. qu'il re^^-Ht. que notis reg-nissions. que vous reg-^ssiez. qiCils reg-ussent. !rH CONJtraATION-YERBS IN BE. Prks.— Receiving, C Received, ) 1 r \^ INBICATIVE Present. -INDICATIF. Present. I give hack, etc. Imperfect. I was gi\ang baclv, etc. Je rends, tu rend-s. il rend. nous reml-ons. V0U8 rend-ez. Us rend-cnt. Imparfait. Je rend^ais. tu rend^ais. il rend-ait. nous rend-ions. vous rend-iez. Us rend-aient. Past definite. Pass6 d6fini. I gave baclc, etc. Je rend-is. tu rend-is. il rend-it. nous rend-tincs. vous rend-4tes. ilsrend-irent. Past indefinite. Passfi ind6flni. I have given back, etc. I J'ai J'ejui-M. tu as, " ila " nous avons rendr-u. vous avez " Us ont *' I'- \t'\ h'' Past anterior. I had given back, etc. Pasafi ant6rieur. J'ctw rend-u. tu eus " il eut " iious e limes rend-u, vous eUtes " Us eurent " Pluperfect. Plns-quo-parfait. I had given back, etc. J'aoais rend-u. tu avais " il avail " nous avians rend-u. vous aviez " ils avaient " r>8 REGULAR CONJUOATIONS. Fill fire. I shall g^ive bftck, etc. Fuhir, Jt, rend-rai. tu rend-rnx. il rend-ra. nous rend-rons. V0U8 rend-rez. ils rend-ront. Future anterior. Futur antfirieur. I shall have J'aurai rend-u. given back, tu auras '■' otc. il aura " nous aurons rend-u. vous aurez, " ilsauront " N K a* CONDITIOXAL— COVBITIONKL, Present. PrAseiit.. Je rend-rais. tu rend-rais. il rend-rait. nous rend-rions. vous rend-riez. ils rend-raient. ; Passfi. ToCurais rend-u. tu aurais " il aurait " nous aurions rend-u. vous auriez " ils auraient •' iMPKRATIVE— IMPtRATIF. Give back, Rend-s. let us give back, rend-ons. give back, retid-ez. Have given back, Ale rcnd-u. lot us have given back, ayonsrend-u have given back, ayez re)id-u, \ should give back, etc. Past. I should have given back, etc. HPHJUNCTIVR— RrWONTTI?. Present. Frftxent. That I may give Que je rend-e. back, otc. que tu rend-es. qu'il rerul-e. que nous rend-inns. que onus rend-iez. qu'ils rend-ent. Imparfait. Que je rend-isup. give back, etc. que tu. rend-isses. qu'il rend-it, que nous rend-issions. que vous rend-issiez. qu'ils rend-issent. Pass6. Que j'aie reml-ti, que tu aies " qu'il ait " que nous ayons rend-ni, que vous ayez " qu'ils aient " Plus-quo-parfait. Que j'eusse rend-u. qse tu cusses " qii'il ^t rend-v,: que nows eussiois que vous eussiez qu'ils cu^sent INFINITIVK — INFINITIP. Pres. — To give back, rend-re. f To liave ( given back, avoir rend-u. PARTICIPLES — PARTICIPES. Pres.— Giving back, rend-ant. i Given back, rend-ai, ue,u8,WS, Past. •< having given ( back, ayant rend-u. Imperfect. That I might Past. That I may have given back, etc. Pluperfect. That I might have given back, etc. « (C Past. / EXERCISE XX. i^ REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. Remark.— Thin Exercise should be translated orally and then written. J'aimerais . Que nous ayons aime. Que vous aimiez. Que j'eu.sse rendu. Rendoas. Nous rendimes. Que voTip, eussiez re§u. II aurait fini. Qu'ils aient re9u. Nous finimes. Vous recevrez. Que je re9U88e. Qu'ils re^oivent. Que nous ayons fini. ■^jue nous rccc\i(;iis. Que vous eussiez rendu. yant rend-w. ally and then Que nona rendions. Ayaiit royii. Jo rendis. Voiis avez rendu . Vous eCltea rendu. Vous renditea. Vous rcceviez. Que nous ayons fini. Nous finissions. Nous recevons. Nous ouines royu. Nous finirons. Vous iivoz fini. Nous finirions. Vous reydtes, lis reyurcnt. Vous eCitea reyu. Ayez fini. Qu'ils recoivent. 11 finira. II reyut. II rondit. Je rendais. Tu finissais. II finit. 1^ Translate, into French, REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. Vous rocevriez. * "*" Vous avez reyu. Vous aurioz fini. Que vous ayez reyiu Que tu aies fini. Koeovez. Ayant reyu. Finie. lis auraient royu. Que nous eussions fini. Vous recovriez. J'ainierais. Vous aiuiatoa. Que nous ainiassiona. Vous aimeriez, Aimons. Vous avez aim^. Vous elites aim^. Nous aimerions. Que nous ainiions. Vous aviez rendu. Qu'il ait re§u. Nous recumes. lis rendirent. Quo vous eussiez rendu. f)0 f>i i-yt-f^P We love — we had loved — you would love — that we might love — they finished — he had finished — we would finish — that I might finish — we receive — you had received — they would receive — that I might give back— I should have received — that he might have given back — let us love — you would have finished— they had received— they will have finished — we finish — we have received — that we may love — we shall have given back — that we might have given back — we will finish — you finished — that we might finishm^that thou may est have finished — they had loved — we would receive— that we might give back — you will love — that you may have received — you have finished — they received— they would have received — you received — that they may have receive<7 — he received — let us have finished — that they might receive — that you might have given back — you give back — he gives back — they give back — he gave back — ^he finished — you would love — they finished. 60 IRRBGULARITIES OP SOME OF THE CHAPTER XXIII. IRREGULARITIES OF SOME OF THE VERBS OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 1st Conjugation. 1. Yerbs ending in the infinitive in cer, take a cedilla under the f when this consonant precedes one of the vowels a or o. We menace, 7iou8 menagons ; That I might menace, que je menagasse. 2. Verbs ending in ger, take for the sake of euphony an e mute after the g every time that the termination commences with one of the vowels a or o, as : That I might eat, que je mangeasse ; we eat, nous mangcons. 3. In the verbs ending in uer, ouer, a diaeresis is placed over the 'i of the first and second persons plural of the imper- fect of the indicative and also of the subjunctive : We played, nous jouXons ; that you may play, que vous jouiez. 4. In the verbs in ayer, oyer and nyer, the y is changed into i before le mute : I employ, femploie. But in the verbs where the final y is preceded by a or e, such as : To pay, payer ; to scratch out, rayer ; to speak thick, grasseyer, it is customary to preserve the y, 5. The verbs in eler, eter^ double the consonants I and t before an e mute. I call, fappelle ; I throw, je jette. Some verbs in eler and eter do not double the consonant but take a grave accent, when the final syllable of the infinitive is preceded by an e mute (e) or accented (e). 6. Ill the verbs in ier, such as : To pray, prier ; to entreat, supplier, the first and second persons plural of the imperfect of the indicative and of the present of the subjunctive take ii. 2]srD Conjugation. 7. The verb to hate, hair, takes a di-oeresis in all its conju- gation with the following exceptions : 1st. The singular of the present of the indicative. 2rid. The second person singular of the imperative. We hated, nous haXmes ; you hate, vous ho.issez. 8. The following verbs in the present of the indicative drop +1- . consonant which precedes the final letters of the infinitive : To repent, se repenth\ To feel, sentir. to go out, sortir. to serve, servir. uo Sxeep, uOTifiir. Ex. — I feel, je sens; I repent, je merepens; repent, repens-toi. a cedilla under vowels a ov 0. lenace, que je euphony an e on commences jht eat, que je y is changed [t in the verbs lo pay, payer ; it is customary r ; to entreat, the imperfect nctive take ii. idicative drop the infinitive : VERBS OF THE CONJUGATIONS. 3e,d Conjugation. ei line singular : owed, du. 4th Conjugation. in AH verbs which have a cZ in the root, such as : To give 1. •^?* iX!. to take prendre ; to sew, coudre ; preserve the ltlCilve:.ot:^^nl^ of the present of the indicative. Hp takes il prend; she sews, clle coud. 11 All verbs in indre or in soudre, such as : To paint ^^/ to dve temdre; to absolve, ahsoudre, take a < instead il absoiU. Vocabulary. mt, repens-toi» Acquaintances inclination, Sunday, except, day, day, battle, very hard, (speaking of frost dyer, trowsers, skin, kid, pearl, snufF-box, desert, line, to buy, to reveal, side, innocence, to frighten, to play, ^ to perceive, to conceive, to receive, yellow, industrious, . Connaissances. penchant. * Dlmanche. excepte. jour, journee. d, pierre fendre. .) teintuner. pantalons, m. peau, f . perle, f. tahatUre, f. dessert, m. ligne, f . acheter. riveler. c6t6, m. innocence^ f. effrayer. jouer. apercevolr. concevoir. recevoir. jaune. labor i.eux. Chosen, woollen, one loses, eggs in the shell, varnished, melon, carriage, shuddering, to eat, to besiege, paper, to efface, to judge, to freeze, coachman, to hope, to protect, to spoil, neighbor- hood, to distribute, to hang, to split, to fear, Choisi. de laine. on perd. des ceiifs coque. verni. melon, m. voiture, f. fremissant, manger, assieger. papier, m. effacer. juger. geler. cocker, esperer. proteger. gdter. voisinage, a la m. distrihuer. pendre. fendre. craindre. 62 VERBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE FORM. EXERCISE XXI. 1. Nous mangeS,me8 un melon excellent au dessert. ' 2. Le cocher pla9a ma mails k son cotd. 3. Nous effa^^mes les lignes qui avaient 4t6 trac^es sur ce papier. 4. Le teinturier vous appelle, voyez ce qu'il de'sire. 5. II a gkU nos gants de peau.^ 6. II g^le h, pierre f endre ce matin. 7. Nous man- geons tres souvent des oeufs h la coque pour notre dejeuner. 8. La soci^t^ de Saint Geori^e distribue beaucoup d'argent parmi les pauvres— vous en distribuiez beaucoup aussi. 9. Get homme est la terreur des enfants du voisinage ; il les effraie tons. 10. Ces rubans ne sont plus h la mode, il les paye trop cher. 11. Vous jugeates cet enfant trop severement, son innocence est certaine. 12. C'est une mauvaise loi qui ne protege pas le pauvre aussi bien que le riclie. 13. II pro- non9a en fr^missant quelques mots terribles que je ne pus comprendre. 14. On perd souvtnt sa re'putation pour avoir mal clioisi ses amis. 15. II vous absout en faveur de votre repentir. 16, Nous distribuions du pain aux pauvres du pays. i >l CHAPTER XXIV. VERBS OF THE CONJUGATIONS IN THE INTERROGATIVE FORM. INDICATIVE PRESENT— INDICATIF PRi]SENT. Do I love? etc. Aimd-je ? or Est-ce- Do I receive ? Recois-je ? or E que faime ? aimes~tu 1 aime-t~il? aimons-nous? aimez-vous ? aiment-ilsl etc. queje recoiai recois-tu? recoit-il ? recevons-nous ? recevez-vous ? recoivent-ils? Do I finish ? etc. Finis-je ? or Est-ce- que je finis? finis~tu ? finit-il t finissons-nous t finisscz-vous? finissent-ilsi Do I give back ? Est-ce-que jc rends! etc. rends-tu? rend-il? rendons-noust rendezr-vous? rendent-ils? IMPERFECT— IMPARFAIT. Did Hove? etc. Aimais-je? aimais-iu ? aimait-il ? aimions-nous? aimiez-vous ? aimaient-ils? DidI finish? etc. Finissais-je f finissais-tu J finissait-il f finissir.ns-nous ? finissiez-vous f finissaient-ilat VERBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE FORM. 63 Did I receive ? Recevais-je ? etc. recevais-t ? recevait-if recevions-7iou8 ? receviez-vous f rccevaient-ilsJ Did I give back? etc. Rendais-je f rendais-tu f rendait-il ? rendions-nougf rendiez-vous 1 rendaient-ils } PAST DEFINITE— PASSE DEFINI. Did I love? etc. Aimair-je? aimas-tu ? aima-t-ili aimdmes-nous f aimdtes-vous } aim^rent-ils i Did I finish? etc. Finis-je ? Jinis-tu ? Jinit-il} finimes-nous ? Jinttes-vous f finirent-ils } Did I receive? etc. Did I give back? etc. Re^us-je J regus-tu f regut-il $ re^'ufnes-nousi regHtes-voiis i regurent-ils ? Rendis-je f rendis-tu ? rendit-ili rendimes-nous t retidites-vous i rendirent-ils i PAST INDEFINITE— PASSE INDEFINI. Uavelloved? etc. Ai-je ainiii as-tu " a-t-il " avons^nous aimd ? avez-vous " ont-ils " Have I finished? Ai-jefinii etc. as-tu " a-t~il " avons-nous fini } avez-vous " ont-ils " Have I re- ceived? etc. Have I given back? etc. Ai-je regu ? as-t^i " a-t-il " avons-nous regu J avez-vous " ont-ils *' Ai^je rendu f as-tu " a-t-il " avons-nous rendu J avez-vous " ont-ils " PAST ANTEEIOll- PASSE ANTERIEUK. Had I loved? etc. Eus-je aim^i eus-tu " eut-il " eAmes-nous aime? eutes-vous " eurent-ils " Had I finished ? Eus-je fini i Had I received? £'its-je regu^ etc. eus-tu " eut-il " citmes-notis regu f eutes-vous " eurent-ils " etc. eus-tu eut-il " eilmes-nous fini f eittes-vous " eurent-ils *' Had I given bfick? etc. Eus-je rendu } eus-tu " eut-il " euims-m,ous rendu 1 eMes-vous " eurent-ils " PLUPERFECT ~PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. Had I loved ? etc. A vais-je airn4 i avais-tu " avait-il " avions-nous aint-<'. ? aviez-vous " nvaient-ils ' ' Had I finished? Avais-jefini 1 etc. avais-tu, " avait-il " avi-ons-nous fini} aviez-vous " avaie7U-ils " 64 VERBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE FORM. ! , ,-|| Had I received? Avais-je reguf etc. avais-tu " avait-il " avions-nous regu i aviez-vous " avaient-ils " Had I given back? etc. Avais-je rendiif avais-tti " avait~il " avions-nous rendu i aviez-vous " avaient-ils " rUTURE-FUTUR. Shall I lovo? etc. Shalll finish? etc. Aimer ai-je ? aimeras-tu ? aimera-t-il ? aimerons-nous ? aimerez-vous i aimer ont-ilsi Finirai-je } finiras~tu ? finira-t-il ? finirons-nous i finirez-vous ? finiront-ils ? Shall I receive ? Recevrai-je f etc. recevras-tu ? recevra-t-il 1 recevrons-nous ? recevrez-vous ? recevront-ils ; Shall I give back ? etc. Rendrai-je ? rendras-tu? rendra-t-il ? rendrons-nous .» rendrez-vous ? rendront-ils i riTTURE ANTERIOR— FUTUR ANTERIEUR. Shall I have loved? etc. Shall I have finished? etc. Aur ai-je aim6 ? auras-tu " aura-t-il " aurons-nous aim6 i aurez-vous " aurent-ils " Aurai-je fini ? auras-tu " aura-t-il " aurons-nous fini ? aurez-vous " auront-ils " Shall I have received? etc. Shall I have given back ? etc. Aur ai-je regu f auras-tu " aura-t-il " aurons-nous recu f aurez-vous '*' auront-ils •' Aurai-je rendu f auras-tu " attra-t-il " aurons-nous rendui aurez-vous " auront-ils '* CONDITIONAL PRESENT -CONDITIONNEL PRESENT. Should I love ? etc. Aimerais-je ? aimerais-tu ? aimerait-il .* aimerions-nou,s f aimeriez-vous ? aimeraient-ils } Sliould I finish? Finirais-je ? etc. finirais-tu ? finirait-il ? Jinirions-nous ? finiriez-vous ? finiraient-ils .« Should I re- ceive? etc. Should I give back? etc. Recevrais-je ? recevrais-ttt ? recevrait-il ? reccvrions-nous ? recevriez-vous ? recevraient-ils? Rendrais-je ? rendrais-tu ; rendrait-il !■ rendrions-nous j rendriez-vous ? rendraient-ils ?■ PAST -PASSE. Should I have loved ? etc. Aurais-je aiin6 } aurais-tu " aurait-il " aurions-nous aimd t auriez-vous " auraient-il3 " Should I have Aurais-je fini ? fmishcdl cte. aurais-tu " aurait-il " aurions-nous fill i, ?■ auriez-vous ' ' auraient-ils " VERBS IN THE INTERROGATIVE FORM. 05 :l present. Should I have received? etc. Aurais-je reguf aurais-tu " anrait-il " aurions-iious regu? auriez-vovs *' auraient-ils " Should I have Aurais-je rendu ? given back? aurais-iu " aurait-il " aurions-nou8 rendu S auriez-vous " auraient-ils " 1. The Imperative, the tenses of the Subjunctive and the Infinitive are not used interrogatively. The same is to be observed with regard to the 1st person singular of the pre- sent of the Indicative of a few verbs who have but one syllable. — Thus one cannot say : do I give back? rends-je? do I read ? lis-je ? but, est-ce-que je rends f est-ce-que je lis ? A few verbs, such as : avoir^ etre, alhr, voir, devoir, faire, etc. , are excepted, for one says: ai-jei dois-je? fais-je? etc. 2. The personal pronouns are placed after the verb in simple tenses, and after the auxiliary in compound tenses — the verb and pronoun being united by a hyphen : do I receive ? recois-je 1 have I loved ? ai-je aim6 ? does he receive ? rcgoit-il ? 3. The e mute is changed into 6 accented when it is fol- lowed by the pronoun je. Ex. : — Do I love ? aime-je ? do I give ? domie-je ? EXERCISE XXII. ON THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. J2c?/iaril-.— The following Exercise should be translated orally first and then \vritten. Aurais-je re§u 1 Eut-il re§u ? Auraient-ils rendu ? Eut-il aim^ ? Auriez-vous aim^ ? Aurons-nous aim^ ? Est ce que je rends ? Aurions-nous fini 1 Aurons-nous fini ? Aura t-il rendu ? Aimai-je ? Finissais-tu ? Rendait-il ? Aimons-nous ? Avaient- ils rendu 1 Aimiez-vous ? Finissiez-vous ? Finites-vous ? Rece- vions-nous ? Rendiez-vous ? Ont-ils rendu ? Recevra t-il ? Ren- dons-nous ? Avions-nous rendu ? Finirez-vous ? Ont-ils rendu ? Avaient-ils fini ? Eumes-nous aim^ ? A t-il aim^ ? Regurent- ils ? Rendront-ils ? Recevaient-ils ? Rendirent-ils 1 Refumes- nors ? Rendimes-nous ? Finissiez-vous ? Avez-vous aim^ 1 R^.aark. written. Have I loved ? Do we love ? Shall I finish ? Shall we giva back ? Do we finish ? Do you sell ? Dost thou finish ? Has he receive ' ? Do we receive ? Did we give back ? Did we love ? j.ju,u wu iwvuu i oiiau we niusii » xxavo uiuy given waua^ s Didst thou love ? Did you love ? Had they received ? Have -The following should be translated orally first and then 60 CONJtraATION OF VERBS. they given back? Did you finish ? Had he finished ? Had they received ? Shall you give back 1 Should I finish ? Should 1 have received ? Should we have finished ? Should I love ? Shall we love? Should I give back? Should they have finished f CHAPTER XXV. ON THE CONJUGATION OF AUXILIARY VERBS- NEUTER VERBS— PASSIVE VERBS-REFLECTIVE VERBS AND IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1. The verb to be, ^tre, is conjugated with the past parti- ciple of all the active verbs, to express a state : I am loved, je suis aimA ; I am conquered, je suis vaincu ; I am betrayed, je suis traliif and it serv^es as auxiliary : 1st, To all reflective verbs ; 2nd. To a few neuter verbs ; 3rd. To a few imper- sonal verbs. The past participle been, eU, is always invari- able. ' ... ^ rr^ 2. The verb to have, avoir, serves as an auxiliary : 1st. To itself ; 2nd. To all active verbs ; 3rd. To most neuter verba ; 4th. To all impersonal verbs. It is an active verb T/hen it has a direct regimen. 3. The neuter verb is conjugated with to be or to have, ac- cording as it marks, state or action. Thus : to sleep, dormir; to enjoy, jouir ; to walk, marcher; to injure, nuire; to please, plaire ; to laugh, rire, etc. , always expressing action, are conjugated with avoir. On the contrary, to go, aller; to arrive, arriver; to die, mourir ; to be bom, naitre, expressing almost always in theircom^^ound tenses a state resulting from an action, are conjugated with Hre. 4. Many other verbs puch as those given below, expressing sometimes a state, sonvetimes an action, are conjugated in their compound tenses with ^tre or with avoir, 5. The passive veros pre always conjugated with the auxili- ary to bb, itre, and tne past participle of an active verb. 6. The reflective verbs are conjugated in their simple tenses with two pronouns and according to the conjugation to which they belong ; in their compound tenses they are always con- jugated with the auxiliary to be. 7 The impersonal verbs are only usod ir, ihe 3rd persons anu jiiavo wie i/Sriiiu iiiucCnunD aa iii^ niv^-j.i v - »• -• — — j belong by the termination of the infinitive. CONJUGATION OF NEUTER VERBS, WITH avoiv. 67 CONJUGATION OF NEUTER VERBS, WITH AVOIR. ;lie past parti- : I am loved, '. am betrayed, o all reflective ) a few imper- always invari- ow, expressing conjugated in ritli the auxili- ctive verb. Lr simple tenses nation to which ire always con- he 3rd persons INDICATIVE— INDICATIF, Present. Prfisent. 1 sleep, etc. Je dors, tu dors, il dor-t. 9unis dorm-ons. V0U8 domir-ez. lis dorm-ent. Imperfect. Imparfait. I slept, etc. Je dorm-ais. tu dortn-ais.- il donrv-ait. nous domi-ions. vous dorm-iez. Us dorirv-aient. Past definite. Passg dSfii i. I slept, etc. Je dorm-is. tu dorm-is. il donrir-it. nous dorntr-tmes. vous dornvAtes. Us dorm-irent. Past indefinite. Passg indgfini. J'ai dorm-i. tu as " ila " * 7iotis avons dorni-i. vous avez " Us ont " Past anterior. Fasse antSrieur. I had slept, etc. J'eus dormr-i. tueus " iltut " nous ei\rn,es dorni-i. vous eiites " Us eurent " have slept, etc. Pluperfect. I had slept, etc. Future. I shall sleep, etc. Plus-qiie-parfait. J'avais dorm-i. tu avais " il avait " nous avians dortn-i, vous aviez Us avaient Futur. Je dormir-ai. tu dormir-aa. il dormir-a, no^l. : voiis 8ort-iez, ils sort-ent. That I might Queje sort-isse. go out, etc. qiie tu sort-isses. qu'il sort-It. que noussort-issions, que V0U8 sort-issiez. qxCils sort-issent. Past. That I may have gone out, etc. Pass6. Queje 8018 sort.-t. que tu 8018 " qu'il soit " que nous soyons sort-is. que vous soyez " qtiHls soient " Pluperfect. I'lus-que-parlait. That I mifiht Que jefusse sort-i. have gone qxie tufusse " out, etc. qu'il flit " que nousfussions sort-is. que vous fussiez " qxC Us fussent " INFINITIVE— INFINITII'. Prks.— To go out, .iort-ir. Past. — To liave gone out, 6tre sort-i. PARTICIPLES— I'ARTICIPES. Pres.— Going out, sort-aids. p ( Gone out sort-l,is,ie,ies. X having gone out, dtant sort-i. CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. INDICATIVE— IKDICATIF. Present. Pr6sent. I am loved, Je suis airii-4. etc. tues " il est " nous sommes aiinr-4s. vous &tes " ils sont " Imperfect. Imparfalt. 1 was loved, J'Uais aiin-L etc. tu itais " il Hait " nous itions aim-^s. vous 4tiez " ils 4taient '* Past definite. Passfi d6fini. I was loved, Je fits aimr-4. etc, tufus " ilfut " nous fiimes aim-is vousfiites ilsfurent Past indeflnite. Passe ind6flni. I have hcen J'ai iti aitn-4. loved, etc. tu as M " il a 6t6 " noiis avotis dt6 ainir-is, in. vous avez 6t6 " 4es, i. ilsonteti " Past anterior. Passe antgrieur. I had been J'exis He aim-e. loved, etc. tu eus ete " il exit ite " nous eUxna.s 4fA iiim-^s. voxis eiitcs Md ' " ils eurent ^t6 " « Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. I had been T avals ^t6 alm-6. loved, etc. tu avals 6t6 " il avait 4t6 " nous avions U6 aim-is. vous aviez ite " ils avaient U6 " Future. I shall be loved, etc. Futur. Je serai aim-e. tu seras " il sera " nous serons aiirir-is. vous serez " ils seront " Future anterior. Futur ant6rieur. I shall have J'aurai it6 aim-d, been loved, tu auras 6t6 " etc. Mauraiti " nous aurons H6 uim-4s. vous aurez 4t& " ils auront 6t6 " UO.ND1TIONAL~CONDITIONNKI>. Present. Present. I should be loved, etc. Past. Je serais aim-e. tu serais ** il serait " nous serious aim-es. vous seriez " ils seraient " Passe. I should have J'aurais 6t6 aim-i. been loved, tu aurais 6t6 " etc. il aurait 4ti. " niQV.s aurioiis 4t^, ctiiii— t^.s'. vous auriez ite ' ' ils auraient ^tii '* 70 CONJUGATION OF IlEFLECTIVE VERBS. IMPBRATIVK— IMPillATIl'. (Beloved, soi^ oimr^. Pres. \ lot us be lovtif, ioiiuna (ihn~4s. (beloved, tioim^ n '.1)1-48. 8UBJUNCTIVE- Present. -BUBJONCTIF. Present. That I may Qite je sois airnr-4. be loved, que tu sois * etc. qn'il soit " que nous soyons aint,-i quevoussoyez " qu'ilssoient " Imperfect. Impaifait. That I might Qtiejefusse aim-i. be loved, que tu fusses " etc. qu'ilfut '• que nousfussions aim-is, que vousfussiez qiCilSfussent << Past. Passe. That I may Quefaie ^td aim-6. have been que tu aies Ui " loved, etc. qu'il ait Hi " que nous ayonsM aim-is. que vous ayez H6 qu'ils aient Hi Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. Thatlmight Quefeusse eti aini-4. have been q^le tu eusses Hi' ' ' loved etc. quHl eiU iti " qtien. eussionsi •' aim-iis. que voiis eussii'z iti *' qu'ils euHsent eti " INFINITIVE— INFINITIF. Prbs.— Tobe loved, itre aim-i. Past j To have been ( loved, avoir iti aim-i. PAKTICIPLB3— PARTICIPES. PuEB.— Being loved, ita7it aim-i. ( loved, ayant iti aiiitr-i. CONJUGATION OF REFLECTIVE VERBS. INDICATIVE— INDICAXIF. Present. Present. Je meflatt-e. tu tefiatt-es. il se Jlatt-e. nous nous flattons. vous vous fiatt-€Z, Us se flatt-ent. Imperfect. Imparfalt. Je mejlatt-ais. tu te Jlatt-ais. il sejlatt-ait. nous now.v jlatt-ions. vous vous fiatt-iez. lis se Jlatt-aient. Past definite. Paass6 d6flni. Je me fiatt-ai. tu te flatt-as. il sejlatt-a. nous nousfiatt-AmeSi vous vous flatt-dtes. Us seflatt-lrent. PassS ind6fini. a " U W "3^ .2 o> ^a Past indefinite Je me suisfiatt-i. tu t'es il s'est " lions 710US somiiws fiatt-is, m. vous vous ites " ies,i. Us se sont " Past anterior. Passe ant6ri3ur. Je me fus fiatt-i, tu tefus " Useful " nous nous ftimcs flatt-iis, vous lous fates Us 'iefurent Plupe rfect. Plus-que-parf ait. ■ea^ _ It « Je m'itais fiatt-i. tu t'itais " il s'itait " 1 ^ "S nous nojis itionsfiatt-is. Future. vo}(s vous itiez Us s'itaient Futur, "*" tn ^al Pas«. 5 a « . ■ 01 Jc meflatt-erai. tu te flatt-eras. il se flatt-era. nous nous flatt-erons. vous vmis flatt-erez. Us se fiatt-eront. Passe. Je Die serai fiatt-i. tu te seras " Use sera " nous nous serons fiatt-es. vous vous seres " il se scront " m CONJUGATION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS. n re aim~ti. voir iU aiiH-<^. LTICIPES. iant aiiiir^. COMDmOMAIi— OONDITlONNBIi. Pre$ent. Prfseut: (4*3 Ti ^ vou vans seriez " ^« ilB6eseraient " IMPERATIVK ~IMP6RATIF. (Platter til V self, Jlattetoi. ''''u;s. < lot us flf> red, flattona nous. *" ( flatter ^ uu .selves, /fa«ez vows. flCBJDNOTIVB— 81 iiJOHCTIlf. Present. Prfisent. Que je inn datt-e. wa que iu tejlatt-es. 2?« qu'il se flatt-e. ^ ^ »r qiie nous nous flatt-ions. P "O qw'iia sefiatt-ent. Past. Queje me Jlatt-asae. qua tu te fiatt-aases. qu'il sejiatt-dt. que nous nous Jlait-asaiona, tfue- voua vouH flatt-assiez. qu'ila se Jlatt-aasent. Passfi. Que je me soiafiatt-^. que tu te sois qu'il se soit 5* si. a-§ que nous nous soy on8jlatt-4it, > .^ ^ue »o«« I'ous 802/£Z " g;^ 3 qu'ila 8e8< 'ent *' Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfait. Q«e je mefusse jlatt-4. „ ^ que «rt te fusses " aj >,w qu'il se fat •^ S « ^«'J ' 'msn. fuKsions flatt-is. ■JIS^Tj quevousvousfussiez " g_^« qu'ila sefussent " INnNlTIVE— INFINITir. Pass.— To flatter oi^'s self, m; fktt-er. „ f To ha v; flattered Past. I on. self, a'itre flatt-f. PARTICU'IiKS— PARTICIPBS. „„„„ ( Flattering one's ^^^^^"•1 self, sejlatt-ant. (Having flattered Past. < one's self, s'4tantflatt-f. \ Flattered, fiatt-4, de, ds, 4es. CONJUG^ TION OF UNIPERSONAL VERBS TKDICATIVa— INDIOATIF. PrfnenU It thunders, Imperfect. It thundered, Past definite it thundered. Past indefinite. It has thundered, Past anterior. iz had thundered, Present. 11 tonn-e. Imparfait. II tonr}r-ait. Passg defini. IHonn-a. Pass6 ind^tlui. II a tonn-6. PassS anterieur iiiutionrir^. Plus-que-parfafct. II avait tonn-d. Futur. 1 1 tonn-eru. Fntur ant6rieur. Pluperfect. Vt had thundered, Future. It will thund- Future anterior. It will have thun- derei ' , / 1 aura tonn-' CON DlTIONAIf— COSDITlOKEIi. Present. , Vt&av !. It would ' I under, fl tonn-erait. Past. Pass6. It would have thun- dbtCQ, iiv.v.r-:^ittonn~^ 72 NBUTJBll, TASSIVE, KEJfLlflCTlYE, AND IMPERSONAL VEKBH. 'li m HUBJtnCOTIVK— BCBJONCTIF. Pluperfect. Plus-que-parfalt. Present. PrCsont. That It may thunder, Qu'Utoniir^. Imperfect. Imparfait. That it might thun- der, Qu'it tonn-dt. Past. PassC. That it mipfht iiave thundered, Qu'il eUt toniir^. INKINITIVK— INKINITH'. Pre8.— To thunder, toHn-er. Past i ^^avinff thuu- " ' \ dered, ayant tonii-^. PARTICIPLES— PARTICIPE8. That it may have thundered, Qu'il ait ton^v-6. Pres.— Tliuiidering, tonn-ant. Past.— ihundercd, tonti-i. EXERCISE XXIII. NEUTER VERBS— PASSIVE VERBS — REFLECTIVE VERBS— AKD IMPERSONAL VERBS. Remark. — The following Exercise should be translated orally first and then written. Nous dormons — il dormait — nous etimes dormi — qu'il etlt tonn(5— je me flatterai — que je me sols flatty — j'^tais aim^ — je serai aim^-*-que nous sortions — nous avions dormi— je dor- mirais — tu sortais — tu sortis — ^je f us aime — ^je me suis flatt<5 — nous sortions — qu'il tonne — il a tonnd — il tonnait — tu (itais kSorti — vous sortiriez — ileuttonn^ — iltonna — que je me fusse flatty — se flatter — quo je me flatte — sois aime — j'aurais dt(5 aim^— -que j'eusse ^to aim^ — ^j'ai dtdaim^ — sortons — que j'aie dormi — nous dormirons — ^je serai aimd — je serais aim^ — que nous fussions sorti — ils sortiront — avoir dormi — nous sor- tons, nous eiimes dormi — ils dormiraient — soyons aim^s — nous filmes aim^s — il aurait tonne — que nous nous fussions Hattys — dormez — que nous eussions dormi. To have been loved — that we may have been loved — I shall nave been loved — that it may thunder — I shall flatter my- self — that I might flatter myself — I was sleeping — you went out — he was going out — I had gone out — he went out — flatter thyself — let us be loved — we shall have flattered our- selves — I should havo been loved — it will thunder — you flat- tered yourselves — he had gone out — thou hadst gone out — we slept — they had slept — they will havo slept — let us be loved — I should have slept — you went out— it would thunder— they will go out — that you may have been loved — let us flatter ourselves — we had flattered ourselves — we will have flattered ourselves — that it might have thundered — he went out— f.llO'TT Tl7^pn+-. Qiif— -f.linf +,l>i.-nr maAT- \\'.\\Ta floffovorl + Vi otn apl Troa iUUKOL'LAJt VKKUS OF THK FIK8T OONJUOATION. 73 ted orally first CHAPTEK XXVI. PRIMITIVE TENSES OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 1. The regular verba are those which are conjugated in all their tenses as the model of the conjugation to which they belong ; the irregular verba are those which are not conju- gated like the model verb. 2. There are verba which are only irregular in their primi- tive tenses ; several of these verba belong to classes sullicien- tly numerous to be regarded as varieties of the conjugation to which they belong, such as : To open, ouvrir ; t j feel, senUr ; to fear, craindre ; to appear, paraitre ; to lead, con- diilrc. 3. The primitive tenses of a verb are those which servo to form all the other tenses. In the list given below wo do not give the compound verbs because they follow the conjugation of the simple verbs. Ex. — To admit, admettre ; to i)Tom.mQ, promettre, are con- jugated like the simple verb wettre. Eemark.— When the verbs are easy in their conjugation the Ist per. of each tense will only be given. IRREGULAR VERBS. '.,;y: 1st Conjugation. ^' TO GO, ALLEB. Goiwjj allant. Ind. Pres. Im]). Fast Def. Fut. COND. ) Frcs. i Je vais, nous aliens, I vjcntf J'allais, nous allions, I we.nt, J'allai, nous allames, I shall (JO, J'irai, nous irons, J" should gOy nous irions, tu vas, vous allez, tu allais, vous alliez, tu alias, vous allAtes, tu iras, voua irez, tu irais, vous iriez, Goriey all(J, dtd 11 \a ; ils vont. il allait ; ils allaient. il alia ; ils allferent. il ira ; ils iront. il irait ; ils iraient. 74 IRREGULAR VERBS OP THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Imper. 90, va, allez, qu'il uille ; quails aillent. ISUBJ. Pres. Imi). aliens, That I may go, Que j'aille, que tu allies, qu'il aille ; que nous allions, que vous alliez, qu'ils aillent. That I might go, gj'allasae, que tu ullasses, qu'il allat ; Cnoua allassions, que v. allassiez, qu'ils allassent. Remark.— The difference between ycsMi's alUandfai ^t^.,f4taifaIU Mid f amis £ti, must be noted. The former implies that one has not returned but is perhaps on the way returning, tlie latter tliat one lias gone to c i)lace and returned. TO CLEAN, NETTOYER. Frts. Imp. Fast Def. Fnt. [ Cleaning, nettoyant I clean, Je nettoie, tu nettoiet;, nous nettoyons, vous nettoyez, I cleaned J Jo nettoyais, tu nettoyais, nous nettoyions, v. nettoyiez, I cleaned, Je nettoyai, n. nett 'y^mes. I shnU clean, Je netcoierai, n. nettoierons, I should clean, Je nettoierais, tu nettoierais, n. nettoierions, v. nettoieriez, clean, nettoie, nettoyons, nettoyez, That I may clean, ^Fres. ) ^ J® ^^^^^-oie, _ tu nettoies, ( O^nous nettoyions, vous nettoyiez, Imp. That I might clean, § je nettoyasse, tu nettoyasses, il nettoyat ; O'n. nettoyassions, v. nettoyassiez, iJs nettoyasseut. tu nettoyas, V. nettoyates, tu nettoieras, V. nettoierez, COND. Fre6. Imper. SUBJ. i Gleaned, uettoye. il nettoie ; ils nettoient. il nettoyait ; ils nettoyaient. il nettoya ; ils nettoy^rent. il nettoiera ; ils nettoiront. il nettoierait ; ils nettoieraient. qu'il nettoie ; qu'ils nettoient. il nettoie ; ils nettoient. IREBGULAR VERBS OP THE SECOND CONJUGA.TION. to Remark Conjugate the following in the same manner, and observe that the e of que in the subjunctive must be suppressed before a vowel. To tire, Ennuyer. to prop, to ) ^^ lean upon, ) ^-^ ^ to sweep, halayer. To pay, Payer. to wipe, essuyer. to try, essayer. to frighten, effrayer. To send, envoyer, and to send back, renvoyer, are also con- jugated in the same manner with the exception of the future and conditional which make j'eHver rat, fenverrais, je renvcrraif je renverrais. 2nd Conjuuation. TO ACQUIRE, ACQUmiE. Acquiring, acquerant. Acquired, acquis. I acqidre, Ind. Pres, Imp. Fast Def. Flit COND. Fres. Impek. J'acquiers, tu acquiers, il acquiert ; nous acqudrons, vous acqudrez, ils acqui^rent. I acquired, J'acque'rais, tu acqudrais, il acqu^rait ; nous acqu^rions, vous acqu^riez, ils acque'raient. I acquired, J'acquis, tu acquis, il acquit ; nous acquimes, vous acquites, ils acquirent. I shall acquii'e, J'acquerrai , tu acquerras, il acquerra ; nous acquerrons, vous acquerrez, ils acquerront. I shoidd acquire, J'acquerrais, tu acquerrais, il acquerrait ; n. acquerrions. vous acquerriez, ils acquerraient. acquire, acquiers, ^cque'reifi, qu'il acqui^re ; acquerons, ^cque're'/;, qu'ilsacquierent. SuiJj ( That 1 may acquire, Pres. \ ^ j'acquiere, tu acquieres, il acquibre ; ' ' ( Cnous acque'rions, vous acqudriez, ils acqui^rent. fmp. That I might acquire, ^j'acquisse, tu acqnisses, il acquit ; O'nous acquiasions, vous acquissiez, ila acquiasent. 'ii III 76 IRREaULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. TO EUN, COUBIE, Tnd. Pres. Imp. Past Def. Flit. COND, Pres.. Imper. Munnmg, courant. I run, Je cours, nous courons, I ran, Je courais, nous courions, I ran, Je coiirus, tu cours, vous courez, tu courais, vous couriez, tu courus, nous courumes, vous courutes, I skall run, Je courrai, nous courrons, I should run, Je courrais, nous courrions, Sub J. courons, iThat I may run, %iQ coure, O^nous counons, Imp^ That I might run. tu couri'as, vous courrez, tu couiTais, vous courriez, run, cours, courez, tu coures, vous couriez, Bun, couru. il court J ils courent. il courait ; ils couraient. il courut ; ils coururent. il courra ; ils courront. il courrait ; ils courraient. qu'il coure ; qu'ils courent. li coure ; ils courent. gje courusse, tu courusses, il courut ; O'n. courussions, vous courussiez, ils courussent. iJewiaryfc.— Conjugate the following verbs in the same manner and observe that in all these verbs the two r's in the future and con- ditional must be sounded distinctly and separately. To succor, Sccourir. To run to, Aecuurir. to incur, encourir, to concur, eoncourir. to run over, parcowrir. to discourse, (liHcOiinir. TO GATHER, CUEILLIB. Gathering, cueillant. Gathered, cueilli. gather, Ind Pv ■ i J' res. ) Je cueilie, tu cueilles, il cueiJle nous cueillons, vous cueillez, ils cueillent ..v.^-,,«.> -^^^X/T! 'j-lVi»,'J^t^V.' -i-^aMM ' ^ [RREaULAR VERBS OV THE SECOND CON'JtTOATION. 77 il cueillait ; ils cueillaient. il cueillit ; ils ciieillirent. il cueillera ; I gathered, Je cueillais, tii cueillais, nous cueillions, vous cueilliez, i goihered, Je cueillis, tu cueillis, nous ciieillimes, vous cueillites, 1 shall gather, Je cueillerai, tu cueilleras, nous cueillerons, vous cueillerez, ils cueilleront. ( I sliould gather, < Je cueillerais, tu cueillerais, il cueillerait ; ( n. cueillerions, vous cueilleriez, ils cueilleraient. gather, cueille, cueillons, cueillez, That 1 may gather, g ]e cueille, tu cueilles, ©•nous cuGLUons, vous cueillez, That 1 might gather^ g je cueillisse, tu cueillisses, il cueillit ; On. cueiUiasions, vous cueillissiez, ils cueillissent. iZmai'A;. -Conjugate to collect, to gather, recueillir, and to welcome, to receive, accueillir, in the same manner, and observe that the double / is liquid. Imp. Past Fut. COND. Pres, hlPER. SUBJ. Pres. Imp. qu'il cueille ; qu'ils cueillent. il cueille ; ils cueillent. Ind. Pres. Imp. Past Def. Fut. TO SLEEP, DOBMIB. Sleeping, dormant I sleep, Je dors, tu dors, nous dormons, vous dormez, I sle^t, Je dormais, tu dormais, nous dormions, vous dormiez, I slept, Je dormis, tu dermis, nous dorminies, vous dormltes, I shall sleep, Jo dormirai, tu dormiras, Slept, dormi. il dort ; ils dorment. il dormait ; ils dormaient. il dormit ; ils dormirent. il dormira ; noua dormirons, vou8 dormirez, ils dormiront, < I i i ii f il ii f 78 IRREGULAR VERBS OV THE SKCflXP roN.tUOATIOK, COND. Pres. Tmper. I should sleep, Je dormirais, tn dormirais, il dormirait , nousdormirions, vous dorniiriez, ils dormiraient. sleep, dors, dormons, dormez, qTT-RT ( That I may sleep, Pres'l piedorme, tn do-mes, ' ( O*nous dormions, a^ous dormiez, Imp. That I might sleep, Sjje dormisse, tu dormisses, Cn. dorniissions, vous dormissiez, ils donnissent. JlfniarL~Con]\iqiite the following in the same manner. qu^il dorme ; (^u'ils dorment, il dorme ; ils dorment. il dormit To lull asleep, cndormir. to fall asleep, s'endormir. To fall asleep again, se rendormir. TO RUN AWAY, TO AVOID, TO FLY, FUIB. JRunning away, fiiyant. J (J run away, Je fuis, tu fuis, nous fuyons, vous fuyez, I ran away, Je fuyais, nous fuyions, T> ± i I ^ct^i away. Past T f ^•^* ( nous f uimes, Fnt. I shall rmvh away, Je fuirai, tu fuiras, nous fuirons, vous fuirez, I should run avmy, Je fuirai.s, tu fuirais, nous fuirions, vous fuiriez, tu fuyais, vous fttyiez, tu fuis, vous fuites, CoND. Pres. Tmper. fuyons, run away, fuis, fuyez, SuBv». ) ^ . T}iat I may rnn awry, e f uie tu i ies. ( O'nous fuyions, vous fuyiez Run away, fui. il f uit ; ils f\iient. il fuyait ; ils fuyaient. il fuit ; ils fuirent. il fuira ; ils fuiront. il fuirait ; ils fuiraient. qu'il ^ aie ; qu'ils fuient. il fuie ; lis fuient. IRllEGULAK VF,RRS OF THE SECOND OvONJTTGATION. 70 [m}7. That I might run away, gjefuisse, tu fiiisses, il f nit ; . O'nous fiiissioiis, vous fuissioz, ils fuissent. p,cmavk.—^\iQ reflective verb to run fiwav, s'erfuir, is conjugatujl like the above. TO HATE, If A IE. Hating, liaissant. Hated, liai. -1. ( I hate, Fast Def. Flit. COND. I'res. Imper. Je liais, tu liais, nous liaissoniy, vous haisaez, 1 hated, Je lia'issais, tu liaissais, nous haissions, vous haissiez, I hated, tu hais, vous haites, ti^ hairas, vous hairez, tu liairais. nous hairions, vous liairiez, hate, iiais, haissez, Je liais, nous haimes, I shall hate, Je hairaij nous hairons. J should hate, Je liairais, il halt ; ili5 lialasent. il liaissait ; ils ha'issaient , il liait ; ils hairent. il liiiira ; ils hairont. il hairait ; ils hairaient. (|u'il Iiaisse ; ((u'ils lialsaeut. SUBJ Pres Imp. il haisse ; ils haissont. il liait ; ils liaifisent. liaissons, That I may hate, gjeliaisse, ^ tu haisses, S'nous haissi()n«5 voua haissiez, That I might hate, ^ je liaisse, tu lia'isses,^ C^nous liaissions, vous haissiez, TO LIE, TO UTTER A FALSEHOOD, MENTIE. Lying, meutant. Lif-d, menti. p \ Jem'^iv-'. tu mens, il ment ; ( nou mriiuons, vous mentez, ils mentent. Imp. 1 was hjrng, Jo mentals, tu mentals, il mentait ; nous mentions, vo^is mentiez, ils mentaient. ! ;"'sl m 80 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. I lied, Jo mentis, tu mentis, il mentit ; nous mentimes, voua mentites, ils mentir'eut. I shall lie, Je mentirai, tu men+iras, il mentira ; nous mentirons, vous mentirez, ils mentiront. I should lie, Jementirais, tu mentirais, il mentirait ; nous meiitirions, vous mentiriez, ils mentiraient. lie, mens, mentons, mentez, >jfjDo. That I may He, Pres. ) sJ® *^^6n^^6» tumentes, ( O'nous mentions, vous mentiez, Imp. That I might (ie, ^iementisse, tu mentisses, .. ^..^..^.u , artait ; partaient. )artit ; partirent. )artira ; partiroiit. )artirait ; partiraient. 'il parte ; ils jjartent. )arte ; partent. )artit ; partissent. like partir. I, servi. servent. lervait ; servaient. erviu ; servirent. IKKKUULAll VKUBS OF THE flKoUJSD COJN J UaAT10^ . 80 Fid. CONl). Pres. Impek. SUBJ. j Pres. \ Imp. I shall serve, Je servirai, noua serviroiis, / should serve. Je serviraia, tu serv'iras, V0U3 servirez, tu servirais, noiia servirions, vous serviriez, servons. /A -p SS^ y Photographic Sciences Corporation m V ^^-q V . That 1 miyht sit dovm, gje m'assisso, tu t'assisses, il s'assit ; O^n. n. assissions, v. v. assissiez, ils s'assissent. nonnrk.- To sit down again, rasseoir, is conjugated like asseoir. TO FALL BITE, ECHOIB, FtilJiiui dtic, echeaiit. // falls din', It fell due, It will fall due, Jt would fall due. Fell due, echu. II ^cho'f. II echut. II ^cherra. II ^cherrait. IxD. Pres. Imp. Past j W- { Put. COND. { Pres. \ Imper. SUBJ. j Pres. \ Im^- That it might fall due, Qu'iUcMt. TO MOVE, MOUVOIB. Moving, mouvant. Moved, mu. IND. \ ('^^^'^^ Pres. ) ^^ ^^^^"»' *^i "leus, il meut ; ( nous mouvons, vous mouvez, ils meuyent. Invp. I was moving, Je mouvais, tu mouvais, il mouvait j nous mouvious, vous niouviez, ilu mouvaient. COND. Fres. Imper. IBREOITLAR VERBS OF THE THTRn ( ONMIOATTOV. / movedf Je mus, tu mus, il mut ; nous mumes, voiis mfitea, ils miireiit. / loill move, Je mouvrai, tu mouvras, il mouvra ; nous mouvrons, vous mouvrez, ils mouvront. J will move, Je mouvrais, tu mouvrais, il mouvrait ; nous mouvrions, vous mouvriez, ils mouvraient. move, meus, qu'il nieuve ; mouvons, mouvez, qu'ils meuvout. SuBJ ( ^^<^^ ^ '^^ly "f^^ove, Fres { " J® nieuve, tu meuves, il nieuve ; ( ©"nous mouvions, vous mouviez, ils meuvent. Imp. That I might move, § je liiusse, tu musses, il miit ; ©•nous mussions, vous mussiez, ils mussent. Remark. — Conjugate, in the same manner, to stir up, to excite, iniouvoir. To promote, promouvoir, is conjufjated in the same maniiei-, but is seldom used but in the past participle. TO RAIN, FLEUVOIR. Raining, Ind. ( Fres. I pleuvant. Jt rains, Uained, plu. 11 pleut. Imp. It ivas rahiing, 11 pleuvait. Fast { Def. \ Fnt. Jt raiTiedf Jt will rainy 11 plut . 11 i)leuvra. COND. Fres. Jt would rahif 11 pleuvrait. Imper. SUBJ. Fres. That it may rain, Qu'il pleuve. Imp. That if might rain, Qu'il plut. men von*. ame manner, IRREOTTLAR VERBS OF THE THIRD OONJUOATIoy. 01 TO PROVIDE, FOURVOIR. Providing, pourvoyant. Providedj pourvu. Ind. Pres. Imp. Past T>ef. Fvf. COND. Pres. Impkk. SUBT, ) Pres. \ Imp. I provide, Je pourvois, tu pourvois, n. pourvoyons, v. poiirvoyez, 1 ims providing, Je pourvoyais, tu pourvoyais, 11. pourvoyions, v. pourvoyiez, I provided, Je pourvus, n. pourvilines I ivill provide, Je pourvoirai, tu pourvus, V. pourviites, il pourvoit ; ils pourvoient. il pourvoyait ; ils pourvoyaient. il poumit ; ils pourvurent. il pourvoird ; ils pourvoiront. tFo puuivuiiui, tu pourvoiras, 11. pourvoiroii.3, v. poiirvoirez, J would provide, Je pourvoirais, tu pourvoirais, il pourvoirait ; n. pourvoirions, v. pourvoiriez, ils pourvoiraient. uKs ijuurvuncii», til pourvoirais n. pourvoirions, v. pourvoiriez provide, pourvois, pourvoyons, pourvoyez, That I may provide, ^jepourvoie, tu pourvoies, O'n. pourvoyions, r. pourvoyiez, That I might provide, § je pourvusse, tu pourvusses, il pourvM ; Cn. pourvussions, "v. pourvussiez. ils pourvussent. TO BE ABLE, POUVOIR. qu'il pourvoie ; qu'ils pourvoient. il pourvoie ; ils pourvoient. Ind L« Being able, pouvant. ( I am able, Pres Jepuis, or jepeux, tu peux, ^ ■ ( nous pouvons, vous pouvez, Imp. I was able, Je pouvais, nous pouvions. Pad ( -^'^''^^ able, { nous punies, tu pouvais, vous pouviez, tu pus, vous putes, Able, pu. il pent ; ils peuvent, il pouvait ; ils pouvaient. il put ; ils pureut. ■IP 92 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. CONT). Pn-s. Fni, I will he able, Jo pDurrai, tu poiirras, nous poiirrons, vous pourrez, / would he able, Je pourrais, tu poiirrais, nous pourrions, vous pourriez, (No Imjicratiie. ) -SuBJ ( That I may he able, Pros.) Sjepuisse, tu piiissoa, ( O'nous pnissions, vous puissiez, Tvip. That 1 wlcjhf he able, 3 je pusse, tu pusses, Cnous pussioiiK, vous pussiez, Remark. — In asking qiieHtions jawts-y^, should be used.- -Only one? r is Hounded in the future and conditional. il poiiiTa ; ils pourront. il po irrait ; ils pourraient. il puisse ; ils puissent. il piit ; ils pusseut. Ind. Pres. Imp. Past Def. Fut. TO BE WORTH, VALOIR. Being worth, vjvlant. . Worth, valu. 1 am worth, Je vaux, nous valous, tu va\ix, vous valez, il vaut ; ils valent. / was ivoHh, Je valais, nous valions, / ivas worth, Je valus, nous valumes, 1 will he woHh, Je vaudrai, tu valais, vous valiez, tu valus, vous valutes. il valait ; ils valaient. il valut ; ils valurent. il vaudra ; ils vaudront. il vaudrait ; tu vaudras, nous vaudrons, vous vaudrez, I would be worth, Je vaudrais, tu vaudrais, nous vaudrions, vous vaudriez, ils vaudraient. be worth, vaux, qu'il vaille ; valons, valez^ qu'ils vaillent. That 1 may be worth. Pros. ■) ^ J® vaille, tu vailles, il vaille ; ( O'nous valious, vous valiez, ils vaillent. CoND. Prcs. Imper. SUBJ. \ :^''Thlt:T.T^..P. IRREGULAR VERB?* OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 93 Imp. That J mUjht he worth, ^ je valusse, tu valiisses, il val»*/>. 7 ivas beatimj, .)o battais, j»ou« battions, tu bats, vous battez, tu battais, vous battiez, Beaten, battu. il bat ; ils battent. il battai ; ils battaient. f lABSOULAU VERBS 07 TUS VOUKTH CONJUGATION. Past Def. Fut { COND. Fres. Imfeb. SUBJ. Fres. Imp. J did heatf Je battia, tu battia, nou3 battiraes, voua battltea, / shall heatf Je battrai, tu battras, noua battrons, voua battrez, / would heatf Jo battraia, tu battrais, noua battrions, vous battriez, heat, bata, battons, battez, That I may hmt, § je batte, tu battea, O'noua battions, voua battiez, Tliat I might beat, S je battiaae, tu battisaes, il battit ; ila batiirent. il battra ; ila battront. il battrait ; ila battraiont. qii'il batte ; qu'ila battent. il batte ; ila battent. il battit ; O'noua battiaaions, voua battiaaiez, ila battiaaent. Remark.— To knock down, abattre ; to fight, combattre ; to debate, dibattre; and to beat again, rebattre, are conjugated like battrb. TO DRINK, BOIBE, Ind. Fres. Imp. Past Bef. Fut CoND. Pi-es. Drinking, buvant. / Drink, Je boia, noua buvona, 1 ivas drinking, Je buvaia, nous buviona, I drank, Je bua, noua biimeSj I loill drink, Je boirai, noua boirona, I ivould drink, Je boirais, noua boirions, tu bois, voua buvez, tu buvaia, voua buviez, tu bua, voua butes, tu boiras, voua boirez, tu boirais, vous boiriez, Drunk, bu. il boit ; il9 boivent. il buvait ; ila buvaient. il but ; ila burent. il boira ; ila boiront. il boirait ; lis boiraient. 08 irbegxjlak verbs of thk if'oukth con.iuciation. Lmpeb. SUBJ. Fres. Imp. drinky boJB, buvons, buvez, That I may drink, Sjoboive, tu boives, O*nou8 biivions, vous biivioz, That I mif/ht drinky « je biisso, til busses, Q>nou3 bussions, vous bussiez, (lii'il boive ; qii'ils boivent. il boive ; ila boivent. il bAt ; ila bussent. Ind. Pres, Imp. 1 Fast j Fut TO COISOLUDE, CONOLimB, Concluding f concluant. Concluded, conclu. I concludej Je conclus, tii conclus, il conclut ; nous concluons, vous concUiez, lis concluont. I was concluding, Je concluais, tii concluais, il concluait ; nous concluions, vous ooncluiez, ils concluaient. I concluded, T^ f y Jc coDclua, tu conclus, il conclut ; ^•'" ( nous conclAmes, vous conclCites, ils conclurent. I icill conclude, Je conclurai, tu concluras, il conclura ; nous conclurons, vous conclurez, ils concluront. I would conclude, Je conclurais, tu conclurais, il conclurait ; n. conclurions, vous concluriez, ils concluraicnt. conclude, conclus, concluons, concluez, That I may conclude, g je conclue, tu conclues, il concluo ; Cn. C(jncluiona, vous concluiez, ils concluent. Tmp. That 1 miyht conclude, gjoconclusse, tu conclusses, il concldt ; 6*n. conclussiona, vous conclussiez, ils conclussent. Rcnwrk.—To exclude, cxcUar, is conjugated like concatrc. CoND. Pres. Tmper. SCTBJ. Pres. i qii'il conclue ; qu'ils concluent. IRRKOULAK VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. fJO Ind. Fres. Imp. Past Def. Fut. COND. Fres. Imfer, SUBJ. Fres. Imp. TO LEAD, TO CONDUCT, CONDUIRE. Leading, conduiaant. I lead, Jo conduia, n. conduiaons, I was leading, Je condiiiaais, n. conduisiona, I led, Je conduiais, n. conduisimea, 1 will lead, Je conduirai, 11. conduirona, I would lead, Jo conduiraia, n. conduiriona, 1 conduiaons. That I may lead, § jo condiiise, ©•n. conduisiona, tu conduia, V. conduisez, tu conduisais, V. conduiaiez, tu conc'uisis, V. conduisites, tu conduiras, V. conduirez, tu conduiraia, V. conduiriez, lead, conduia, conduiaoz, Led, conduit, il conduit ; ils conduisent. il conduisait ; ila conduisaient. il conduisit ; ila conduisirent. il conduira ; ila conduiront. il conduirait ; ils conduiraient. qu'il conduise ; qu'ils conduisent. il conduise ; ila conduisent. tu conduises, V. conduiaiez. That I might lead, 2 je conduisisse, tu conduiaissea, il conduisit ; ©•n. conduisiasions, V. conduiaiasiez, ila conduisissent. Memark. — The following are conjugated like conduire. To conatiTict, Construire. to bake, to cook, cuire, to destroy, detruire, to introduce, introduire. to lead back, reconduire. to aeduce, siduirc. To plaster, Endnire. to induce, indnire, to instruct, instruire. to produce, prodnire. to reduce, reduire. to translate, traduire. To shine, luire, ia also conjugated like conduire, but makes hd (\yithout feiu.') in the past participle, and has neither past definitive nor imperfect of the aubjunctive.— To hurt, nuire, 18 COmUffatfid ll'k<^ rmi/7«iiVi> linf molroa /n/iil i ^^ ' ciple (without fern.). " i" aar r\n ^rti= 100 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE roUKTH CONJUGATION. TO PRESERVE, TO PICKLE, CONFIRE. Freservhvj, confisant. Prese^'ved, confit-e. Ind. Fres. Imp. Fast Def. Fat. COND. Fres. Imper. I preserve, Je confis, tu confis, nous contisons, vous confisez, I was preserving, Je confisais, tu confisais, nous confisions, voua oonfisiez, J 2neserved, Je confis, tu confis, nous confimes, vous confites, I will preserve, Je confirai, tu confiras, nous confirons, vous confirez, I would preserve, Jje confirais, tu confirais, il confit ; ils confisent. il confisait ; ils confisaient. il confit ; ils confirent. il confira ; ils confiront. il confirait ; nous confirions, vous confiriez, ils confiraiert. preserve, confis, confisez, qu'il confise ; contisons, confisez, qu'ils confisent. SuBJ ( ^^«^ 1 ^nay preserve, Fres. ) s J® confis3, tu confises, il confise ; * ( C^nous confisions, vous confisiez, ils confisent. Imp. That I might preserve, g je confisse, _ tu confisses, il confit ; Cnous confissions, vous confissiez, ils confissent. Ite.itark.— To discomfit, d^confire, is conjugated like confire. TO KNOW, (JONNAITRE. Knowing, connai8«ant. Known, connu. Fni). Fres. Imp, I know, Jeconnais, tu connais, il connait ; n. connaissons, v. connaissez, ils connaissent. ./ knew, Je connaissais, tu connaissais, il connaissait ; n. Connaissions. v. connaissiRz ils c^nnniaoniont GATION. JRE. confit-e. nfit ; anfiaent. nfisait ; onfisaient. nfit; )nfirent. nfira ; snfiront. nfirait ; mfiraiert. confise ; s confisent. tifise ; mfisent. nfit ; anfisaent. confire. connu. nait ; maissent. laissait ; inaiaonionf. IRltEGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 101 Phst Def. FuL COND. Fres. Imper. tu connus, V. connutes, il "onnut ; ils connurent. tu connaitras, il connaitra ; V. connaitrez, ils connaitront. I kneiv, Je conmis, n. conn^imes, I will know, Je connaitrai, n. connaitrons, J would hiow, Je connaitrais, tu connaitrais, il connaitrait ; n. connaitrions, v. connaitriez, ils connaitraient. know, connais, qu'il connaisse ; qu'ila connaissent. connaiaaona, connaisaez, That I may knov), 2 je connaisse, tu connaisses, O'n. connaissions, v. coniiaissiez, That I might know, § je connusse, tu connusaes, O^n. connussions, v. connussiez, ^emai A:.— Conjugate the following like connattre. SUBJ. Fres. Imp. nous diaons, vous dites ila distni. IREEOTTLAR VERBS OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 106 Imp. Past Def. Fut COND. Fres. Imper. I was saying, Je disais, nous disions, I said, Je dis, nous dimes, I will say, Je dirai, nous dirons, / would say, Je dirais, nous dirions, tu disais, V0U3 disiez, tu dis, vous dites, tu diras, vous direz, tu dirais, vous diriez, say, dis, dites, tu dises, vous disiez, il diaait ; lis disaient. il dit ; lis dirent. il dira ; lis diront. il dirait ; lis diraient. qu'il dise ; qu'ils disent. il dise ; lis disent. disons, g^gj ( That I may say, Fres. ) |.3« ^i«^! . (^ Cnous disions, Imp. That I might say, g je disse, tu disses, il dit ; ©"nous dissions, vous dissiez, lis dissent. ReiMLrk.—ThQ following are conjugated likerfirc; but make tZwcz in the second per. plu. of the present ind. and imperative. to contradict, contredire, to retract, se dedire. to slander, midire, to foretell, pridire. Bedire is however conjugated like dire. TO WRITE, EGBIRE. Writing, ^crivant. Written, <^crit-e. I write. Ind, Fres. J'dcris, nous ^crivons. Imp. I ivas writing, J'^crivais, nous dcrivions, Past J {,f ^?*^' tu ecris, vous 6crivez, tu ^crivais, vous ecriviez, J>ef. I I jenvis. tu ec CUIiVlS, nous tfcrivimes, vous ecrivltos, il 6crit ; ils ecrivent. il ^crivait ; ils ^crivaient. ucriTio ; lis tfchvirent. 106 IREEOULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. Fut. COND. Fres. Imper. I will write,^ J'^crirai, nous dorirons, I would write, JMcrirais, nous dcririons, tu ecriras, V0U8 ecrirez, tu ^crirais. V0U8 ecririez, writej ecris, ecrivez, il ecrira ; ils ecriront. il ecrirai^. ; ils ecriraient. qu'il ecrive ; qu'ils ^crivent. ecnvons, SuBj. ( „ T,^^\ ^ ^«y '^^i^y Pres. ) Sj ecnve, tu ecrives, { O»nous ^crivions, vous (^criviez Imp. Tlmt I might write, §J'(^crivisse, tu ecrivisses, x. v^oxxv^u , O^n. ecrivissions, vous (^crivissiez, ils e'crivissent iZmarA-.— Conjugate the following in the same manner. To inscribe, Inscrire, il ecrive ; ils ecrivent. il ecrivlt ; To circumscrilje, Circomcrire, to describe, decrire, to proscribe, proscrire, to subscribe, sousorire. to prescribe, prescrire, to write again, recrire, to transcribe, traiiscrire. Ind. . Fres. Imp. Fast Def. Fut. I TO MAKE, FAIEE. Making, faisant. Made, fait-e. I make, Je fais, nous f aisons, I was making, Je faisais, nous faisions, I made, Je fis, nous fimes, I will make, Je ferai, nous ferons. CoND i ^ would make, Fres \ Jeferais, ' ^ nous feriona, tu fais, vous faites, tu faisais, vous faisiez, tu fis, vous fites, tu feras, vous ferez, tu ferais, voua feriez, il fait ; ils font. il faisait ; ils faisaient. ilfit; ils firent. il fera ; ils feront. il ferait ; ils feraient. IRREOULAR VERBS OP THE FOURTH CONJUGATION, ICT Imper. maket fais, faisons) faites, f<_ C That I may mcile, "^Pres \ ^i^ ^^^^^f *" f asses, ■ ( O*nous fassions, vous fassiez, Imp. That I might m.ake, § je fisse, til fisses, ©•nous fissions, vous fissiez, Remark.— ConjngaXe the following like f aire. To counterfeit, Contrefaire. To defeat, ) jyAfaire to get rid of, se defaire. to undo, J "^ to do again, refaire. to overcharge, surfaire. qu'il fasse ; qu'ils f assent., il fasse ; ils fassent. il fit ; ila fissent. to complete,2)ar/aire (obsolete), to satisfy, satisfaire. TO READ, LIRE. Ind. Pres. Imp. Past Def. Put. COND. Pres. Imper. Reading, lisant. I ready Je lis, nous lisons, I was reading, Je lisais, nous lisions, I read, Je lus, nous lumes, I loill read, Je lirai, nous lirons, I would read, Je lirais, nous lirions, lisons, tu lis, vous lisez, tu lisais, vous lisiez, tu lus, vous lutes, tu liras, vous lirez, tu lirais, vous liriez, read, lis, lisez, SUBJ. j That I may read, gjelise, tu lises, ( ©"nous lisions, vous lisiez, read, lu-e. il lit ; ils lisent. il lisait ; ils lisaient. il hit ; ils lurent. il lira ; ils liront. il lirait ; ils liraient. qu'il lise ; qu'ils lisent. il lise ; ils lisent. 108 ihreotjlaii verbs of the fourth conjugation. il lat ; lis lussent. Imp. That I might read, Sjelusse, tulussea, O'nuus lussions, vous lussiez, Remark. -Conjugate in the same manner. To elect, Uire; to re-elect, iHUrc; to read again, relive. TO OURSE, MAUDIRE. Cursing, maudisaant. Cursed, maudit-e. I curse, Je maudis, tu maudis, il maudit ; n. maudissons, v, maudissez, ils maudisaent. I was cursing, Je maudissaia, tu maudiasaia, il maudiaaait • n. maudisaiona, v. maudiasiez, ila maudiaaaient. / cursed, tu maudia, V. maudites, Ind. Fres. Imp. Past Def. Fut. COND. Pres. Impek. Je maudia, n. niaudimea, / will curse, Je maudirai, n. maudirons, I would cursCf Je maudiraia, n. maudiriona, il maudit ; ila maudirent. tu maudiraa, V. maudirez, tu maudiraia, V. maudiriez, curse, maudia, maudiaaez, il maiidira ; ila maudiront. il maudirait ; ila maudiraient. SUBJ. Pres. Imp. qu'il maudiaae ; qu'ila maudisaent maudiasons, TJiat I may curse, $ je maudiaae, tu maudisaea, il maudit ; C?n. maudiaaiona, v. maudiasiez, ila maudiasent. That I might curse, § je maudisae, tu maudiasea, O'n. maudiaaiona, v. maudiasiez, Ind. Pres. TO PUT, METTRE. Putting, mettant. I put, Je mets, tu meta, nous mettona, vous mettez, il maudit ; ila maudisaent, Putj mia-e. il met ; ils mottfiMit. lAREOULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 3 Of Imp. Fast Be). Fut. COND. Pres. Imper. I ivas putting, Je mettais, tu mettais, nous inettions, vous mettiez, / put. Sub J Pres Je mis, nous mimes, I 'jAIx. futj Je mettrai, nous mettrons, I would }?ut, 3 k mettrais, nous mettrions, mettons, may put, C That 1 m I §]emettc, I ©""ncus laet raettions, tu mis, vous mites, tu mettras, vous mettrez, tu mettrais, vous mettriez, put, met, mettez, tu mettes, vous mettiez, Imp. That 1 '•mqht put, g je misso, tu misses, 0'i.«cu« missions, vodd missiez, JBfmarfc.— The tallowing ard ffonj'j^ated like mettrc. 11 mettait ; lis mettaient. il mit ; ils mirent. lis mettra ; ils mcttront. il mettrait j ils raettraient. qu'il mette ; qu lis metteut. il mette ; ila mettent. il mlt ; ils missent. To ad mit, A dirjCtti i.. to compromise, co uf>< ymettn tc emit, imdtrb, to ^mit, owttt'^R, to permit, penv-ztpe. to put again, reviLetire. To commit, to resiga. to mediate, ca permit, to piomise. to transmit, Commettre. •it dimettre. aentrtmettre. pefr* ettre. prrmcttre. transmettre. Ind. Pres. lm,p. Fast { Def- 1 tu mouds, vous momez, TO GRIND, MOUDRE. Grinding, moulant. Ground, moulu, r grind, J3 moads, nor« mavJons, I was grinding, Je mo lais , tu moulais, nous tnoulions, vous mouliez, T gro^md, Je moulus, tu monlus, nous moulumes, vous moulfites, ils moulurent. il moud ; ils moulent. il moulait ; ils moulaient. il moulut 110 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THB FOUHTH COWJCQATIOH. COND. Frea. Imper. I (ju'il moule ; qu'ila moulent. il moule ; ils moulent Fui, I wih grind f Je moudrai, tu moudraa, il mcudra ; nous moudrona, vous moudrez, ila moudront. / would grind, Jd moudraia, tu moudraia, il moudraii ; nous moudrions, vous moudriea, Ua moudiaient, grifid, mc'uda, moulona, moulez^ SuBJ. ( ^ T^^* ^ "»«y l/J^iwrf, Frea. ) ^ J^ moule, tu monies, ( O*nous moulions, vous mouUez^ Imp. That I might grind, § je moulusse, tu moulusses, il xnonlAt ; ©•n. moulussions, vous moulussiez, ila moailuasent. Bemark. —Coixjugate to whet, dmoiidre, and to grind agiun, «« moudre, like moudre. TO BE BORN, NAITBE. Being bom, naissant. Bom, nrf-e. I am being bom, Je nais, tu nais, nous naissons, vous naissez, I was being born, Je naissais, tu naissais, nous naissions, vous naissiez, I was born, Je naquis, tu naquis, nous naqulmes, vous naquites, ils naquirent. I will bi born, Je naltrai, tu naitras, nous naitrons, vous naitrez, I would be boiTt, Je naitraiSj tu naitrais, nous naitrions, vous naitriez, m bc"n, Ind. j Fres.^ I Imp, Past Def Fut. COND. Fres Imfzb. i I il nalt ; ils naissent. il naissait ; ils naissaient. il naquit ; il naltra ; ils naitront. il naitrait ; ils naitraient. tuussoiue, naissez. qu'il naisse ; qu'ila uaiasent. raOK. ra ; Iront. raii ; liaient, >ule ; oulent. lent It, "ussent. aguin, re* ntREOXTIAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJITOATIOir. Ill snt. it; lient. rent. >nt. t; ient. se ; asent. St'BJ ( -^^^^ ^ "^^y ^^ Jiom, F(ts. ] § J® naisse, tu naisaes, ( O*nou8 naissions, voua naissir- Imp. That I might be born, il naisse ; ils naissent. 5je naquisso tu iiaauisaes, il naqutt ; 0*n. naqMissions, voua naquiasiez^ ila naquisaent. Jtemark.—Coniuga.te to be bom again, renaUn, in the same war. It iiaa however no post participle and no compound tenaea. TO GRAZE, TO FEED, P AIT RE. Qrazedj pu. Ind. Pres. Imp. Fut. CONI). Pres Grazing, paisaant. / graze, Jo paia, nous paissons, / was grazing, Je paissais, noua paissions, (No Past Definite.) I will graze, Je paitrai, noua paitrona, I would graze, Je paitrais, tu pais, voua paissez, tu paiaaais, voua paissiez, tu paltras, voua paitrez, il pait ; ila paiasent. il palasait ; ila paissaient. il paltra ; ila paitront. tu paitraia, noua paitriona, voua paitriez, graze, paia, paiasons, paiaaez, That I may graze, P je paisae, tu paisses, O^noua iJaissiona, voua paissiez, (No Imperfect.) Remark. — Conjugate to feed, repattre, in the same manner, but with addition of Past Def . and Imperfect. - -Je repus, quej'e reptisse. Imper. SUBJ. j Pres. i o il paltrait ; ils paitraient. qu'il paisse ; qu'ils paiasent. il paisse ; ila paiasent. TO PLEASE, PLAIEE. Pleasing ^ nlaisant. Pleased, plu. Ind Pres J I I please, w. { '^^ plaia, tu plais, il plait : T12 lEREaULAR VEEBS OF THB FOURTH CONJUGATION. Imp. I was pleasiiigf Je plaisais, nous piaisions, 7 plea<:ed, .le pius, nou» plumes, I ^inll please, Je plairai, no'iH plairons, T would please^ Je p]airais, nous plairions, vous plairiez, please, plais, plaisons, plaisez, 3UIW.1 That I rr,ay please _ Fres ) 3 ]e plaise, tu plaises, ( O'nous plaisions, voua plaisiez, Imp. That I might please, g je plusse, tu plusaes, Cnouj plussious, vous plussiez, Past Def. Fut. COND F-^es. Imper. SUBJ. S tu plaisais, V0U8 plaisiez, tu plus, yous pliitea, tu plairas, vous plairez, tu plairais, 11 plaisait : lis plaisaient. il plut ; lis plurent. il plaira ; ils plairont. il plairait ; ils plairaient. qu'il plaise ; qu'ils plaisent. il plaise ; ils plaisent. il pllit J ils plussent. Jtemark.- -Conjugate the following, in the same manner, to humor, to please, complaire. to take delight in, se complaire. to displease, deplaire. to conceal, taire. to be silent, se taire. TO MILK, TBAIBE. Milkimj, trayant. Milked, trait. Ind. Fres. Imp, ! tu trais, vous trayez, Fut. I milk, Je trais, nous trayons, 1 was milking, Je trayais, tu trayais, nous trayions, vous trayiez, (No Fait Definite. J I will milk, Je trairai, tu trairas, nous trairons, vous trairea, il trait ; ils traient. il trayait ; ils trayaient. il traira ; ils traii'oni. UGATION. CCND. Pres. IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. I would milk. 113 Jo trairaia, tii trairais, nous trairions, voiis trairiez, Imper. milk, trais, trayons, trayez, suBj. ( ^ T^'f ^ '""''y '^'\ , . p < Sjetraie, tu traies, ( O'nous trayions, vous trayiez, (No Imperfect. ) ^e»?a?*/i;.— So conjugate to subtract, .so7/s^mi?'e; to extract, extraire; to distract, toamaso, dlstraire. To attract, attraire; and to abstract, abstraire, are seldom used. TO CONQUER, VAINCRE. Conqncrimjj vainqiiant. Conque^'ed, vaincu. il trairait ; ils trairaient. qu'il traie ; qu'ils traient. il traie ; ils traient. Ind. Fres. Imp. Past Def. Fut. COND. Pres. Imper. SuBj. Pres. I conquer, Je vaincs, tu vaincs, il vainc ; nous vainquons, vous vainquez, ils vainquent. I was conquering, Je vainquais, tu vainquais, il vainquait ; nous vainquions, vous vainquiez, ils vainquaient. I conquered, Je vainquis, n. vainquimes, I will conquer, Je vaincrai, tu vainquis, il vainqnit ; vous vainc^uites, ils vainquirent. tu vaincras. nous vaincrons, vous vaincrez, I woidd conquer, Je vainerais, tu vaincrais, nous vaincrions, vous vaincriez, il vaincra ; ils vaincront. vaniquons, conquer, vaincs, vainquez, il vaincrait ; ils vaincraient. qu'il vainque ; qu'ils vainquent. That I may cotiquer, P je vainque, tu vainques, il vainque ; O^ii, y,.^ij^qi|ioj^o^ vous vainquiez, ils vainquent. o H 1j4 IRREGITLAll VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATIOS". Imp. That I might conquer, g je vainquisse, tu vainqiiisses, il vainqnit ; O^n. vainquissions, v. vainquissiez, ils vaiiKiuissent. JlcmarL— The Present and Imperfect of the Indicative are not used, wo 8ay : jc suis victorieux, fitais victorieux. Conjugate : to convince, convaincre, like vaincre. TO LIVE, TO EXIST, VIVRE. Livwrj, vivant. Lived, vecu. Ind. Prcs. Imp. Past Def. Fni. COND. Fres. Impek. I live, Jo vis, nous vivons, I was living, Je vivais, nous vivions, I lived, Je ve'cus, nous vdcumes, I will live, Je vivrai, nous vivrons, / iiy'ould live, Je vivrais, nous vivrions. vivons Sue J. Prai. That I may live, 2Jc vive, f Canons vivions, Vive ; s vivent' veciit ; 3 vecussent. revive, revivre, i» IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. 116 EXERCISE XXVI. ON THE IIIHEGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION. Bcmark.—The following Exercises should be first translated orally, then written. (Translate in English.) lis absolvent— nous battions — il battit — ila absondraient — battu — ila abattirent — bii — ils buvaient — vous conclutes — qii'il boive — ils boiraient— il conclura— que je conclue— ils con- duisent— il de:;ruisit — nous traduisimes — nui — conduisons — il deiruira — ils detruiront — qu'il instruise — nous £,eduisimes — introduit — vous confites — que je confisse — connu— je connai- trai — connaissant — que nous connaissions — (\\\\\ connut — ils disparaitront — reparu — vous reconnaitxez — nous cousimes — qu'elle couse — dejousu — craint — jc craignais — il craignait — nous craignimes — ils craindraient — atteint — nous peignimes — il plaignait— il rejoignit — ils eteignirent — cru — crut — nous crumes — que je croie — que vous croyiez — je fais accroire — il croitra— accroissant — dit — vous dites— ils diront — il dirait — vous dites —V0U3 contredisez — mis— mettant — nous met- trons — que vous mettiez — il admet — ils admettront — nous commettrons — ils compromettaient — nous compromettrons — nous conimimes— ejrit — il decrivit — vous inscrivites — ils ecri- ront — tu dcriras— ils font — vous faites — ils faisaient— ils firent — vous faisiez — que je fasse — ils satisferont — que nous satisfissions — ils se deferont — vous lirez — que vous lisiez — ils lurent — vous maudites — maudit — que nous maudissions— ils moulent — je moulus — nous moudrons — que je moule — n^ — nous naquimes — vous naquites — nous naitrons — qu'ils naissent— paissant — il paissait — plu — je plaisais — nous plai- rons— nous plairions — que nous plussions — vaincu — je suis victoribux — il vaincra—qu'ils vainquent — nous vecumes — vous ve'cutes — qu'il vive — vous vivrez. {Translate the folloiving in French.) You absolve — they absolved — they beat — we beat — let us absolve— they will dissolve— that 1 might beat— we drink- he concluded— let him drink— you will drink— he concludes— we will drink— they would drink— that we might drink- that we may conclude — that we might conclude— thou wilt lead — he will d.estrov — wg T^pfj^ipgd — they introduce — that T may destroy — we conducted — they will destroy — they UG mESENT rARTICIPLE AND VERBAL ADJECTIVE. pickled — let us pickle — known — I knew — I shall know — wo know — we knew — that thoy might disappear— they appeared— that we might know — they will reappear — we sew — you will sew — that they may fear — that they might fear — you will fear — let us fear — they paint — they will imprint — they dye — let us put out — wo will pity — we pitied — we shall pity — believed-— that I may believe — we dhall believe — you said — you will say— we will say — you ^ay — that they may say — that they might have said — you contradict — you would contradict — they will contradict — ho puts — you would put — that they might put — we will resign — he will mediate — that you may compromise — written— he writes— they will write — we wrote — we shall write — they described — you subscribe — they will transcribe — wo make — you make — they will make — let us make — that I may make — that I might make — he Avill get rid of — we satisfied — yoii will read — that 1 might read — let us read — that they might read — they would read — let him curse — that I may grind — born — he was born — they grazed — you pleased — they conquered — we will conquer — they sub- tract — I conquer — he conquered — we live — let us live — let him live — that you may survive. CHAPTER XXVII. ON THE PARTICIPLE— PARTICIPLE PRESENT AND VERBAL ADJECTIVE. 1. The participle xs a word which partakes of the nature of the verb and of that of the adjective. It partakes of the nature of a verb when it marks the action : God has created the world, Dieu a ore le monde. It partakes of the nature of the adjective when it expresses the iianner of being, the state : all the created beings, tous les etres crees. 2. There are two participles ; the present and the past. 3. The present participle, always ending in ant, as : watch- ing, velUdnt; striking, frappant; entreating, suppliant, has also been ^I'tmed ViiQ actim jyart'xiple because, being employed as a tense of the verb, it marks an action. 4. The past participle, the terminations of which are e, i, «, s, t, as : wept, pleure ; beaten, hattn ; obeyed, obei ; painted, peint, ahvays expresses a past action when it is joined with the verb avoir or the verb etre used for avoir*. rRESBNT rARTICirLE AND VERBAL AD.TEOTIVE. Ji; ESENT AND 5. The present participle ia always invariable, that is, it takes neither gender nor number whatever may be the noun to which it refers : a father loving his children, uu j>cre aimant ses e^tfants; fathers loving their children, cles peres aimant Icnrs en f ants. 0. One must not confound the present participle with certain adjectives ending in a?t<, and which are called verbal adj-ectives, which change their termination according to the number and gender of nouns to which they relate. In this sewtence : a mother lovmg her children, uiie. mere aimant ses enfunts, we have an instance of a present i^articiple — but in this ; she is a loving mother, c'cst nne mere aimanhf this last word is variable, being a verbal adjective. Vocabulary. Trial, groaning, slavery, group, playing, to undergo, shade, willow, alder tree, danger, stagnant, to threaten, running, quick, anvil, tooth, dentist, thyme, chaffinch, wishes, dove, male of the dove, affectionate, brilliant, gentle, scolding frightened, wandering, Epreuve. genussant. esclavige, m. groupe, m. jo'uant. sontenir. 07nbrage, m. saule, m. aune, m. danger, m. dormant, menacer. vif-ve. euclnme. dent, m. dentiste, m. serpolet, m. pinson, m. vceux. colomhe. ramier. tendre. iclatant-e. doux-douce. grondant. effrayc. errant. j Disobliging, I manner, hall, living, conform, unceasingly, subject, bright, declivity. evils, must be, leaves, monks, growing yellow to incommode, shining, flourishes, faith, excelling, crowning, triumphant, weakened, mountains, increasing, odoriferous, Desobligeant. manihre. salle. vivant. conforme. continnellement. sujet d. vermeil. penchant* (used in Eng., means inclination to- wards). manx. doit etre, feuilles. m,oines. , jannissant. incommoder. hrillant. Jlenrit. joi. excellant, comblant. triomphant. affaibli. monts. croissant. odorant. , i 1 . 11 i 118 In the middle, means, traversed, llowering, contradictory, believe them- selves, disposition, ON THE PAST PARJICIPLE. An milieu, moyen. traverse, jleurissant. comtrcOisant. se croient caracthx', m. Hind, to remove, to avoid, resounding, hunting horn, flowing, Biche. i eloigner. retentii)mnt-e. mmirwiit t. cur do chasse. coitrant. , brill ant. burning, EXERCISE XXVIl. 1. Voyez ces groupes d'enfants se jouant sens l*ombrage. 2. Le saule aimo uno eau vive et laune une eau dormante. 3. Le serpolet lleurit sur les monts odorants. 4. Le pinson remplit Fair de sa voix dclatante. 5 La colombe appelle son ramier d'uno voix gdmissante. C. Combien de pJjres trem- blant de deplaire h leurs enfants sont faibles, et se croient tendres. 7 C'est une persomm d'un naturel doux. jamais ne grondant, ni ne contrediiunt. 8 Les feuilles jaunissant chaque jour cbmmenc6rent i\ so detacher des arbres. 9. Le vrai moyen d'ekigner la traerre. c est do cultiver les armes, c'est d'honorer lea nomiue excellanL dans cette profession. 10. Les succes croissant sans cesse nous fatiguepL" 11 La jeunebichoeffrayeo, errante au milicAi des boiscroit entendre encore la voix retenti^santo dea chiens et les sons mourants du cor de cliaase. 12. Au mlliei. des de'serts brulants de I'Afrique on trouve des Ocisig traversfios par des caux cou- rantes et tapisst^es de gazv-ns veraoyants. 13. Les eaux dor- mantes sont meilleures pour les chevaiix que les eaux vives. 14. Une lille tremblant de desol eir h sa mere. 15. Lea moincs vermeils et brillants de sanle. 10. II y a des peuplea Chretiens gemissants dans un triste esclavage. Chapter xxyiil (Tn the past participle. 1. The past participle joined to the verb avoir remains invariable when a complement does not precede it in the regular constuuction of the sentence, when we say ; I have read, fai hi, the participle remains invariable as there is no complement. 2. The participle remains then also invari.able whatever may be the gender and the number of the noun which follows, e. tismint-e. •atit t. :■ ctiasse. Hi. , nt. Vmbrage. dorm ante. Le pin son ■ppelle SOD )rcs rreiii' 30 croient X. jamais jaunissant !8. 9. Le les armes, Tofession. nl-11 La b entendre mourants ulants de :)aux cou- eaux dor- Lux vives. 15. Lea 3S peuplea ' remains it in the r : I have lere ia no whatever 1 follows, Oir THIS PAHT PAKTICIPLB. 119 M ; 1 have read the books, fai In les livrcs ; I have read the letters, /a* lu les lettres 3 In aij other cases the past participle follows the rule commcii to ail adjectives, as o duld badly brought up, nn enjant ma', neve^ Jts enfants mal ileves ; girls badly brought ap, de>> fiilen mat elevens 4 The cluef thing tlier, ia to recognize in the sentence the noun tc which the participle a])piie3, and this can be ascer- tained bj the questi r. vvLo is ' or what is ? Thus in this sentence tlio books v-hich I ha\o read, les iivres qnefai Ins. What IS read ( 1 he bjots, Lus must then bo in the mas- ouline piurai by the common rule bearing on all adjectivos. * (^0? further explanations on the past participle, see i:i]jntax) , Vocabulary. I^eed, repeated, hjibit nature, wishes, fatal, rule, r^g;me, Dutch, moved, eacited. art. making, dike, threatened, weight, heap. to swallow up, firmness, event, affair, cherry-tree, to commuili- cate, border, rural, apple-treo, guilty, Besovn, m. Hppie. haf'ttudt. natw^t. VCHhX fuutsta regime. * JJjltanUaia. atiendris art, m. confvction, f. digut f menaces, poids, m. amas, m engtontir. fermete. ejenement. affaire, f. cerisier. comanuniqner. bord. champetre. pummier. coupahU. Applied. salvation, tliukness, layer, j devoted, ! stnke. j sand, ! facilitate, [ vividly, j fnghtfui, j frightened, I corrupt, sea, struggling, immense, unperceived, hole, gentleness, to suffice, danger, sonorous, cares, companion, already, Appliqu^. salut. epaisseur. couclie, f. devuiiL pieu, m. sable, m, faciliter. vivcmeiU. ej/rayant. c^raie. corrompu. mcr, f. Initant. immense. inaper^n. iron, m. doticcu)'* (when usf^d in Eng,, means gratuity). mfjlre. danger. sonore. soius. I compagnon, m. ( compagne, f. dejd. ' m I'll I II : » Si 120 ON THE PREPOSITION, rii To respect, Respecter. Coaquests, Conquites. skilful, adroit. pear tree. poirier, m. glad, bien aise. suspended, suspendu. ashore, A te^re. moon, lime. selfish, avare. to fade. falter. stn])icl', bete. among, parmi. my little dar- can do. penveni faire. ling, mon chou. only, aloncj senl. humpbacked. bossii. stem, tipe. bietis. on horseback, a cheval. blessings, cares, soms. rusticity, rusticite. economy, economie. office. bureaUf m. inquisitive. curieux-M. EXERCISE XXVIII. 1. Lea besoins repetes am^nent I'habitude. 2. La nature et la mort .ont entendu ma voix. 3. Lo fruit des belles actions est de Ics avoir faites. 4. L'ambition ne voit iximais sea vojux remplis. 5. Ih ont communique cette fat^heuse nouvelle h cette pauvre mbr.e. Mon pauvre chou, a-t-elle dit en se tordant les mains de dciespoir, tu es done mort. Mes yeux ont attendu le jour avec la plus vive impatience. 7. Que de palais ddtruits par cette liorriblo guerre. 8. Les Hollandais ont porte dans la confection de leurs digues Vht- telligence de soins et d economie qu'ils ont applique o h tous leurs travaux. 9. Do tius les travajix que les hommes ont executes aucun n'a excite aussi vivemetit mon admiration. 10. Qu'elle est bellt* CPtte nature cultiveo — que par les soins de I'homme, elle est brillante et pompeusement pares. 11. Comme une lampe d' )r dans I'azur suspendu^, la luno se balance aux bords de rhorraon. 12, Nourris dans I'opulence, ces enfants ser'>nt avares et betes. 13. Nourris h la cam- pague dans toute la rusticitd champetre, vos enfants y pren- dront une voix plus sonore. 14. Les enfants mal eleves sont haia et detestes. 15. Arrachec de sa tige cette fleiit se fanera. CHAPTER XXIX. ON THE PREPOSITION. 1. T!ie preposition is an invariable word which not only serves to unite two words, the second of which completes oi' ON THE PREPOSITION. 121 detennines the sense of the tirst, but which marks also the relation which those words have between themselves. 2. The proposition is thus called because it ia always prepoaed or placed before the second clause. 3. There are dilferent kinds of prepositions. Eno. French. o o fi 1. Place. 2. Time. 3. Union. 4. End, or intention. in. eii. at the house of, chez. sur. 5. 6. 7. Cause. Exception. r\ -J.- i against, Opposition. I . ° ^pi^^' •s ujDon, I under, [_ towards, C before, ) after, S since, ( whilst, ( with, I according to, ( towards, ( concerning, seeing that, except. of. sous. vers, etc., avant. aprhs. depuis. durant. avec. selon. eiivers. pour. touchant. vu. excepte. coutre. tnalgre. void. voilcL. etc. 1, 8. Indication, here is, 4. The most important prepositions are the following : Eng. To, after, m, of, below, between, except, notwithstand- ing, among, near, upon, here is, before, French. aprh. ians. de. dessnus. entre. hors. nonohstant. parmi. prks. sur. voici. avant. Eng. Towards, until, beyond, during, without, towards, there is, at the house, against, from, above, in, Wl th tl ception, ex- French. Envers. j^isque. outre. pendant. sans. vers. voilcb. chez. contre. dhs. dessus, en, hormis. \ 122 With, since, behind, before. ON THE PREPOSITION. Avec. dcpuis. derrihe. (levant. In spite of, Malgri. by, par. for, pour. according to, scion. opposite, vis a vis. 5. An assemblage of words, or a phrase, that performs the oftce of a preposition, is called a prepositional locutior, or an adjunct, such as : alongside, d cCie de ; with the exception ot a I exception dc, etc., etc. G. There are also certain words which are employed acd- (ienta ly as prepositions, as : concerning, concernant ; with regard to, touchant, etc., etc. Vocabulary. To pluck out, thought, conscience, number, of himself, refuge, we live, gift, to look at one's self in the glass, to touch up, debt, certainly, to grow ugly, violin, usurper, flute, grimace, makes, through, coflin, to adorn. Arracher. pensee, f. conscience, f. noinbre. de lui mcme. refuge, m. noris vlvons. don. se mirer. retoucher, dette. d coup sur. s'enlaidir. violon, m. usurpateur. flute. grimace, contracte, a travers. cercueil, m. parer. mathematics, maihematique, to produce, produire. genius, geaie. to efface, effacer. infamous, infame. Darkness victory, to think, around, dangerous, Ave are born, to foresee, bitterness, sinner, Rhine, truth, pain, troiible, to bear, courage, over, resi-^nation, within, remedy, yard, criminal, cloth, consolation. much thought of, accomplish- ment, face, pistol, Tenkbres. victoire, f. ijonger. ardour. dangercux. nous naissons. preooir. amertume. jjicheur. Le lihin. la vente. peine, f. supporter. courage, m. par dcdsus. rengnxtion. au dcdau^. remtde. anne. criminel. drap. consolation. considers, accompllsse- ment. visage, m. pistokt. ADT-RRB— ADVEHniAL L0CT7TI0N. 123 Innui, Ennui. * Idle, Faretaevx. birth. naissance. maxim, vnaxime. night, 'tiUit. hope. espe ranee. disappoint- sword, c;;cj. jnent. mecompte. prejudice, prejurje. study. etude. to become, devenir. subject to, sit jet d. needle. aiguille, f. in such a case, en pareil cas. produce, produisent EXERCISE XXIX. 1. La Franco s'etend depuis Ic Rhin jusqxi'h, I'Ocean. 2. Lea talents produisent suivant la culture. 3. Songez h votre mere ; c'cst la meilleuro disposition contre les pensees dangereuses. 4. L'un des mcilleurs rembdcs contre nos firopres chagrins, c'est de chercher des consolations contre cs chagrins des autres. 5. L'accomplissement des devoirs se lit SID' le visage. 6. L'esp(^rance paresseuse de devenir richo, habile, consider^ n'est qu'une es^erance folle etsujette h. mdcompte. 7. Ne cherchons pas h parer nos merites, en pareil cas, qui veut retoucher efface. 8 La victoire vole an- tour de lui. 9. La main du Seigneur arrachera le j echeur de dessus la terre. 10. Le soldat saute par dessus la muraille. 11. Le criminel est trouble au-dedans de lui-mome. 12. Tout usurpateur est pr^s do son cercueil. 13. I/homme dfes sa naissance a le sentiment du plaisir et de la douleur. 14. L'homme est plac6 libre entre le vice et la vertu. 15. La terre, cette bonne m6re, multiplie ses dons selon le nombre de ses enfants qui meritent ses fruits par leur travail. IC. Le mortel heureux contracte une dette avec le malheur. 17. II y a devant le Dieu de tons une e ,'alile sainte. 18. Nous naissons, nous vivons pour la socie 1.6. 19. Le travail est une meillcure resource contre I'ennui que le plaisir. 20. La verile nonobstant le pr6juge, I'erreur et le mensonge se fait jour et perce h la fin. CHAPTER XXX. THE ADVERB— ADVERBIAL LOCUTION. 1. The adverb is an invariable word which serves to mo- dify a verb or an adjective. If I say : y/u speak wisely, vous parlez sagemetd, the word sagemcnt modifies the verb purler. It indicates in what manner you speak. It is there- fore an adverb. 1^ m II !; 124 ADVEltB— ADVKTlBrAL LOCUTION. 2. The adverb can modify another adverb, as : ho speaks very eloquently, il park fort Hoqiiemmcnt. 3. There are diilerent kinda of adverbs : — Eno. (1.) Adverbs of Manner, Quality. French. Eno. French. Prudently, Prudemrnait. I t t j.^ t ,• wisely, sagement. \ Indignantly, Indignement. (2.) Adverbs of Time. To day, Aujourd'hui yesterday, hier. to morrow, demain. formerly, | tl^-^"'* then. ( jadis. alors. Immediately, Aussitdt. henceforth, desormais. soon, j *^.*- ... ' ( bientot. late, tard. always, toiijours. never, jamais. (3.) Adverbs of Situation, Place, Order. Here, there, before, behind, within. Id. Id, y. devant. derrihe. dedans. Above, below, at first, firstly, afterwards. (4.) Adverbs of Quantity. Enough, Assez. much, beaiicoup. little, peu. too much, trop. less, moins. how much, combien. Very, How many, such, quite, so much, Dessus. dessous. d'abord. premierement. ensuite. Trh. Que. si. tout, tellement. (5.) Adverbs of Comparison. Better, Mieux. ) Fol. by Mieux. ) plus. ) more, plus. ) que more Less, Moins. ) Fol. by ^ , X - as much, autant. ] que. davantage, (comes at the end of the sentence or [clause.) (6.) Adverbs of Affirmation. Yes, assuredly, Oui. assiiremeuf. Certainlv ^ Oertainement. • • I certes. .' lili A.DVERB--ADVEEBIAL LOCUTION. (7.) Adverbs of Nexjalion. Not, 125 (stronger), by no means, nnllement. aucunemait. No, Nf^n. not, non-pas, (emphatic.) not, ve-pas. by no moans, 4. By an adverbial locution is meant any assemblage of 'words supplying the place of a simple adverb. The day after I Here and there, ^'dd /d. to-morrow, apres (bmam. herein enclosed, cc-indus. with regret, a rcgrd. I for the future, dorenaoant. by chance, ])«»• hasard. 5 Adverbs in general are equivalent to a noun preceded by a preposition ; thus : prudently, prndemmetd, is the same as : avec prudence. Hence it follows that adverbs have a complete sense and are usually employed without a comple- ment. , . , 6. There are a few exceptions however to this rule, viz . those that have not an absolute signification, such as inde- pendently, independemment ; in a different way, dijferevi- ment, etc. , ., ... , 7. The adverbs of quantity demand the preposition de, when they have a noun as complement. Tcmt d'ennni.* trop dc luxe, comblcn d'hommes. So much weariness, so much annoyance, too much luxury, how many men, 8. Certain adjectives are sometimes employed as adverbs ; that is when they modify a verb or an adjective, such as : firm ferme; aloud, /lan^- strike firmly, //-apF'-Z^'-'^^ =/^^^r ment; to speak aloud, parler hant = hautement ; ^'^p^^?",^" denly, sortir soudain^soudainement ; to sing out ot time, chanter faux =zfausscment . Vocabulary. One confounds. On confond. modesty, pmhur, f. to spare, minager. grain, grain, m. to germinate, gp.rminer. To weep, ground, be silent, snnfivfluitv. Pleurer. terrain, m. ( tais toi. \ taisez roi«. super flu, m. ■0tm.m*., 126 ADVERB — ADVERBIAL LOCUTION, But little, would seem, honest, cost, low action, late, good, to reflect, Ne-(jnerc. jjarait ruient. ho'itnete. conte. hassesse, f. tard. h'lp.n. 1 ejlechir. reflect, (3rd ) .,,.,. per. plu.) \ '''^M'^'^^^^ent short hand- writer, stenographe. fear, penr, f. advises, (3rd ) .„ per. sing.) \<^onseille. financier, financier. frankness, franchise, f. contracted, contract e. with impunity, impunement The ungrateful one, ringrat. knidness, hienfalt, m, grateful , reconnmasant. thou wilt sell, tn -endras. tyranny, to laugh at, rays, mad house, disperse, (3rd per. plu.) to disperse, seditions, defect, as, entirely, gravity tyruHiue, f. se moqner de rayons, m. maison defous. > dimpent. dlsslper. seditions, f. de/unt, m. ainsi qnc. entih'ement. gravid, f. the one who, celui qv/i. profoundly, profondemenL a servant, valet, m* his steed, sa'monture. every where, partout. EXERCISE XXX. 1. On confond aisement le vice et la vertu. 2 Le vice sans pudeur est trop incorrigible. 3. Qui veut voyager loin menage sa monture 4. Ne chantons jamais aupr^s do ceux qui pleurent. 6. Ceux qui ont beaucoup sont obli' 63 de donner beauconp. 6. Dans un terrain trop sec, le grain no germe guere. 7 Tous les honneurs paraitraient payej trop Cheryl Ihonnete homme s'lls lui avaier t coute quelque bassesse. 8. 11 nest jamais tard pour faire du bien. 9. Les enfants parlent beaucoup et leaechissent peu. 10. L'Eurooe est moirigrandeque I'Asie. 11. Si tu achates le superflu, tu vendras bientot le neoessaire. 12. II ne faut jamais se moquer des miserables. ^ 13. i insi que les rayons du soleil dissipent lesnuages, amsi laprcience du prince dissipe les seJitions i4 L homme entierement seul est celui qui n'a point d'amis* l&. Un hnancier ne dort jamais profondcment. 10. Cette clettd a e.e contractee anterienrement h la votre. 17 Cet acta a e.e fait posleneurement a celui dont vous parlez 18 Un valet dit rarement du bien de son maitre. 10. Un Wan ne salt pas rougir impunement. 20. La vertu d'elle mfime eat ' partout te»p«ctabie. " CONJUNCTION — CONJCNCTTVE LOCUTION. 127 CHAPTER XXXI. THE CONJUNCTION-CONJUNCTIVE LOCUTION. 1. The conjunction is an invariable word which serves to join two expressions or two similar propositions in expressing the different point of view under which our mind considers the relation which unites them, such as : — Because, how, then, and, but, Car. comment. dune. et. mats. Neither, or, why, then, when, m. oil. pourqiioi, pnis. qiiand, etc. 2. The conjunction is to the sentence what the preposition is to the words. Ex.— His face charms and interests me, sa figure me charme et vn'lnieresse ; et serves to join the iirst clause, sajijure me charme to m'interesse, and is therefore a conjunction. 3. By a conjunctive locution is meant any union of words used instead of a conjunction, such as : — .Besides, Au reste. at least, au moins. on the contrary, au contraire. Besides, Au surplus. or else, on hlen. provided that pourvu que. 4. The conj\mction ^ue is the one in most frequent use. It must not be confounded with relative pronoun que, which is equivalent to leqi(,el, laquelle or quelle chose. Thus in this sentence : T believe you will be praised for the^ good action which you have done, je cruis que vovs serez lone de la bonne action que vans avezfaite. The first que is a conjunction, and the second que is a relative pronoun. 5. Que is an adverb when it can be changed into comhien. Ex.— How barren nature is when explained by sophists, que la nature est skche quand elk est expUquea par des sophistes. Vocabulary. Faute, f. Fi*ult, to commence again, esteem, know, to know, prwumption, presomption, f. recommencer. estime. buchcz. savnir. An omen, } jj^^ ^,^ a presage, ) , vanity, vanite. f. to find fault, reprendre. avoid, ejittz. idleness, oisivitif f. ftccordixijf, seloii. 128 CONJUNCTION — CONJUNCTIVE LOr'UTION. Strength, Force, To cling to, Tcnlr a. skill, habllete, f. should we not lie tiendrions becomes. devieiit. cling to 1 nous pas. kindness, hotde, f. Aveakness, faiblesse, f. genius. gohie, m. to take posses - diamonds. diamants, m. sion, s^mparer de. honor. hontienr, m. advice, co'iiseil, m. to surround, envelopper. to chat. causer. misfortune, malheur, ni. safety, sureic, L cables, cables, m. to attach. aitacher. discipline, discipline, f. mind. esprit, m. shore. rivage, m. quiet. tranquille. susceptible. susceptible. desires. dislrs. caprices, caprices. fellow. diahle. impressions. impressions. shame. hontc, f. anticipate, prevodr. roof, toit. fear. craiute. a kindness. un bienfait, m the morrow, le lendemain. distrust, defiance. ship, ; vaisseau, m. to come, venir. without ceas- to absolve. absoudre. ing, sans cesse. to apply one's infancy, enfaiice. self. s'appliqiier. people. les gens. country, exile. exile. (fatherland,) j9antc, f. it. ( ble7ifaU, 111. 'fiance. nir. soudre. [ppliquer. itrie. mmeil, m. ii"d.'habilete, >int h la per- m les oublie. )n ni en mal. me ne vous ne fait pas 7. Evitez ses. 8. II y connait pas. 311 s vient du 111 vice lors- i de cliarmes . de petit dfes t leiirs prix nt nyip. nmiH INTERJECTION — INTERJECTIONAL LOCUTION. 129 causoAs, la mort arrive et nous enveloppe do ses ombres. 15. Comme iin vaisseau eat plus en surete qiiand denx cables I'attacheiit au rivage, de meme line mfere est plus heureuse quand elle a deux enfants. 16. C'est dans I'enfance quand I'anie est susceptible k toutes les impressions qu'il faut s'ap- pliquer h. former le caract^re. 17. Les gens qui savent peu parlent beaucoup, et les gens qui savent beaucoup parlent peu. 18. Jean Jacques Rousseau a e,e fcrt persecute parce qu'il prenait le parti des malheureux. 19. Heureux celui qui sait se contenter de pen ; son sommeil n'est trouble ni par les craintes ni par les desirs hcmteux de I'avarice. 20. Dieu absout aussitot qu'il voit la penitence dans le coeur. CHAPTER XXXII. THE INTERJECTION— INTERJECTIONAL LOCUTION. 1. The interjection is an invariable word which serves to express joy, pain, fear, surprise, or any sudden affection of the soul. 2. Any combination of wordg of that nature forms what is termed an interjectional locution such as : Just Heaven ! JiLste del ! dear me ! Mu)i, Dlen ! 3. The most frequently used are as follows : Zounds ! Farhlen ! Ah ! Hush ! well ! indeed ! the deuce hark ! Ah! dint ! eh Ken ! ovA-dd / dlantre ! ecuutez I u li «( (C fie! look out ! ventreblen ! palsambleu I ventregris / sac a papier ! sapristi ! fi done I gave! 4. There are words which are interjections accidentally, such as ; courage ! courage ! clear the way ! gare I come ! alloHs! what is it ] plait-il? 5. There is a slight di.Tercnce in the following which must be noted : ah ! ha ! eh ! he ! 6 ! oh ! Ah! marks joy, admiration, pain. Ex. —-Ah ! what plcasuro tu bo a suldior. Ah ! quel plaisir d'etre suldat. I '. (Mi ■tz mr 130 INTERJECTION — INTERJECTIONAL LOCUTION. Ha ! indicates surprise. Ex. — Hii ! you are a saint and you get mad. Ha ! vous etes devut et vuus vous emportez. Eh ! expresses surprise. Ex. — Ell ! who has not wept over some cniel loss. Eh ! qui n'a pas pleure qiLelqice perte cruelle. He I mostly used to call. Ex. — Eh ! why did you not say so ? Me ! que ne le disiez vuus ? A () I is used when addressing a person. Ex. — O ! you Avho listen to me. ! vous qui m^ecvHtez. Oh ! to mark surprise, admiration. Ex. — Oh ! what cruelty. Oh I quelle cruaute. Vocabulary. Fear, to correct, to catch, to knew again, smile, an insult, health, kingdom, error, pleasing, gently, motion, remonstrance, somebody, to remain, to put, to place, to advance, traitor, to be exhaust- ed, to strangle, to lame, Peur. corrujer. prendre, reconnaitre. sour ire. un a.§ront. saute. royaume, m. e;jaremeutj m. plaisant. tout beau, mouvement, m, remuntrance, f , quelqu'un. Tester, mettre. avai(,cer. traxtre. n'e?i pouvoir plus. Mrangler. estropier. woe to, The door, to mean, to suffer, murder, indeed, help, L«*"•- 134 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISE. by one single man, the riches of the principal Romans were immense. 4. My brothers have read one fable and written three exercises, b. Here is the fable which my brothers have read. C. Penelope, his Avife, and I, who am his son, have lost the hope of seeing him again. 7. Pygmalion ate nothing but fruits that he had gathered himself in his garden. 8. There are the men whom I saw (I have seen). 9. We have been deceived {un, nous a). 10. I consider that she has atoned for (racheter) her sins by the alms which she has scattered (re- pandre) secretly among {dans le sein) the poor. 11. Your illustrious parents did me the honor to select me to give you the first principles of the French Language. 12. My sister has cut her finger. 13. We have hurt ourselves whilst play- ing.^ 14. By order of the general, whose wisdom foresaw (preou) everything, cavalry {des cavaliers) spread over the country to reconnoitre the position. 15. Firmness united to gentleness is a bar of iron surrounded with velvet. IG. Men of genius are victims crowned with flowers and devoted to the salvation of mankind (genre humain). EXERCISE XXIV. ON THE PREPOSITION. (See Chapter XXIX, page 120.) 1. Humanity consists in doing (to do) all the good that one can. 2. The misanthrope avoids men without hating them, the egotist seeks them (ks recherche) without loving them. 3. The finest genius becomes weak with age. 4. The condi- tion of comedians was infamous among the Romans and honor- able among the Greeks. 5. When Samt Louis ascended the throne, the night of ignorance enveloped everything (couvrait tout de) in darkness. 6. Before seeking to make friends, commence by being your own. 7. The wicked man hurts himself (se wut) before hurting others. 8. The wisest maxim with regard to secrets, is noL to listen to any of them (de n'en point ecouter) and not to tell any. 9. Ambition is an insa- tiable desire to rise {de s clever) even above the ruins of others. 10. To fight with sword and pistol. 11. Cloth (at) seven shillings a yard. 12. He applies himself to the study of mathematics. 13. She works at her needle and she is very industrious. 14. He plays upon (of) the flute, the violin and several other instruments. 15. That man lives on {d.e^ vege- tables and fruits. RBCAPITl LATORY EXERCISE. mb lomans were I and written brothers have 3on, have lost 3 nothing but ti. 8. There e have been 13 atoned for scattered (ne- V. 11. Your e to give you L2. My sister whilst play- dom foresaw jad over the Less united to ;. IG. Men of voted to the food that one hating them, loving them. . The condi- 13 and honor- iscended the ing (convrait ake friends, d man hurts v^isest maxim hem (de ii'en L is an insa- ^ns of others. Ii (at) seven he study of she is very le violin and )n (de^ vesfe- EXERCISE XXV. THE ADVERB-ADVERBIAL LOCUTION. (SCO Cuapter XXX, page 123.) 1 You must (il fant) always act with frankness if you wish (si Von vent) to be sincerely virtuous. 2. We look quietly and without emotion on unjust actions which do not anect us (f rapper). 3. Honor can never be tannshed (J. etn) by U\o violence (pln.)oi tyranny. 4. The wicked always die too late. 5. Nothing shows {caraderise) better the superiority ot genius than the talent of preparing great success from afar. C Gravity is sometimes a mystery of the body invented to conceal the defects of the mind. 7 I do not believe that news, not that the thing is impossible, but because it does not appear probable to me (vraisemhlahle). 8. Have you ever seen anything so beautiful ? never. 9. I have considered this maturely, and I do not advise you (conseiller) to do it. 10 He was very much inclined {porie a) to do it, but he fol- lowed my advice. 11. He has not yet learned his lesson. 12 Will you soon have finished your work ? I will T*eturii (reviendrai) in an hour. 13. That man is sometimes sad, his son is in a mad house. 14. We ought to seek (recliercher) the useful rather than the agreeable. 15. Henry IV looked upon the education of the young as a thing from which depended the happiness of the people. EXERCISE XXVI. THE CONJUNCTION— CONJUNCTIVE LOCUTION. (See Chapter XXXI> page 127.) 1. Adulation brings forth {enfante) pride, and pride always proves (devient) fatal to virtue. 2. The law should be like death, which spares no one. 3. The caprices of children are never the work of nature, but of bad dis-.iplme. 4. ihe greatest misfortunes are those which we bring (que nous nous cansons) on ourselves. 5. What is worse than always wishing for the morrow. 6. How happy is the exile when the soil of the country is no longer forbidden to him, and when he re-enters under the roof which gave him birth {qm le vit naitre), 7 Friendship ends where distrust commences. ». i he priests go to divine service when the bell calls them (hs appelle). 9 It is bv loving, we make ourselves beloved by others {onse fait aimer des autres). 10. We never commit so many louies ^ " i ^'iaw&jr fesgiii 136 EECAPITULATORY EXEROISI!. as when we are in love (que lorsqu'on aime). 11. The poor fellow 18 always at work and yet he is starving, (il se meuH de faim). 12. Exercise either {salt) of the body or the mind 13 useful. 13. You are a liappy man, you do just as you please (comme %l voHs plait). 14. You have disobeyed mv orders therefore you will compel me to do that. 15. How 18 it that (d'ou vient que) you will not do that for me. EXERCISE XXVII. THE INTERJECTION -INTERJECTIONAL LOCUTION. (See Chapter XXXII, page 129.) 1 h ^^^J? *^® ^^^^^ "^^^"^ ^^^^ • "'"^ *o *^ie ^^ind who are : • . r; ^^l^"'^^ • y^" "i^^t not say that, you saw me come out of that room. 3. Alas ! what matters a kingdom to me without health. 4. Aye ! help, murder, O traitor, you have killed me 6. Gently, sir, do )]ot go so fast. 6. Dear me ' mamma, do not let (ne permeiiez pas) my cousin tease (taquC ner) me so. 7. Zounds sir, you are laughing at me. 8. Welcome, sir, come in, we are delighted to see you 9. Look out ! there is the train. 10. Fie ! a youn<^ lady well brought up, do such a thing as that. 11. Woe to tTie wicked. 12. Alas ! my poor boy is dead. 13. Gently, Fir, or 1 will knock you down (assommer). 14. Ah well ! it is all over. 10. Hurrah ! they have won the day, (gag7ier la bataille). lEnd of the Recapitulatory Exercises of the 1st Part.'\ 1. The poor (il se mevrt r the mind just as you sobeyed my . 15. How me. 137 PART IL NAL SYNTAX. nd who are i\v me come loin to me, r, you have Dear me ! sase (taqui- ig at me. o see you. ig la-Iy well ;he wicked, r, or 1 will is all over. itaille). Fart] CHAPTEH I. SYNTAX OF THE NOUN— GENDER OF SEVERAL NOUNS. 1. Nouns usually admit of only one gender ; they are either masculine, as : Country, pays ; tree, arbrc ; rock, rucher ; a large river, flcuve, or feminine, as : Mountain, moniagne ; earth, tare; river, rivUre ; valley, vallec ; ioresi, for et, etc., etc. A few however adopt both genders with the same or with a different meaning. 2. Help, assistance, aide is feminine, as : Prompt assist- ance, aide prompte ; to be of great assistance, etre d'une grande aide. Aide, he who works with a person or under his orders, is masculine, as : I need an assistant, fai hesoin tZ'im aide ; a surgeon's assistant, Vaide d'un chirvrgien ; an imder-cook, un aide de c^dsine ; an aide-de-camp, wi aide-de-camp*. ■ 3. Eagle, aigh, bird of prey, is masculine, as : A black eagle, un aigle noir ; a royal eagle, un aigle royal. It is used in a figurative sense for a man who has a superior mind, as : That man is an eagle compared to those of whom you speak, cet hommc-la est un aigle an prix de ceux dont vous imrhz. Eagle, aigle, military ensign, device, is feminine. Ex.— The arms of the French Empire were an eagle holding a thunder- laolt in its talons, les armes de V empire Frangais Haient wm aigle tenant un foudre dans ses serres; the Imperial eagle, V aigle imperiale; the Roman eagle, V aigle Bomaine. 4. Love, amour is masculine when it signifies the senti- ment by which tlie heart is drawn cowards a person, the object of one's affections, of one's desires. Ex. —Ardent love, 133 SYNTAX OP NOUN— OENDER OF NOUN. amour ardent; paternal love, amour paternel. Amour is sometimes feminine in the singular in poetry, and almost always feminine in the plural, even in prose. Ex.— Ard»nt, foolish love, cVardcntcs, de foUes amours ; tirst love, les pre- mlircs amours. It is masculine in the sense of Cupid. Ex. — To paint, to carve Cupids, pciudre, sculptcr des amours; Venus is the mother of love, Vetius est la mh-e des araours. 5. Autumn, automne, according to the Academy, is both masc. and foni., the masculine however is preferable. 6. Something, quclqne chose employed .as one single word is always masculine. Ex. — If you Avant anything I will give it to you, s'll V0U8 manque qnclque chose, je vous le donnerai. Quclqne chose is feminine when it signifies whatever may be the thing. Ex. — Whatever may be the thing which I have heard, quclqne chose que fate ciitendne. 7. Couple, couple, when said of two things of the same kind, is feminine. Ex.— A couple of eggs, nne couple dkmfs ; give me a couple, donnez m'en nne ccuple. Couple is masculine when said of two animated beings acting in concert. Ex. — A couple of friends, un couple d'amis; a faithful couple, un couple fidele ; a couple of doves, un couple de tourterelles. 8. Delight, pleasure, delices is feminine. Ex. — It is his greatest pleasure, il en fait sea plus chores delices. Sometimes it is employed in the singular, then it is masculine. Ex. — It is a great treat to drink when one's thirst is very great, c^est un grand delice de boire quand la so if est ardente. 9. Child, enfant is applied generally to children of both eexes. Ex. — There is a fine child, voila un hel enfant ; your daughter is a spoiled child, votrefille est un enfant gate. It becomes however feminine when it particularly refers in an affectionate way. Ex. — Listen to me my pretty child, ecou' iez-moi ma belle enfant. In the plural it is always masculine, thus a mother who only had daughters will say : All my children are dead, tons mes enfants sont morta. 10. Copy, model, pattern, exem^J^e is masculine. Ex. — His master gives him new copies, son maUre ltd donne de nou- veaux exemples. It has been used by some grammarians in the feminine. 11. Thunder, lightning, foudre is feminine when meaning the fire of heaven. Ex.— He was struck by lightning, il fut frappe de la foudre. It is masculine sometimes in poetry. It is also masculine in speaking of a great general, a great prince. Ex. — He is a great warrior, C' est un foudre de guerre. SYNTAX OP NOUN — GENDER OP NOUN. V6\> Amour is lid almost — Ardemt, ^e, les j)re- of Cupid. es amours ; les amours. y, is both )lo. inglo word I will give ; donnerai. er may be lich I have the same pie iVmifs ; masculine Ex. —A ouple, un relies. -It is his Sometimes Ex.— It freat, c^est II of both ant; your 5 gate. It ifers in an lild, ecou' nasculine, ' : All my Ex.— His >ce de nou~ ans in the I meaning ing, iifut n poetry. 1, a great de guerre. 12. Hymn, hymnc is masculine when it means a sacred Bonr' Ex. —Lord, what liynins are W(n-thy of tlieo, Setgncur, quels hymncs sont dhfues de toi ; a national hymn, un h>imne national. It is employed in the feminine in speaking of tlio hymns sung in church. Ex.— To sing a hymn, ckanter unc '^^IS.'^Work, ceuvre is usually feminine. Ex.— The work» of God, les Kuvres de Dieu. When meaning musical works or a collection of engravings it is masculine. Ex.-riie second work of this musician, h second (Bittve de ce musicien. 14. Barley, orqe is feminine. Ex.— Fine barley, de belle orge. It is lasculine in the two follov, ing expressions : Pearl barley, orge perli ; milled barley, orge monde. 15. Organ, orgue is masculine in the sing. Ex.— A good organ, un ban orgue. In the plural it is feminine. Ex.— Ihe organ of Strasbourg is renowned, les orgues de Strasbourg sont renommies. . . -e ii i 16. Period, phiode is feminine when it signifies the revolu- tion of a star, the periodical return of a disease, etc. Ex.— The lunar period, la per lode lunaire. Penode la mas- culine, when meaning the highest that can bo attained. Ex.— Cicero carried eloquence to its highest point, ticeron a porte Veloquence a son plus haut periode. Vocabulary. To compare, Comparer. to cut through, sillonner, 11, liq. furrow, sillon, m. , 11, liq. guerre. f. war, fabulous, fabuleux-se. anger, emportement, m. regret, regret, ra. ear of wheat, Spl, m. sickle, idle, unoccu- pied, imprinted, heart, deeply, to fall in love, to break, to finish, idleness, faucille^ f. desoeuvre. empreint. coeur. profondement. s^amouracher. casser. achever. paresse. To cast, to throw, look, to resist. ( Lancer. r^-gard, m. risister. to overthrow, renverser. to set on fire, incendier. eloquence, eloquence, f. ( planer. disputer to hover, to soar, to quarrel, limits, to deduct, wages, knave, to relate, sent, writing, balm, limites, f. pi. rahattre. gages, m. pi. fripon. rapporter, envuye. ^criture, f. baume, m. i I HO Incense, betrothal, manners, to blind, yov.ng, PECULIARITIES OF CERTAIN NOUNS. Encens. Jian^ailles, 11, liq. moenrs, f. pi. aveugler. petit, m. he enjoyed it, il en ajoui. fly, mouchc, f. Funeral, materials, lament, bandage, sincere. FunkrailhSy ^ 11, liq. materiaux. doleances. haiidcaUy m. reel. in a low tone, tout has. EXERCISE I. 1. Chbro enfant, disait une m^re h safille, sans toiiln'ost pas de bonheur pour moi. 2. La f oudre sillonne les airs et frapjje les arbres les plus dlev^s. 3. Quelquefois la foudro renverse les Edifices sans les incendier. 4. Les cffets de la foudre sont terribles. 5. Alexandre utait un vrai foudre do guerre, Bos- suet au contraire e'tait un foudro d'eloquence. C. Get abb^ est I'aido dos cdr^monies. 7. Le lieutenant-general i\ deux on trois aides-de-camp. 8. L'aigle audacieux, planant au liaut des airs, dispute h, un autre aigle les limites do son vasto empire. 9. Plusieurs aigles furent i^rises par les Germains. 10. L'amour de la patrie est un sentiment i^rofond^ment em- preint dans le coeur de I'homme. 11. He'las ! il n'est point d'e'ternelles amours. 12. Nous avons eu un automno fort sec. 13. Quelquo chose que vous ayez promise donnez la. 14. S'il se casse quelque chose, je le rabattrai sur vos gages. 15 Une couple de pigeons ne sont pas assez pour diner. IG. Vous etes un couple de fripons. 17. Les deliccs du coeur sont plus touchantes que celles de Tesprit. ]8. Un bel ex- emple d'dcriture Anglaise. 19. Les historiens rapportcnt qu'une femme mourut de plaisir en entendant les orgues envoye'es h Pdpin. 20. On acheve en ce moment un bel orgue h, St. Denis. CHAPTER II. GENDER OF THE WORD GENS AND OF THE AD- JECTIVES WHICH ACCOMPANY IT— PECULIA- RITIES OF THE PLURAL OF CERTAIN NOUNS. 1. The adjective which follows the word gens is put in the masculine. Ex. — Vain and idle people, dcs gens valns et de- siKitvres. 2 The adjective which precedes the word gens is put in the ftminine. Ex. — They are excellent people, ce sont de bonnes gens. PE0I7LIA»ITIES OP CERTAIN NOUNS. 141 'ailleSj ll,liq. laux. cea. iUf m. as. n'ost pas it f rapi)e renverse idro sont re, Bos- ;^et abb^ [ r» deux b au liaut on vasto srmains. lent em- ist point nno fort nnez la. 58 gages. r diner, du coeur 1 bel ex- pportcnt 5 orguea ) iin bel IE AD- CULIA- s^OUNS. it in the 'ns et de- nt in the le buimcs 3. Sometimes it happens that the adjective is placed by in- version before the word gens ; in that case the adjective is put in the masculine. Ex.— Taught by experience, the old people are mistrustful, imtridts par I'expenence, les vieilles gre? s sont soupgonncHX. 4. When the word gms is immediately preceded by the adjectives tout, certain, tel, quel, etc., these must be put in the feminine. Such people, dc telles gens. 5. If these adjectives however do not precede immediately the word gens they are put in the masculine. Ex. —All those people, tons ces gens-la ; such are the people of the present day, tels sont les gens d'aujourd'hui. 6. When an adjective of both genders precedes the word gens; tout, certain, quels, tels, are put in the masculine. Ex. - All these clever people, tons ces hahiles gens ; what brave people, quels braves gens. 7. When an adjective of feminine termination precedes the word gens one must put tout, certain, etc. , in the feminine, Ex.— All kind people, toutes les bonnes gem; all the old people, toutes les vieilles gens. 8. If the word gens is followed by an adjective, the ad- jectives which precede are put in the masculine. Ex.— What lively people, quels gens gals ; what severe people, quels gens 9. The word gens is always masculine when followed by words which give it the sense of men. Ex. —Men of business, des gens d'affaires. 10. The nouns usually only employed in the singular are those which designate abstract beings or things, as : Justice^ honheur, faim, ^jaresse, or physical substance' , . s : Or, argent^ baume, encens. 11 The nouns usually only employed m the plural are those which give the idea of several distinct things expressed by a single word, such as : Funkailles, moeurs, fiangadles, doleances. 12. Words naturally invariable, such as : Adverbs, con* junctions, etc., employed substantively do not take the mark of the plural. Ex.— Three onos in succession, trois un de 13. AUul in the sense of ancestors makes a'ieux. It be- comes aieuls however when meaning the paternal and mater- nal grandfathers. 142 FEOULIABITTES OF OBRTAIN NOTWa. 14. Garlic, ail makes aulx in the plural. Botanists how- ever prefer aih. 15. Heaven, del in the common acceptation makes deux in the i)lural. It is the same in the sense of temperature or climate. (Some grammarians say dels in this sense.) When, liowever, it is used in a figurative sense to designate a picture, the tester of a bed, etc., it makes dels. E.v, — This artist is clever in painting skies, cet artiste fait hien les dels. 16. Eye, idl makes yeux in the plural. Ex. — The ban- dage of error blinds all eyes, le bandeau de Verreur aveugle tons les yenx, but we say, in speaking of precious stones, des ceils de serpent ; oval windows, cdls de bmuf. 17. Work, travail taken in the general acceptation makes travaux, but it makes travails in the following cases : 1st. Brakes (for shoeing vicious horses.) 2nd. Reports of Ministers to the King. 18. Plural of proper nouns. — Proper nouns do not usually take the mark of the plural. Ex. — The two Corneilles. les deux Corneilk ; the two Racines, les deux Racine. 19. The mark of the plural is also omitted although the noun bo preceded by the plural article. Ex. - Moli^re, Boi- leau, Voltaire are celebrated men, les Molikre, les BoileaUf le^ Voltaire sont des hommes eeUbres. 20. The names of Dynasties, of certain families take the sign of the phiral ; les Stuarts, les Tarquins. Proper nouns also take the mark of the plural when used as common nouns to indicate comparisons. Ex. — All lawyers are not like Cicero, tons les avocats ne sont pas des Cicerons. 21. Titles of Books do not take the mark of the plural ; I have two Miltons in my library, fai deux Milton dans ma hibliotJieque. 22 . Proper names representing coins take the mark of the plural : Four Napoleons, quatre NapoUons. Vocabulary, To correct, Corriger. youth. jeunessey f. lukewarmness, tiedeiir, f. to Confess, confesser. to study, etudier. to trample un- der foot fouler aiix pieda. To spread, ) t>« j toscitter, r^i'^^^^^- to settle, }^^^^i^^^ to unravel, ) human j kind, > genre humain. race, i PECULIARITIES OP CERTArN" NOFNS. 143 Lsts how- kes deux raturo or When, k picture, artist is 'he ban- r aveugle Dnc3, dea n. makes b usually jillesj les >ugh the ^re, Boi- BoileaUf take the 3r nouns )n nouns lot like 3 plural ; daiis ma k of tha ^dre. er. humain. Affecting, movinj;, > Touchant To assist, hard labor, A saister. travaux forces. to interest one's lately, dernUrement. self, sHnUresser. pupil. 6Uve. to close the eye, fermer I'ceil. to raise, elever. to pursue. poursulvre. to wear, porter. to abandon. dekiiaser. justice. justice, f. to be quite \ peasant. campagnard, plain, ' sauter aux yeux. townsman, citadin. self evident. to awaken. reoeillerj drowsiness, assonpissement. to share, partager. balm. haume, m. to conquer, conquei'ir. glory, gloire, f. blood. san;/, m. to bring, apporter. treasure, tresor, m. calculation. calcul, m« is frozen, se glacer. to provide one's light. leger. self witii, 86 munir de. formerly, autrefois. to dream, river. EXERCISE II. 1. Nous ddtestons les gens, tantot rouges, tantot blancs. 2. Certaines gens democrates k la cour reviennent aristocrates k la ville. 3. Que pouvez-vous avoir il demeler avec de telles ge)ia. 4. Quels sent les gens que vous frequentez. 5. II faut savoir s'accommoder de tcmtes gens. 6. Les vrais gens de lettres et les vrais philosophes out beaucoup m6rite du genre humain. 7. Parler et offenser, pour de certaines gens est precise uient la meme chose. 8. Ce sont les meilleures gens du moiide. 9. J 'ai assist^ derni^rement aux f undrailles d'une de mes jeunes 61feves. 10 La justice est la premiere des vertus. 11. La faim poursuit le campagnard et delaisse le citadin. 12, La gloire pent reveiller quelque fois dans les grands I'assoupissement de la paresse. 13. Cette nou- velle fut un baume pour moi. 14. Depuis la revolution les fian9ailles ont cesse d'avoir un caract^re legal 15. Ses deux aieuls assistaient k son mariage. 16. Ce peintre fait bien lea ciels. 17. Je voudrais partager avec vous la gloire de vos travaux. 18. C'est alors qu'ecrivaient les Moliere, les La Fontaine, les Racine, les Boileau. 19. Lorsque Auguste eut conquis I'Egypte il apporta k Rome le tresor des Ptolo- mi^e. 20, Corii qui ont .uvrp.,* des chcfs= d^oiuwe; a jet of water, un jat-d^eau, des jets-d^cau. foreign nouns and compound nouns. 145 Exceptions. An absurd atorv ^ un coq-&-Vdne; An absura story ^ ^^^ coq-d-Vdne. A country Dox i j '^ • ; - . ^ •^ ( aes pied-a-tevre. A private interview J ^^^ n the con- ied by an ARTICLE AFTER COLLECTIVES — ARTICLE REPEATED. 151 adjective. Ex.— In milk, dansdu lait; with money, avecde V argent ; with good intentions, avcc de bonnes intodions. 5. The proposition sans however must be excepted, as being ex'^Uisive and giving a negative sense to the sentence. Ex.— Without gold, without flour, sans or, sansfarine. 6. When a noun, complement of an adjective, or an adverb, 01 an Midirect regimen of the verb, is employed in a vague iv.Jeterminate sense, the article is omitted. Ex.— The earth was strewn with flowers, la terre etait jonchee de fleurs ; a man covered with blood, un homme convert de sang. The noun on the contrary requires the article if employed ma detcDuinate sense. Ex.— The earth was strewn with the floweis which had been gathered in the morning, la terre etait jovchee des Jieurs qu^on avdt cueillles le matin ; a man coverea with the blood of his enemy, un homme convert die sang de son ennemi. 7. The article is usually repeated before all nouns employed in a determinate sense, when the first noun is preceded by the article. Ex.— Girls and boys,^ les filles et les gargons ; the father and mother, le pere et la mere. 8. When anoim is preceded or followed by several adjec- tives connected by the conjunction et, the article is not re- peated if the two adjectives qualify the same noun. Ex.— The simple and sublime La Fontaine, le simple et sublime La Fontaine; the good and faithful poodle, le ban et Jidele ca- 9. If on the contrary one wishes to determine several nouns, that is to say, if the adjectives express opposite qualities, the article must be repeated before each one of the adjectives. Ex. —Good and bad advice, les bans et les mauvais conseils ; the large and the small spaniel, le grand et le petit epagneul. (Note well that the three preceding rules apply equally to un, mie, m,on, ma, mes, ton, ta, tes, cette, ce, etc., etc._ 10. Before the adverbs plus, m.ienx, moins, the article le, la, les is used if one wishes to express a comparison. Ex. — She is the happiest woman in the world, c'est la femme la plus heureuse du monde ; the least rapid waters are_ the least healthy, les eaux les mains rapides sont les mains saines. 11. Le, however, is invariable when not expressing a com- parison between other persons or other things, but only inti- mating that the quality is carried to its highest degree. The articleJfi. forms then an adverbial expression with^jZns, mieu^, moi7is. Ex.— That is the person whom I have loved the n a 'I' i 152 AltTICLE AFTEK COLLECTIVES —ARTICLE REPEATED. most, c'cst lajnrsonne quefai le plus aim 6c ; she is the one who works tho best, c'est celle qui travaUle le mieux. 12. Le plus, le mieux, le moius, are always invariable when relating to a verb or an adverb, because then they form an ad- verbial locution. Ex.— Racijjc and Boileau are tho poets who write the best, who express themselves in the mostnoblo manner, Racine et Boileau sont lespoetes quiecrivcnt le mieux, qui s'expnm>e7it le plus noblement. Vocabulary. To destroy, is sufficient, to adorn, performed, waist-band, miracles, scarf. taste, . to taste, to club to- gether, charms, accomplish- ments, hope, reason, to vegetate, harrassed, remorse, prejudices, to exhaust. Detruire. suffit. orner. out fait. ceinture. miracles. ecluirpe. goiltf m. gouter. se cotiser. agrimetits. arts (Tagre- ment. espoir, m. esperauce, f. raisou. tegeter. huurrele. remords, m. pi. prejuges, m. pi. Tru e. sorcerer, sorceress, enjoyment, to look at, aspect, basis, to crush, nose, to incline, incur, censure, bond, tie, knot, Veritable, sorcier. sorcihe. juuissance f. envisager. point de vue, m. base, L ecraser. nez, m. porter. CHCourir. animadversion. noeud, m. to drag along, enti ainer. torrent, torrent, m. calf, veal, veau. valued at ioalue d. to establish, etablir. to surround, environnt de. to remain, demeurer. to draw. ( ,,. < attirer. wiis. to attract, united. epui^er. to be taken for, passer pour. it only depends, il ne tient qu'd. spirits, les esprits. EXERCISE V. 1. L'ambition qui s'etablit par des crimes se detruit. 2. Souvent les plus stiipides passent pour des sages. 3. On orne sa chevelure de fleurs ou de rubans ; on choisit pour sa toilette la plus jolie ceinture, I'echarpe la plus elegante ; le gout, I'imagination, la fortune se cotisent pour aiouter aux agrements exterieurs : ii lie tient qu'^ pour aj outer nous de parer aussi FED. PECULIARITY OP SOME ADJECTIVEa. 153 is the one able when •nil an ad- tho poets nost noblo t k mieux, able, r. re. ance f. ger. de vuBf m. f. r. L. • '•ir. idversion, ra. ner. t, m. d. mi^ de. rer. detniit. . 3. On t pour sa ;ante ; le 'Uter aux cer au8si notre Amede bonnes actions on do bons sentiments. 4, L'etudo nous procure la compagnio des gens de bien et beaucoup d'aniis. 5. Le courage a plus de ressources contro les dis- graces que la raison. 6. Que d'hommes, comnie les plantes, vegiitent ou out ve^ele sur cetto terro ! 7. Des coupables bouiTeles do reniords out imagine I'ath^isme. 8. Envir< )nne3 d'une foulo do piejiigea, nous onvisageons rarement les choses sous leur veritable point do vuo. 9. L'amour pour son pero et sa mere est la base de toutes les vertus. 10. Les grandes et fortes pensecs viennent du coeur. 11. Si presquo tons les negres sont camus c'est, dit on, parceque les peres et los mferes ecrasent le nez h lours enfants. 12. Le but des pliilosophes anciens et des modernes est do porter les hommes ii la vertu. 13. Nous vous oflfrirons les fleurs qui vous sont le plus agre- ables. 14. On doit peu compter sur ceux-meines (ju'on a le mieux servis. 15. Si vous no vous acquittez pas de la dotte immense que votre enfance a contractee avec votre pere et Votre mere, vous encourrez I'animadveision de tons ceux qui sont honnetes parmi les peres, les meres et les enfants. 16. La possession des faux biens du monde ne pent procurer qu'une fausse et trompeuse felicite. 17. La bonte et la puis- sance de Dieu sont intinies. 18. Le torrent entraine par sa rapidite les moissons, les granges, les etables et les troupeaux. 19. Ila croient que les sorciers et les sorcieres ont le pouvoir d'attirer les esprits. 20. Les jouissances les filua doucea sont celles qui n'epuisent pas I'esperance. CHAPTER YI. ON THE ADJECTIVES— AGREEMENT OF THE AD- JECTIVES—ON THE PECULIARITY OF SOME ADJECTIVES. 1. The adjective agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it relates and which it qualifies. Ex.---Reli- gious doctrines, des doctrines rellgieiises ; simplicity is ^ the mark of a fine soul, la simpliciie est la marque d'une belle dme. 2. When an adjective is preceded or followed by several nouns of the same gender, it is put in the plural and in the same gender as the nouns Avhich it qualifies. Ex. — A new cloak and coat, un manicmi ci un habit naufs; a new dress ■ IP ■ 154 I! PECULIARITY OF SOME ADJECTIVE!!!. and pelisse,* une robe ft une pelisse neuves ; the hill and the valley are shaded, la colUne et la vallee sunt ombragees. 3. The adjective which relates to several nouns of different genders is jjut in the masculine plural. Ex.— Rooms and apartments furnished, des appartements et des chawbtes meubles; a boy and girl well brought up, un gar con et une fille Men eleves. 4. When the adjective which qualifies two nouns is of dif- ferent genders and has a particular termination for each gender, as : blanc, blanche, ouvert, ouverte, epais, epaisse, the mascu- line noun generally must be placed last. Ex.— an astonisli- ing skill and courage, uve habilite et un courage ctonnants. One could very well however, say : an embroidered veil and dress, un voile et une robe brodes. As the rule of euphony would not be affected by it. 5. The adjective relating to several nouns agrees with the last. IsUy.— When nouns have almost the same meaning : an astonishing courage and moderation, un courage et une moderation etonnante. 2ndly.— Every time that there is certain gradation in the words : the steel, the band, the flame is quite ready, lefer, le bandeau, lajiamme est touteprete. 6. Adjectives taken adverbially are always invariable. Thus one writes : these books are dear, ces Uvres content cher ; these violets smell nice, ces violettes sentent bon ; his hair has been cut too short, on lui a coupe les cheveux trop court. 7. The adjectives firm and small, ferme, menu, employed adverbially remain invariable. We kept our ground firmly, oious nous tenio7i,s ferme. 8. In compound adjectives, if the 1st adjective is em- ployed adverbially, it is invariable. Ex.— Lightly and shortly clad, leciere et court-vetue. We must except : newly- gathered, fraiches-cneillies ; newly-hatched, fraiches-ecloses. LIST OP A FEW PECULIAR COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. Eng. Free-mason, still-born, deaf and dum^, bitter-sweet, all powerful^ first-born, dead-drunk, newly-born smg. Masc. sing. Masc. plu. Fem. „. Franc-magon, Francs-magons, Franc-magonne. mort-ne, morts-ties, mort-nee. jurd-muet, sourds-muets, sourdc-mnette. Igre-doux, aigre-doux, aigre-douce. tout-puissant, tout-puissants, toute-puissante. premier-ne, ivre-mort, nouveau-ne. premiers-nes, ivres-morts, nouveau-nes. ivre-morte. PECULIARITY OF SOME ADJECTIVES. 165 1 and the 'es. cliiferent )oms and chawbies on et une is of dif- ih gender, le mascu- astonisli- tonnaiits. veil and euphony with the neaning : ge et une there is )and, the ute prete. ivariable. tent cher ; hair has urt. smployed d firmly, J is em- itly and : newly- ecloses. 'ES. sing. nagonne. 'e. nnette. mce. dssante. He. 9. When two nouns, united by the preposition de, ziq fol- lowed by an adjective, this adjective agrees with the one of the nouns which it qualities. Ex.— Dresses of linen whiter than snow, des robes de I'm plus blanches que la neige; a hundred horses covered with skins of black foxes, cent chevaux converts de peaux de renards noirs. 10. The adjectives nu and demi are invariable when they precede the noun. Ex. — Half an hour, une deml-heiire ; he is bare headed, il est nu-tete. I'hey agree when they are placed after the noun. Ex.— An hour and a half, une heure et demie ; the head bare, la tete nue. The word demie only takes the mark of the phwal when it is employed as a noun. Ex. This clock strikes the half -hours, cette horloge sonne les 11. The adjective late, /ew, remains invariable when it is placed before the article or the words un, une, man, ton, n, ce, cette, etc. Ex. — Your late aunt often saw the late Queen, feic votre tante voyait souvent feu la reine. It agrees however when it is placed after the article or the possessive adjectives mo7i, ton, son, etc. Ex.— The late Queen, la feue reine; your late aunt, voire feue tante. YOCABULARY. Gestures, strait, fish, nests, marvellous, superior, good nature, ati'ability, to reserve, bramble, brier, juniper tree, moss, verdure, will, interest, envy, faults, at variahce, anuisements, Scotchmen, Gestes. detroit, m. poisson, m. 7iids, ni. pi. merveilleux. supiiieur. bonhomie,* f. affabilite, f. reserver. ronce, f. ge)uevre, m. mousse, f. verdure, f. volonte, f. interet, m. envie, f. defauts, m. pi. brouille. divertissements. J^cossais, Neck, designs, flock, food, barrel, upright, to accustom, skin, genet, to avoid, pink (bot.), savage, health, to act, fatal, to build, Lapland, Scotland, leg, liam. Cow, m. desseins, m. pi. tro'upeau, m. nourriture, f. to'uneaUf m. droit, habituer. peau, f. genette, f. it) iter. ceillet. sauvage, m. sanie, f. agir. funeste. coHstruire. La Laponie. L'Ecosse. jambe, f. jambon, m. I '-11 r 156 on CERTAIN NUMERALS. EXERCISE VI. 1. Les singes font des grimaces et des gestes extravagants. 2. Les habitants du detroit de Davis mangent leur viande et leur poisson crus. 3. Les oiseaux construisent leurs nids avee une industrie, im art merveilleux. 4. Philippe montra partout une prudence et un courage superieurs k son age. 5. La vraie niodestie a une bonhomie et un naturel inimi- table. 6. Le grand Conde etait d'une bonte, d'une afFabilite charmante. 7. C'est au merite et h la vertu seule que de- yraient etre reserves les dignites et les honneurs. 8. Dans la Laponie, la ronce, le genievre et la mousse font seuls la verdure de I'e'te. 9. Dieu et sa seule volonte rendent toutes les choses agreables, 10. La veritable gloire et le veritable mteret sont cunnus de bien peu de gens. 11. La flatterie et 1 envie sont inseparables de la grande fortune. 12. Alexandre et Cesar etaient grands et incomparables ; mais ils avaient de grands defauts qu'il faut pardonner k leur merite extraordi- naire. 13. .l,a raison et la verite sont rarement brouillees ensemble. 14. La vertu et le merite ne sont attaches ni h I'habic ni h la condition, ni au pays. 15. La nourriture, le repos _et^ les divertissements sont egalement necessaires. J 6. Diogene marchait nu-pieds et couchait dans un tonneau.* 17. La peau d'hermine sent tres mauvais. 18. La rose, la violette et I'oeillet sont odorants, ces fleurs scntent bon. 19. Les sauvages, qui vont presque nus, sont d'une sant6 vigoareuse. 20. Les Ecossais sont habitues k aller nu-jajnbes. CHAPTER VII. ON THE NUMERALS 20, 100, 1000, AND THE INDE- FINITE ADJECTIVES MEM£, TOUT. ixn' '^^^^^y? ^"^?^' ^''^^^^ 8- hundred, are invariable. Istly.— When they only indicate twenty or a hundred units. •Ex.— Twenty centimes, vinyt centimes ; one hundred francs, cent francs. 2ndly.— When they are preceded by a number and followed by another. Ex. —Eighty-four years, quatre- mnyt-quatre ans ; two hundred and nineteen sheep, deux cent mx-neuf moutons. 2. Vingt and cent are variable when they are multiplied and not followed by any other number. Ex.— Eighty years, to take place, extent, railway, of income, threats, punishments, firmness, to abolish, frightful, SAveat, perspiration, to follow, since, at most, nearly, to worship, marble, Proclamer. arrlver. etendne, f. chemhi defer,m. de rente. menaces, f. pi. snppUces,m.. pi. fenneU, f. abol'ir. affreux-se. I sueur, f . suivre. depnis. cm plus. a peu-pres. adorer, marbre, m. To fly away, wings, clothing, to change, worship, antiquity, forest, dryness, valour, proud, breathless, roughness, to listen, territory, extent, more than, to take place, petrifaction. stone, pierre, f. EXERCISE VII. S'envoler. ailcs, f. vetcments,m.-pl. aliercr. culte, m. anclenncte^ f, forct, i. secJieresse, f. vaillance, f. altler-e. haletaut-e. rudesse, f. ecoiiter. territoire, m. etendne, f. au dela de. operer. petrification^ f . 1. Depiiis quatre-vingts ans, de tout le voisinage on venait ^couter et smvre ses avis. 2. Pour Ics honorai?es qui m'e- taient dus et que je n'avais pas demanded, on m'apporta chez moi douze cents francs. 3. Vers I'an douze cents do notre ere, A exis fit crever les yeux h pnn fr^ro, et s'empara du trone de Constantinople. 4. On a millo remkles pour con- soler iin honnete liomme et pour adoucir son malheur. 6. On pretend que le territoire de Rome ne comprenait au plus que cmq ou six milles d'etendue. 6. On fait par le chemin de fer a peu pres trente milles a I'heure. 7. L'homme ne vit pas aujourd'hui au del>b de quatre vingts ans, il vivait autrefois plus de trois cents ans. 8. L'an deux mille de la creation. \). Les menaces, les supplices, les tortures meme n abattirent jamais la fermete d'Eleazar. 10. Tout se passe t les plaisirs, les douleurs meme s'envolent sur les ailes du temps. 11 lout chanrjco, dans la France ; les vetementa meme s'altererent. 12. Ses ancicns disciples, ses amis, ses enncmi. r.icino venaient I'cntcndro. 13. La foret lui jmrut toat enflammco. 14. La terre est toato fendue pendant une longue scclicresse. 15. Les n^^ressos aimciit les robes toutcs blanches IG, Tonte grande qu'etait h vaillance des Ro- mamo, cJlo c-taafc moma bouillante que cello des Gaulois qui ON THE ADJECTIVES. 159 nvoler. es, f. inents,ni.-^l. erer. te, m. rleiiuete^ f. H, f. teresse, f. llmicej f. er-e. daut-e. 'esse, f. ite7'. ■itoire, m. 'due, f. rer. 'ificaiion, f . } on venait 3S qui m'e- >porta cliez s do notre impara du pour con- malheur. prenait au ^it par le L'homme 3, il vivait lille de la res meme ' se passe ! } ailes du i^etementa amis, ses lui parut idant IT no bes toutc« dcs Eo- iiilois qui se faisaient gloire de combattre demi-nus. 17. Nous sommes si presoniptueux que nous voudrions etre connus de toute la terro et meme des gens qui viendront quand nous ne serons plus. 18. Les animaux, les plantes, les le'gumes meme etaient adores en Egypte. 19. Cette femme est la faussete meme. 20. C'est dans la mer meme que s'est ope'ree la petrification des marbres el des pierrea. CHAPTER YIII. ON THE ADJECTIVES QUELQUE, QUEL QUE— USE OF ClIAQUE, CHACUN,NUL, AUCUN, iiON, SA, SES, LEUB, Etc., Etc. 1. Quelque, the difficulties sometimes experienced in writ- ing this word arise from the fact that the nature of it is not well considered. It is used in three different ways. 2. As an indefinite adjective, meaning some, it is written in one word and agrees with the noun following: a few friends have spoken about that, quelqnes amis ontparle de cela. 3. Quelque means whatever, when it has que before the suc- ceeding verb. Ex. — Whatever friends you may have, quelques amis quevuus ayez. 4. When quelque is used for " to what degree," it is an adverb, and therefore invariable. Ex.— However learned these men may be, quelque savants que soieut ces hommes. 5. When quelque is followed by the verb to be, it is written in two words, and quel agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb : whatever may be your eflforts, quels que soient vos efforts ; whatever may be your riches, quelles que soieut vos richesses. C. Each, every, chaque must always be followed by a noun, and has no plural. Ex.— Every country has its customs, chaque pays a ses coutumes ; sufficient to the day is the evil thereof, cl chaque jour suffit sa peine. Chacun on the con- trary is used without the noun following it. Ex.— These books cost six francs each, ces Uvres content six francs chacun. 7. Nul and aucun are usually employed in the singular. Ex.— No good without evil, nul hien sans mat ; no pleasure without alloy, nul plaisir sans mtlange; no path of flowers leads to glory, aucun chemiu de jieurs ne conduit a la gloire. However°?uti and aucxm take the plural when before nouns ■:K! 160 ON THE ADJECTIVES. without singular. Ex. — He obtained what he demanded without any expense, il a ohtenu sans aucunsfrais ce qn'il demaiidait. 8. The idea of possession, attributed to an inanimate thing, may be rendered by the adjectives son, sa, ses, when the noun representing the possessive is expressed in the same proposition. Ex. — Each country has its laws, chaque pays a ses lots ; your house has its comforts, voire maison a ses agrements ; every thing has its usefulness, chaque chose a so')i ntUltc, etc. , etc. 9. But when it is not so expressed the idea of ownership or possession must be conveyed in some other way. En is generally m&de use of for this purpose. Ex. — This house is beautiful, but I am afraid of the neighborhood, cette maison bst belle, fen crains levoinnage, and not je crainsson voisinage. 10. In speaking of a part of the body one says with the article only. Ex. — My head aches, fai mat d la tete ; open your mouth, onvrez la homhn ; the bath will strengthen your chest, le bain vous fortijiera la poitrine. VOCABULART. Occupied, busy, worthily, weak, to persuade, elephant, elevated, witty, to win, laurels, scourge, resignation, to boast, mercy, gifted, to borrow, the want of, to got angry, to govern, governor, governess, [ Occupe. dignement. faible. persuader. elephant. eleve. spirituel. remporter. lauiiers,TCi.-pl. fleau, m. resignation, f. se glorijier. miaericorde, f. doiie. emprunter. le dcfaut. se father. gouvcrner. gouvcrneur. gGUAiernanie. Kindness, honest, exile, to excite, enlightened, with regard to him, to testify, to warm, bosom, heart, end, consequence, poverty, thigh, to break, mouth, to cork, cork, cork-screw, v.ase. honte, f. integre. exit, m. exciter, edaire. . d son egard. temoigner. rechauffer. sem, m. suite , f . pauvrete, f. cuisse, f. casser. houche, f. houcher, hoiichon, :^n. tire-bouchon, m. 'nase. m. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 161 demanded is ce qii'il late thing, when the the same laque pays dson a ses m chose a ownership ly. En is s house 13 tte maison voishiage. s with the tete ; open ;then your na. r. egard. yner. m. f. ete, f. , f. 8, f. er. mchon, m. m. EXERCISE VTII. 1. Quclques ecrivains ont traits ce sujet. 2. Quelques crimes prdcbdent tou jours les grands crimes. 3. Quelque faibles que soient Ics princes, ils ne sont jamais si gouvem^s que Ton pense. 4. Quelque grands que f ussent les generaux, tout intfegres, tout habiles qu'ils dtaient, I'exil etait souvent leur lecompense. 5. Quelle que soit votre misfere, quels quo soient vos chagrins, supportez les avec resignation. 6. Quels que soient vos talents, quelies que soient vos richesses, quelle que soit votre consideration dans le monde, gardez-vous do vous glorifier de ces avantages. 7. Quelle que soit la bonte de Dieu, quelle que soit sa cldraence, craignons d'abuser uc sa misericorde. 8. Quelques services que vous rendiez k un ingrat, quelqiie bontc que vous 'ui temoigniez, c'est un serpent que vous leohauffez dans votr : sein. 9. De quelques superbes distinctions que se flattent les hommes, ils ont tons lameme origine. 10, Quelque corrompues que soient ncs moeurs, le vice n'a pas encore pour nous perdu toute sa honte. 11. Paris est superbe, les etrangers en admirent les batiments. 12. Pourquoi craindre la mort, si Fon a assez bien veju pour ne pas craindre ses suites. 13. Plus le peril est grand, plus doux en est le fruit. 14. Si la pauvrete' est la m^re des crimes, le defaut d'esprit en est le pere. 15. L'esprit est la fleur de I'imagination, le jugement en est le fruit. 16. Cas- sius porta en memo temps un coup dans le visage du soldat et Brutus lui per9a la cuisse. 17. Ces vases content dix francs chacun. 18. Chacun est maitre chez soi. 19. Chaque homme s'instruit par eccj disgraces. 20. En ce bas monde, 11 n'eat nula biens parfaits. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 2nd SERIES, liemarh- 'The following exercises are to be written in French and afterwards said orally. EXERCISE I. SYNTAX OF THE NOUN— GENDER OF SEVERAL NOUNS. (Sec Chapter I, page 137, Syntax.) 1. I need an assistant in my olRce. 2. A surgeon's assis- tant who u attentive is sure to succeed. 3. I have sent fof k 162 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. ;l. i a nurse, my dear child is very ill. 4. The eagle attacks with intrepidity birds much larger than himself. 6. Theso eaf^Iea are attached to their young. G. Several imperial ea^lea were captured.^ 7. Maternal love is the only love which is sincere. 8. He ordered this hajjpy people to love him with an eternal love. 9. Who can forget his first love? (f. plu.) 10. The autumn has been beautiful and dry. 11. A cold and rainy autumn. ( f. ) If:. Whatever thing you may have promised, give it. 13, A fool may throw a couple of guineas (louiti) in the sea and say that he ci.Vyed it. 14. That evening a happy couple spoke in a low tone of love and eternal passfon. 15. What delight to do good (sirg.). IC. It is a, delight to make people happy (de faire ucs heureux). 17. Fervent prayers appease God and take the thunderbolt from his hands. 18. This man is a great hero (foadre). 19. Happy people seldom correct themselves. 20. The organ ia composed of several pipes. , EXERCISE II. GENDER OF THE WORD GENS AND OF THE AD- JECTIVES WHICH ACCOMPANY IT— PECULIA- RITIES OF THE PLURAL OF CERTAIN NOUNS. (See Chapter II, page 140. Syntax.) ]. Avoid the company of those men, they are very dange- Jrous persons (gens). 2. What can you have to do with auch people ((lens) ? 3. They are the best people (r/ens) in the world. 4. All kind people will agree (seront d^accord) with you. 6. I was present at the funeral of one of my pupils yester- day, she was clever and amiable. 6. The great ought to reform public manners (mceurs), and they corrupt them. 7. He who is brave needs no ancestors. 8. I was well ac- quainted with your grand-fathers. 9. This artist has gained (a remporte) a medal, he is clever in paintin^r skies. 10. The ministers have submitted (soumis) their reports to the king. 11. The two Corneilles and the two Racines have left many masterpieces. 12. The skies teach the earth to revere their author. 13. Just heaven ! all my blood is frozen in my veins. 14. That man was condemned to twenty years' hard labor. 15. That gentleman is the director of public works. JG. I could not close my eyes, I dreamt of the dress I was going to wear. 17. Poor soldier I shall see France again, the hand of a son will close mine (the) eyes. 18. That is quite plain {sauter aux yeux). ly. That news was a ^eat comfort (h aiime) BE01PITX7LATORY EXBRCTSBS. 163 attacks with to mo. 20. Have you ever read the history of the Stuarts by Chateaubriand. EXERCISE ni. ON TEE PLURAL OF NOUNS OBTAINED FROM FOREIGN LANGUAGES— ON THE PLURAL 05 COMPOUND NOUNS. (See Chapter III, page 144, Syntax.) 1. There are people who have a certain mania for albums. 2. The English are very fond of beefsteaks. 3. His speech was followed with great applause (hravos). 4. In Spain as ai Rome, the inquisition will be abolished, and the frightful spectacles of the autos-da-fe will not be renewed. 5. The dilettanti meet at the opera. 6. Come with me, I shall have the pleasure of being your Cicerone. 7. The king has bequeathed one hundred pounds to two hundred Hotels-Dieu. 8. Persons who are gap-toothed do not speak very distinctly. 9. These masterpieces of art, these prodigies of industry, what are they in comparison with the blessings which nature lavishes upon him. 10. Most people now and then relate absurd stories. 11. Those who disturb tiresome private in- terviews are always welcome. 12. Humming-birds are the jewels of nature. 13. Signatures on white paper are perfidious weapons in the hands of a knave. 14. The orders of St. Louis and of the Legion of Honor have Grand Crosses. 15. Spain, at a certain epoch, had many viceroys in her colonies. 16. The Greeks have more than any other people excelled in the sculp- ture of bas-reliefs. 17. Travellers who are prudent provide themselves with passports. 18. Alarm clocks are useful for travellers. 19. Town talk does not disturb the wise man. 20. There are no towels in this room. EXERCISE IV. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. (Chapter IV, page 147, Syntax.) 1. The superior man sees at once the end, the obstacle and the best means of overcoming it. 2. The heart, mind, man- ners, everything improves by cultivation (gagne a la culture), 3. The man who is wise and prudent reHects before acting. 4. He is a man without talent. 5. England has the best form of government. 6. This is {voila) the servants' bed room. 7* X wi^th to have some mce window ciurttons for my drawiiig i f !i:l 164 EEOAPITtrLATORT EXBEOISES. room. 8. Do not jive him any money, he is too young. 9. The prudent man will always reflect before acting. JO. Eat some fruit, it will do you gooc' 11. ifou have a (tie la) for- tune but you have no pradenr, . 1? The festivals of the God of Israel should be observed witli solemnity. 13. I have a card table, it is true, but 1 have no cards — therefore you cannot play. 14. Man is mortal and has but a short time to live. 15. Mary bring a teapot full of boiling water. 16. The conduct of the Persian monarch;* was not alwavs very wise. 17. Give me some of the paper which i- in that drawer. 18. Ingratitude ought not to hinder us from doing good. 19. The soldier's son seems much alfected at the loss which he has just made. 20. Nature has not given thorns to rosea without reason. EXERCISE V. ON THE ARTICLE AFTER COLLECTIVES AND PRE- POSITIONS— REPETITION OF THE ARTICLE. (See Chapter V, page 150, Syntax.) 1. What is the use of so ^nany friends, one is sufficient if he loves us. 2. The first Saints perf oi ined many miracles. 3. Sully had around him a prodigious number of servants. 4, The wicked have great trouble in remaining united. 6. A great number of the persons whom I saw (vites) yesterday spoke well of you (ont dit du hien de vous). 6. The carpet was strewn with the flowers that the child had gathered in the morn- ing. 7. The greatest number of the inhabitants of Stras- bourg did not wish (ne vonlaient) to open their gates (partes) to the enemy. 8. One should commence {on devrait commencer) all lessons by a hymn addressed to the Divinity, and sung alternately (alternativement) in chorus by the girls and boys, 9. Until the age of seven, the child among the Spartans (chez les Spartes) was left to the care of the father and mother. 10. Young girls, learned and modest, will always be loved. 11. We must not judge (on ne doit pas juger) of the good or bad disposition of a person by the featureg of his face. 12. During my stay in Europe {pendant le sejour que je fais en Europe), I read the ancient and modem historians. 13. I should have lost my way without my good and faithful poodle. 14. Racine and Boileau are the poets who write the best, I like their works. 15. Great and powerful thoughts come from the heart, 16, The kindness and power of God iHflnitc. li. Doiu63tiQ tidid. Wild biTuA feud luUrll or be- CULC RECAriTULATORY EXERCISES. ie6 come the prey of carnivorous animals. 18. He liad taken as a model {it setait propose pour modele) the wise and iuiml)lo St. Augustine. 11). My little daughter looks well (tst tres hien), she has a new cloak and pelisse.* ^'0. 1 see now reviving {je vois revltre inaintenaid) the age of Augustus and the most polished and cultivated times of Greece. EXERCISE VI. ON THE ADJECTIVES — AGREEMENT OF THE AD- JECTIVES—ON THE PECULIARITY OF SOME ADJECTIVES. (Soe Chapter VI, page 153, Syntax.) 1. Weak minds (dmex) are cruel. 2. I like dry winters and moist summers. 3. A great man often comnii+s gi-eat faults. 4. Patience is inseparable from peace (de la paix), its amiable sister. 5. M) vengeance is lost uud my designs betrayed. 6. The hjsi sheep was preferred by the good shepherd to the rest of the f! .ck. 7. A way is always oj^en to repentance. 8. Her neck was whiter than snow. \). True religion ^s as to' rant as true i^hilosophy. 10. Thi i young girf imiti es the {est im'^f'itrice des) virtues of her mother. 11. Philip displayed every where a courage and prudence superior to his acje. 12. That young girl has an embroidered veil and dress. 13. Come my daughter, the steel, the band, the flame is quite ready. 14. Tl' actor plays with perfect taste and nobleness. 15. Ii Egypt the country girls (fejcnwes Jilles de la campagne) nave their arms and legs well formed. 16. I heard my late sister say that he daughter and myself were b< •rn the same year. IT. The plaa as well as the execu- tion of the work are due to him. 18. Accustom yor • chil- dren to gi bare-headed winter and summer, day and aight. 19. Yesterday at half -past ten o'clock, the king decln- .Ithat he married the princess of Poland. 20. One cannot govern a nation by half -measures. EXEPCIRE VII. ON THE NUMERALS 20, iOO, 1000, AND THE INDE- FINITE ADJECTIVES MEME, TOUT (See Chapter VII, page 156, Syntax.) 1. Fontenelle died at tli age of ninety years and six months {et demk). 2. The hist men lived {oit vegu) nine hundred, nine hundred and thirty and even nine hundred IGG RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. I! and sixty-nino years. 3. Charlemagne was crowned emperor of the West in the year 800. 4. Sparta needs three men to die, and they devote themselves. 5. At Marathon, ten thou- sand Greeks commanded by Miltiades, conquered a hundred thousand Persians. C. The first irruption of tlio C!auls took place {arriva) under the reign of Tarquin, in the year of the world three thousand four hundred and sixteen. 7. The army of Sesostris was comi)osed of six hundred thousand in- fantry (liommcs de pled), twenty four thousand horse and twenty-seven thousand chariots. 8. You must send me two hundred (subs. ) fagots to-morrow. 9. The same virtues which serve to found an empire also serve to preserve it. 10. All that men find in themselves is soiled {est sali) with the same mud (bone) of which they are fonned. 11. The people and the great have neither the same virtues nor the same vices. 12. From the time that Elizabeth had discovered the sadness of her parents, her thoughts were no longer the same. 13. We must not associate with the impious (les irrqnes), we must even avoid them as public plagues (pestes). 14. Even the children of that poor woman were at the fete. 15. The most precious of all gifts (dons) which wo can receive from heaven is a virtue pure and without blemish (tache). IG. The lion is all nervua and muscles {nerfs et muscles). 17. That young person is quite ashamed at having expressed herself as she did. 18. People whilst (tout en) smiling and playing some- times forget eternity. 19. It is the same with men as it is with the vilest animals, all may prove hurtful {peuvent nuire). 20. In vain do enlightened (eclairees) nations boast (se vauter) to have reunited among them all arts and all sciences. EXERCISE VIII. ON THE ADJECTIVES QUELQUE, QUEL .... QUE— USE OF CHAQUE, CHACUN, NUL, A UCUN, SON, SA, SES, LEUB, Etc., Etc. (3eo Chapter VIII, page 159, Syntax.) 1. Afewfriendshave spoken ofthis affair, it is a seriousthing. 2. A woman, whatever great wealth she brings into a house, soon ruins it if she introduces luxury (le luxe) there. 3. Some fruits and a few dishes, which the farm has produced, procure for us without expense a delectable repast. 4. However good our soldiers may be, they will not be able to resist their nuuierous enemies. 6. Inventors {inverUeurs) in every science SYNTAX OP THE PRONOUNS, THEIR. POSITION;. ler emperor e men to ten tliou- hundred luls took jar of the 7. The usand in- orso and .1 mo two les which 10. All the same e and the 10 vices. 3 sadness 10 same. pies), we Even the riie most a heaven The lion at young ilf as she tig some- 1 as it is i liuire). loast (se sciences. QUE— V, SON, us thing, a house, 3. Some procure lowever list their / science are the most worthy of praise for they open a career to other men. '.'). The agile butterlly with its briilant wing makes; loveto (t'oitrCisc) every Hower, caresses every plant. 7. Suffi- cient unto the day is the evil thereof. 8. Every age has its; humors, its tastes and its pleasures. 9. Every country, every degree of temperature has its particular plants., 1(». Every day. every hour brings me new uneasiness {inquie- tudes). 11. There is no good without evil. 12. No accident, disturbed (tnmbla) my journey. 13. Man finds nowhere his; happiness upon tlio earth. 14. A misfortune instructs better than any remonstrance. 15. No law is good unless it rests; (si tile ne puse) on the laws of nature. IG. One despises all those who have no virtue. 17. I am quite ill, my head, aches. 18, This medicine will strengthen your chest. 19. Ha has hurt my leg, 1 shall speak to his father, [End of the first 'part of the Recapitulatory Exercises of the. Second /Series.] CHAPTER TX". SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS, THEIR POSITION". 1. Pronouns as subjects are placed before the verb ; but in interrogative sentences they come after the verb to which, they are joined by a hyphen, Ex. —We ,have gained, noua avons gagne ; have we gained ? avons-mms gayne ? 2. Personal pronouns are also placed after the noun in ex- clamatory sentences with or without negation. Ex. — Why am I sad ? pourquoi sms-je triste ? ah ! what have I heard ? ah ! que viens-je d^ entendre f 3. They are placed also after the verb in sentences, such, as the following : Ex. —I wish, he said, to speak to you, je veux, d:t-il, vous parler ; It is sufficient, I said to him, c'est assez, lui disais-je, constructed with aussi, en vain, peut- etc. , the personal pronouns are often Ex. — Scarcely had I touched it, d. peine Vavais-je toihcle, etc. 5. There are verbs which, on account of the disagreeable sound which they produce, are not employed interrogatively in the first person of the present of the indicative. Thus, instead of saying dors-je, we Ba,j esi-ce-qae je dors, etc., etc. 4. In the sentences 6tre, a peine, comhien, placed after the ve- b. leS SYNTLAX OP TEGffi PRONOUlfS, TUBXft PQSiTlQIf. 6. A> verb, ending- with e mute iix tko first person, of. the; ^reaent: o£ the indicfitive and im.per£6ct of subjunctive', ttfcke<5j Am accent in tko iutcrrogaitive and. exolsijjmicivy sentcnQ/i«i, Eic — Do I speak ? pcmlerje ? sliould. I. die ? (lu,v. (jra,c& ; put liim in prison,. mfiite;irh erk pj-imvi.. 9. When a verb in the imperaitive has two pronouns for regim'^n*, the; one direct; the. otheir in.dire<2:t,, the direct; comes first.. Ex.,— Giv© it to- me',, dannsxrkr^mm ; lendi it to liim, pretez-U-iw.b„ 10. The pronoun me, joixLedL to the pironoun y is never plotce. After several nouns of different persons the personal pronoim subject of the following verbis usually repealed ^^-7^7 f^^^^^^r ^nd you are good friends, ton phrlltM vous etes de bans amis. ' ^ ^' Ja o^^^"" ^.r""^ ^'^' ^'''" *^^^^^* ^^g™^" a personal pronoun and a noun, the pronoun must be repeated. Ex -He w 3 see both my servant and myself, it Le verra.moi H mon iix.— ihat appeared true to me, and to every , ^, -"^^ "i^i^v^tvicLi tiuo to me, anc body, ce/a me parut vrai, d moi et a tout le monde 8. When a noun is followed by a participle no T^rnnnnr, must be put before the verb which follows^ Ex -!^?IShr seeing himself reduced to the last extremity, tried the fate of instad^7/f ?T^ ''"'^"'t ^",^ politeness one employs vous instead of tu, and nous instead of je or moi, in this case th« adjective or the participle which relates to one o these pro nouns IS always in the singular. Ex. -My son, you are but ht le Obliging, monfils, vous etes pen obligeLt. ' ^ come Hs't Ex ' m''''''!' *^'"'^ ^}'^ 1^^^«"^' ^P^^^ing should come last. Ex. —My sister, my 1 .rother, and myself shall set out, masc^ur, mon/rere, et moi nous ^^artirvns tcy.: PERSONAL PRONOUrS. 171 mna 11. The pronouns le, la, les, can only represent nouns or adjectives taken as nouns ; and they agree in gender and number witli those nouns or adjectives. Ex.— Are you the mother of that child I I am, etes-vous la mere de cet enfant ? je la suls; are you the ambassadors of France 1 we are, etes- vous les ambassadeurs de la France ? 7ious les sommes. 12. The pronoun le on the contrary is invariable every time it means cela ; it represents then adjectives, participles, or nouns taken adjectively. Ex.— If my sister is good, I am good also, si ma soiur est honne, je le suis aassl • gentlemen are you married ? we are, Messieurs, etes-vous maries '^ nous le sommes; they are not yet clever, but they will become so, Us ne sont pas encore hablles, mais Us le devlendront. 13. Le, la, les refer to inanimate things ; lui, elk, eux.. elles, to names of persons. Ex.— Is it my hat ? yes it is, est-ce mon chapeau, oui, cc Vest • is it your father ? yes, it is he, est-ce voire ph-e ? oui, e'est lui. It is better however to repeat the noun — oui c'est mon pere. 14. The pronouns lui, leur, eux, elle preceded by a preposi- tion do not serve to designate inanimate things. Thus in speaking of a table we would say ^ I drew near it, je m'en approchai, and not je m\ipprochai d'elle. 15. Lui, leur, eux, elle, elles are however often employed for things personified. Ex —Work is my saviour, I owe my life to it, le travail est mon sauveur, je lui dois la vie. The pronoun y may also be used for persons with certain verbs, such as : penser, sonyer. Ex.— Do you think of me ? I do, pensez-vousdmoi? j'y pense. 16. The pronoun le, la, les, must not take the place ot a nouii taken in a determinate sense and which forms but one idea with the preceding word, as in . avoir f aim, f aire justice. Do not then say : I know how to ask advice and follow it, je sais demnnder conseUet le suvre, but, je sais demander un con- sell et le suivre. TOCABULART. Prosperity, to transport, to Ipud astray, to cross, a disturbance ( to sail alf ig the coast, Prosjyerite, f. transporter. egarer. traverser. eineute.* cCtoyer. Fate, thought, fertile, vindictive, to excess, to rub, olive color, Sort, m. pensie, £. fertile. vindicatif. d Vcxces. frotter. olivdtre. 172 PER80NAL PaONOUNS. ft* tit f To experience, Eprouvcr. tempest, tempete, f. counties, cnmies. m. pi, to meet, se rennir. agreably, agreablcment. manufacturing, m(t?iw/ac11e etait mieux culti\ee. 9. Les Italiens passent pour etre vindicatifs ; on dit mem^ qu'ils le sunt h Icxces. 10. Les huiles dont se frottent certains peuples len 'oiAt ijarattre plus olivatres qu'ils ne le sont. 11. Le suleil I :k*. .^ DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 173 .Ualime semblent plus gros snr rhorison qu'ils ne lo pa- raissent au zenith. 12. Q\xaucl on deniandait a Cornene, mere des Gracques, si elle etait riche, elle repondait, je i^ suis, et elle montrait ses enfants qii'elle appelait ses bijoux. 13. Germanicua dit h. ses soldats mutinea :- etes-vous Ro- inains ? Nous le somnies, repondirent-ils. 14. L'avarice, Tarn- bition ct la coiere sont des plaies plus grandcs et plus danger rouses dans les umes que les abces et les ulceres ne le sont dans le corps. 15. Catherine do Medicis etait jalouse de sou autorite et le devait etre. IG. Rectiliez vos pensees ; quand ullcs seront pures, vos actions le seront aussi. 17. David et Salomon furent d'abord pieux et sages, mais il? ne le furent pas tou jours. 18. Un sage jouit des plaisirs et s'cn passe, comme on fait des fruits en hiver. 19. Un enfant ne sabsistQ que par ses parents, depend d'eux, vient d'eux, Icur doit tout. 20. Le temps ne parait long qu'5, ceux qui ne savent qu'en faire. CHAPTER XI. ON THE PRONOUNS LEUB, SOI, PEESONNE, UUlSf, L'AVTBE AND ON THE USE OF THE DEMON- STRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUN-' ON, CHACUN. 1 . Leur, relative pronoun placed before or after a verb, and meaning a eux, a elks, never takes s, Ex. —I spoke to them, je huv ai parle. . i , • . 2. The pronoun soi refers usually only to an indeterminate subject. Ex.— One ixi-ist speak seldom of one's self, on doit imrUr rarementde soi; we must take care of ourselves, llfaut proidre (jarde d soi. 3. The demonstrative pronouns celui, celle-ci, etc., de- si'inate the object spoken of last ; celul-lci, cdle Id, etc. , the firs^, one spoken of. Ex.— The two philosophers, Heracbtus and Democritus, were of a very different disposition ; the latter laughed always, the former cried without ceasing, les deux iyJvlosophes, HemcUte et Dr.nocrite etaieat dhm caractere Ueih dl0rev,t ; celni-ci riait toijonm, celui-ld ple^irait sans cesse. > 4. The demonstrative pronovns celui, celle, etc., do not allow usually after them mi adjective or a participle. Ex — Those arrived this morning, cdks qui sont arrivees ce maim, not cdles arrivees ce matin. 174 DEMONSTRATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 5. Cec/i designates an object near the person speaking • cela, a more distant object. In conversation ccci relates to what is going to bo co-id, and cela to what has just been said. I^x. — I do not like this, give me that, je n'aime pas ceci, d/inncz im.i cola. 6. The relative pronouns qui, que, etc., must always be placed immediately after their antecedent every time that this construction is possible. Ex.— There is in this authoi ar. air of affectation which spoils all his writings, il y dans cct autenr un air d'affectation qui gate tons ses ecriis, not il y a un ah' d'affectation, etc. 7. One cannot use in the same sentence without making the meaning obscure several relative pronouns referring to different antecedents. Instead of saying j'ai lu avec plaisir cet ouvrage qui a ej r um pose par une personne qui estvcrsee dans les sciences qui ont pour ohjet V etude de la nature it is better to say /ai In avec plaisir cet ouvrage ; il a eie com^iose par une personne rversee dans les sciences qui ont pour ohjet V etude de la nature. 8. The pronoun qui, preceded by a preposition, is only said of persons or things personified ; it is replaced by lequel, laqueUe, quoi, dont in all other cases. Ex. — Happiness be- longs to the one who makes people happy, le honhcur appar- tient d qui fait des heureux ; the science to which 1 apDly my- .' ;lf , la science a laquelle je m^ applique, not d qui je m'applique. 9. D'ou serves to express an idea of locality, and dont an idea of origin : there is the house whence I have come out, voild la Tiiaison d'ou je sors ; under this famous hero sprung from the blood from which I have sprung, sous ce hey-os fameux ne du fang dont je sors. 10. The possessive pronouns le mien, le tien, le sien, le notre, le votre, etc. , must always relate to a noun expressed before. Thus do not say in commencing a letter : /ai re^u la voire en date du, etc. , but, j^ai regu votre lettre en date du, etc. , etc. 11. On, always subject of a verb, is usually masculine ; however the adjective which follows it is put in the feminine when this pronoun evidently refers to a woman ; the adjec- tive can also be put in the plural when one speaks of several persons. Ex. — One is happy when one is good, on est heu- reux quand on est sage. 12. Generally on should be preferred to Vo7i at the be- ginning of a sentence. DEMONSTEATIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 175 speaking ; relates to been said. 5 pas ceci, always be time that lis authoK y dans ect t il y a un it making ferring to ■vec plaisir )crsee dans t is better e par nne Hude de la 1, is only by leqiiel, piness be- nr appar- ipply my- 'applique. cl dont an 3ome out, ro sprung )s fameux ,, le notre, d before. I voire en etc., etc, asculine ; feminine le adjec- )f several \h est heu- the be- V 13. Von is used instead of on after ci, .si, on, to soften the pronunciation ; thus one will say : si Von vent, and not si on vent : say however : si on le voit instead of si Von le voit, for the sake of euphony. 14. Cluicnn takes son, sa, ses, when it is after the direct regimen, or that the verb has no regimen of that kind. Ex. — They brought their offerings each according to his means, ils ont apporti lenrs offrandes chacnn selon ses woyensj the two generals have retired each in his tent, les deux gencmnx se sont retires chacnn dans sa tente. Chacnn takes leurs when it precedes the direct regimen. Ex.— They have each brought their offerings, ils ont apporte chacun lenrs offrandes. 15. Per Sonne preceded by the article is feminine, but it is masculine when it is not preceded by the article;. Ex. — The person has come, la personne est venue; JNo one came, per- son7ie n'cst venu, 16. Unn et Vautre, les uns et les autrcs, give simply an idea of plurality ; Vnn V autre, les uns les autrcs, an idea of recipro- city as well. Thus one would say of Racine and Boileau ; Vun et Vautref.irent deux grands poetes, ils s^estimaient Vun Vautre. VOOABULARY. Habits, Eahitudes,i.i± To triumph, Triompher. to get rid of, se defaire. to define, mark, to try, bitter, to persuade, parasites, disposition. to entrust, harbor, future, to last, to free ones' self, empty, fabulous, dreadful, Ic iicglect. dejittir, iibdice, f. tdcher. aigre. persuader. parasites, rci.'pl. naturel. conjier. port, m. d vcnir. durer. t'affranchir. vide. fahuleux-se. epouvantahle. nejliger. doute. ni. doubt, tomakeagreat deal of, faire cas de. to spoil, gdter. to grow obstin- ate, s'ohsti')ier. to make a show of, cutting, severe, accomplices, to bend, lightning con- ductors, to succor, agitated, easily, to triumph, calumny, chance, dragons, mixture. faire parade. mordant. cotv.pliccs^ra.^l. Jlecnir. paratonnerres. secourir. agite. aisement. triompher. calomnie, f. hasard, m. dragons, m. pi. melange, m. n •I * unknown to one, d son insu I to entrust, cwifier. ■iiAi 17G SYNTAX OF THE VERB. EXERCISE XI. 1. Quand une fois on a pris de mauvaiscs habitudes, il est bien difficile de s'en defaire. 2. On ne definira jamais assez bien la yertupourendonnerune ideeparfaite. 3. L'excuse qu'en soi-meme on donne h sea defauts est lo premier indice qu'on ne veut pas a'en corriger. 4. Le sentiment persuade mieux que la raison ; celle-citrouve des juj^cs, celui-lh, so fait des complioes. 5. Le tigreest peut-etre le seul animal dont on ne puisse flechir le naturel. G. II y a deux choses aux- quelles il faut bien s'accoutumer ; les injures du temps et les injustices des hommes. 7. Le corps pcrit et i'anie est immor- telle ; cependant on neglige celle-ci et tous les soins sont poi.v celui-lk. 8. La chose k laquelle I'avare penso le moins, c'est h, secourir les pauvres. 9. Les Lapons Danois ont un gro*- chat noir auquel ils confient tous leurs secrets, et qu'ils con- sultent dans leurs affaires. 10. Le douto est une mer agitee dont la religion est le seul port. 11. On ne pent honorer la vertu sans se fairo honneur h. soi-meme. 12. On perd le coeur et I'estime des personnes sur qui on veuttoujoura I'emporter. 13. Le hasard est un mot vide de sens auquel on attribue des effets dont on ignore les causes. 14. Les grands hommes se ferment les uns les autres. 15. II n'y a personne qui ne soit dangereux pour quelqu'un. IG. Les dragons efcaient des monstres fabuleux auxquels on pretait un melange de formes epouvantables. 17. Les comtes assemblerent les troupes ohacun dans son camp. 18. II faut h jamais vous separer Fun de I'autre. 19. L'amitie nous unit les uns aux autres. 20. lis ont apporte des offrandes au temple, chacun selon ses moyena et da vertu. CHAPTER XII. SYNTAX OF THE VERB— AGREEMENT WITH THE SUBJECT — AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE COLLECTIVE NOUNS. , 1. The verb must always take the number of its subject, whether this subject precede or follow. Ex.— The dog barks, le chieii nboie ; the bees hum, les abeilles bourdoiment ; there flourishes the rose, laficurlt la rose. 2. When the subject of a verb is composed of several sin- gular nouns joined by ct, the verb is put in the plural. Ex. — The fox and the monkey are cunnmg, le renard et le singe I' i! SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 177 es, il est aia assez L'excuse Br indice persuade Ik so fait mal dont )se8 aux- ips et les t immor- ont poi.t ins, c'est ini grw I'ils con- er agitee )norer la i le coeur tnporter. dbue des mines se li ne soit ient des e formes troupes separer : autres. selon ses H THE : WITH subject, 'he dog lonnent ; eral sin- Ex.— le singe gont rdsea; the lily and the rose are sweet-smelling, Ic Us et la rose sunt udvrants. 3 The verb is placed in the smg.lar after several nouns if they are synonyms or imply gradation or have a distribu- tive meaning ; in the plural if all the nouns are taken col- lectively. Ex. -His kindncc3, h:3 gentleness is known by every body, son amende, sa douceur cd connue de tout le monde ; treason, murder is ll.o seal of falsehood, la trahison. U meurtre est le sceau du mensowje ; a look, a gesture maao him tremble, un regard, un geste le jaisait trembler. 4 When after several nouns there is one including them all, the 'verb agrees with it. Ex.-Poor, rich, learned, ignorant, Uttle or great, no one u exempt from death pauvres riches, so. vants,ignorants,petitsougrands,personnen'ct'tcxcmptdelamort. 5 When a verb relates to several nouns connected by 7U, it is placed in the singular, if the nouns are taken separately ; and in the plural if taken collectively. Ex— I. either poetry nor painting have charms for him, ni la pocsio m la peinture n^a de charme pour lux ; neither gold nor greatnccn render us happy, ni Vor ni la grandeur ne nous rendent heureux. 6 After the words L\tn et Vautre, ni Vun ni Vaxdrc, the verb must bo put in the plural ; both were admired iuji d I autre furent admires ; neiihev are good, m Vun m Vautre ne sont hons. However, when one of the woras united by m, can alone perform the action expressed ^y t^? /?^\ ' V'^-^f ,5 put in the singular, Ex.- Neither will obtain the prize, m Vun m Caxdre n'obtiendra le pnx. p^r^rpsaions 7 When several nouns are united by the expressions corrlmc, amsi, que, avee, etc., the verb i^ P^^^j^ ^he singukr. Ex.~Man, like all animals, is subicct to death, Ihjmmej comme toxcs les animaxix, est sujet ci I mort. _ ^i^.^Af 8 In the sentences constructed with the expressions jpZiifo* que, nonplus que, moms que., etc, the verb agrees always with the noun which expresseci the principal i^f • , ^^•.7 .^J is he, rather than his brother, whc u guilty, cest Im plutot one ses freres, qui est coupable. ^^ju^ ^ 9. When thi subject of a verb is composed of several verbs in the infinitive united by et, the verb is put m the ..ngular if the parts of the subject are considered ^epa^ ately , m the plural if taken collectively. Ex.-To eat, ^f/^^^'-f^JI^/.^.^X life of many men, manger, hoire, dormir,est la vede bu.odes hommes; to read too much and to read too Kttle arc two faults, lire trop et lire trop peu sont deux dejauts. ,;5^^3^ m 178 trnrsAx ov the verb. 10. When the subject of a sentence is composed of two or several nouns joined by on, the verb is usually put in the singular. Ex. — My father or my uncle will be named am- bassador, mon pkrc ou mun oncle sera tiomme amhassadenr, 11. Every verb which has for subject a noun, collective general, preceded by the article in put in the singular. Ex. — The number of unfortunates is immense, le nombre des malhenreux est immense. 12. When the collectives partitive, such as : la plupartf une infinite, un nombre, une sorte, nne nuee, (a cloud, crowd), unefoule, etc., and the adverbs of quantity which express quantity, as : peu, beaucoup, etc., etc., are followed by a glural noun, the verb always takes the number of this noun. Ix. — Most of the pupils are indocile, la plupart des Ueves sont indociles ; many Irishmen have kept to their religion, beaucoup d'lrlandais out conserve leur religion, 33. When the words ^ew, beaucoup, la plupart, refer to a plural noun understood, the verb is placed in the plural. Ex. — Most (people) are subject to errors, la plupart sunt sujeta d Verreur. 14. Every time that the collective partitive is followed by a singular noun, the verb is put in the singular. Ex. — A number of people ran, une infinite de monde accourut ; half oi the people believed, la moitii dupeuple le crut. 15. When a noun collective partitive., followed by a plural noun, is subject of a proposition, the verb agrees with the one of these two words which strikes the attention the most. Ex. — A. crowd of barbarians desolated the country, une nuee de barbares desoUrent le pays. VoCiBULARY. Power, to be moved, to be excited, to watch, swallow, nightingale, return, reed, grain, fuffices, peace, vain, Puissance, f. s^attendrir, veiller, hirondelle, f. rossigiiol, m. retour, m. roseau, m, grain, m. sufit. lapaix, f, vaiti^e. Priest, restraint, disgraces, to surmount, perfect, manners, littleness, understand, undertaking, to take away, to withdraw, part, TrUre. contrainie, f, disgraces, f. pi. snrmoiiter. par fait, manieres, i, pi. petitesse, f. coiicevoir. entreprise, f, retirer. se retirer. partie^ f. NUMBER AN0 .^OJREBMT^NT F TEUBS. 1*^9 ilcvei Cottage, to subjugate, workman, workwoman, to despise, to suffer, winter, reports, recitals, Clf he, f. sulji'nuer. It rier. 'II rih'e. 'ijifiser. nffrlr. hivcVy m. ricUs, m. pi. EX Land owner, Propriitaire. to yield, to double, to agi '>, strong, necc'^arily ro1 rapporter. doublcr. s^accorder, nf.rvcux. ')iece38airement. robustd. S,,J.^' !'«'»"»'■»/"«. '• bad faith, CISE XII. 5 1 Die" ticnt le sort des peuples entro ses maina pnissantes. 2 ils tiennent leurs droits de Dieu j leur puissance, du p'enple. 3. L'hommo est nd pour regner sur tons les ani- maux. 4. Les houimes sont encore enfants h soixanto ans. 5 La Colombo attendrit les echos deP forets. 6. Les coeurs ambitieux ne s'attendrissent pas. ^ .a religion veille sur les crimes secrets. 8. Les lois veilleixu sur les crimes publics. 9 Nous attendons chaque hiver que Thirondello et K rosai- gnol nous annoncent le retour des beaux joui /O. La colore et la precipitation sont deux choses fort opposees k la prudence. 11. Dans tons les ^ges de la vie, I'amour du tra- vail le gout de letude est un bien. 12. L'homme n'est qu'iin roseau, le plus faible de la nature ; une vapeur, un grain de sable suffit pour le tuer. 13. Jeune homme la vertu la paix de I'innocence, te rendront plus heureux qu une vaine' science. 14. Grands, riches, petits et pauvres, per- Bonne ne pent se soustraire k la mort. 15. L ignorance ou la mauvaise foi corrompt les recits. 16. La sante comme la for- tune retire ses favours h qui en abusent. 17. La verity comme la lumiere est inalterable. 18. Se taire et souffrir en silence est souvent le parti que dicte la prudence. 19. L absti- nence ou I'exces ne fit jamais d'heureux. 20. Assez de gens meprisent le bien, mais peu savent le donner. CHAPTER XIIT. NUMBER OF THE VERB AFTER QCrj— AGREEMENT OF THE VERB AFTER THE PRONOUN CE- AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE PERSON. 1 When the relative pronoun qui relates to a singular noun, the verb is put in the singular. Ex.— The lamb which m 1 "•^'■' ■Hi IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V // ^ &?^ y. ^/j /^/. .(5 1.0 I.I 1.25 128 B12 IIM 2.2 1^ U 11.6 V] <^ ^ 'cr^l c*: "> > %v . r %. O^A /A Photographic Sciences Corporation i\ -«^v ^ ■^ S \ ;\ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 .(5 ss>- 180 ITUMBBB Am> AOBBEMENT OP VERBS. bleats, Vagnem^ qui Ule-^iS it refers to a plural noun the verb IS in the plural. Ex.-The winds which Zv^vmU qui mugissent. ' '^^^^'^ +T,?' \^^^ relative i)ronoun qui relates to several nouns the verb is put m the singular or in the plural according S the nouns are taken in a distributive Sr collective sens^ Ex. -She has an innocence, a modesty, a simplicity which charme; It is intemperance and idleness which ruins us cW V intemperance et Voisivete qui nous perdmt ' 3. VVhen the relative pronoun qui is preceded bv a noun col ec ive and a plural noun, the verb is put in the singuT^ other nou^i^Ex'^'H^"^ as the idea.refer^s to the one o? th^ darts wK fpn S '''"^•? ''^^ ^^^^^ *^^* g^^^* ^""'^t^er of daits which fell upon him, il ne put Svlter cette nuee de traits gju tombasur lui; that crowd of barbarians, who invaded ^i::^X^^i^^:: -^^ '^ ^-^«-> ^-^ -- «inl,r ^^% verb relates to the first noun, it is put in the angular; If it refers to the second, is is put in the plural! talitVJA^ '' i^^^f 'n ""^ }^^ ^'^^^' ^h« **"ght the immor- 1^;J.ln%}^J7h T^'^^^\'' ^« P^'^ier des Grecsqui ait enseigne aXiZ f'^^'i^'^'V ^*^^^^" ^^ «^^«^ best written pieces, ^thalie est une des pikes qui sont le mieuxfaites. 5. If the verb relates to a noun determined by mi, it does ^^^^ i; ' T.^]"^ contrary, it relates to the noun deter- mined by des, It takes the number of the latter. Ex —Zaire IS one of the tragedies of Voltaire which has had the most success, Zaire est une des tragedies de Voltaire qui a eu le plus de succes; Ra,cme is one of the poets of the eighteenth cen- tuiy which do It most honor, Bacine est un des poUes du dix- huitibme sikle qui Ini font le plus d'honneur. 6. When the verbs vivre, importer, etc., are employed in the subjunctive mood, they take the number of the slibiect of the sentence. Ex. -Hurrah for young men, vivent les yeunes gens. ° ' 7. The verb ^ ecolier. jour de congL mollesse, f. le couchant. gnider. trident, m. sei'ment, m. gager. embarrassant. racine, f. gemir. Place, Endroit, m. the thickness la presse d\me of a crowd, foule. importunate man, importun. to swarm, fourmiller. just man, juste. to scatter, repandre. efhcacious, eijicace. engraved, grave. engraver, gravcur. to preside, presider. comforting, consolant. toil, labeur, m. laurels, lauriers, m. pi. to awake, reveiller. the east, le levant. patiently, patiemment. roughness, rudesse, f. to deprive, ravir. a bet, un pari. to unravel, debrouiller. games, jenx, m. pi. tutelar, tuielaire. to pierce, percer. drawing room, salo7i, m. EXERCISE XIIT. 1. Un jeune homme qui aime h se parer comme une femme est indigne de la sagesse et de la gloire. 2. La vertu souf- frante attendrit tons les coeurs qui ont quelque gout pour l,i vertu. 3. Le cerf est un de ces animaux innocents, doux et tranquilles, qui ne semblent etre faits que pour embellir, animer la solitude des forets. 4. La totalite des marchan- ON THE USE OF C'est AND U' est. 183 e second I person. orcl ; you vous vous pronoun X. — Moi etc. t, m. te d'une 'in. Her. re. uf. m. , m. pi. i. %ent. f. ler. pi. ! femme bu souf- pour Li loux et nbellir, archan- dises qiii nous ont ete expediees est arriv^e h bon port. 5. J'ai une femme et une fille qui gemissent de mon absence. 0. Percerai-je cet essaim d'hommes do tout 4ge, de tout rang qui roule dans ce vaste salon. 7. Personne ne fut plus done que Fe'nelon de cette bonte, de cette indulgence qui captive les esprits et les coeurs. 8. Puissent ces efficacea et saintes paroles etre eternellement gr ivees dans notre esprit. 9. Lea mdchants servent k eprouverun petit nombre de justes qui se trouvent rdpandus sur la terre. 10. Ce sont les Egyptiens qui, les premiers, observ^rent le cours des astres, reglferent I'annee et invent^rent Farithmetiquo . 11. Dieu cherche dea adorateurs en esprit et en vt^rite ; ce qu'il veut c'est iious- memes. 12. Ce furent les Phdniciens qui inventerent la navigation. 13. Ce sont les labours du paysan qui assurent la subsistance du riche. 14. Ce sont les aigles Romaines qui ont soumis le monde. 15. Faire du bien, entendre dire du mal de soi patiemment ce sont Ik dea vertus de chretien. 16. Nous ne vivons jamais, nous attendons la vie. 17. L'hisT toire est un bon livre, il guide sans rudesse. J 8. C'est moi qui suis Guillot, berger de ce troupeau. 10. J Neptune ! c'est vous qui excitates, par votre superbe trident, toutea les eaux de votre empire. 20. C'est lui qui m'a ravi I'amiti^ d^ mon p^re. CHAPTER XIY. ON THE USE OF C'EST AND IL EST. 1. Ce is used for il. Us, elk, elles, as subject of a sentence of which a noun or a pronoun foims the attribute. Ex. — It was they who told me to wait, ce furent eux qui me dirent d'attendre ; far from being gods, they are not even men, bien loi7b d'etre des dlenx, ce ue sont pas meme des hommes. 2. The verb etre used in conjunction with ce, i? put in the plural only when followed by p^ noun in the plural or by a pronoun in the third person plural (as in the instanco above). 3. When an adjective or a substantive used adjectively, forms the attribute of tho sentence, the pers(mal pronoun il must be used. Ex. — Have yoci seen the horse which I have just purchased ? avez vous vu le cheval que je viens d'acheter ? it is a superb animal, il est superhe. Relating to a whole sentence, ce may also be used. Ex. — It is true, c'est vrai; it is just, c'est juste. 384 our THE rsE mr c'est jcud tt est. 4. Ce 18 also much used in conjunction with itre to impart greater perspicuity, precision and elegance to a sentencp. Ihus It IS employed when the sentence begins with ce followed by a relative pronoun. Ex.— What concerns man is to fulfil his duties, ce qui concenie Vhomme. c'est d'accomplir ses devoirs. 5. When in sentences of this kind the verb etre is followed by a substantive^ the use of ce is imperative if that substan- tive IS plural. Ex.— What we endure least patiently is mjus- tice, ceqnenom endurons avec le mains de patience c'est V injus- tice When the verb Stre is followed by an adjective, ceisnot d^lfiJsn-^nu:!''''' '''' "^'^ ''^^'^"^' '' ^'^^ ^-^- 6 Vest, followed by an adjective does not admit of a com- plement commencing by que or de : It is false, c'est faux II est, on the contrary, demands after the adjective which fol- lows it a complement expressed. Ex.— It is just that he Bhould periBh, tl est juste qn'ilpensse. 7. The difference between c'est and il est is as fcHows • II est has a general indeterminate and extremely vague signifi. cation. On the contrary, c'est, far from being vague in its meaning like %l est, is determinate, and energetic. 8. When the verb itre is modified by an adverb, such as • beaucoup, peu, assez, trap, it must bo preceded by ce, but if' on the contrary, it relates to an adjective having after it another verb or que, il must be employed. Ex.— It is little to give, we must give with grace, c' est peu que de donner, il faut donner avec grace ; it is unfortunately too true that he has committed that horrible crime, il est malheureusement trap vrai qnhl a commis ce crime horrible. . . ^- .f f ^^.^j^ construed with nouns denoting time. Ex — Wb-^ ^ timeitw ? Isitthree o'clock, quelle heure est il ? Ilest trois heur'[ ^ 10. C €6.; mall Its tenses, both of the indicative and sub- junctive moods, IS idiomatically used in French to point out more precisely an object determinate. Ex.— This is mv book, cest la mon livre ; to-morrow will be Tuesday c'est demamMardi ; to-morrow is a holiday, c'est demain conge 11. Cesi mall its tenses may serve to designate either a person or a thing already mentioned. Ex.— He is a biahoo c'est wi eveque ; it is bread, c'est du pain ^' Vocabulary. To quarrel, Se disputer, i January, travel, voyage, m. | February, X Janvier. Fivrier. ON THE USB To displease, Diplaire. without ceas- to please, agitated, to illtreat, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, holiday, generosity, gifted, to presume, to meet, convenient, to afflict one's self, to talk, to contest, descendants, sans ces8e» plaire. agiii. maltraiter. Jeudi. *■■ Vendredi, Samedi. ■,. congS. genirositS, douL prisumer. rencontrer, commode. s'affliger. converser, contester. descendants. OF c'eat Ain> il y March, April, May, June, July, August, September, October, November, December, extent, as a compeU' sation, at full speed, (talking of a person), at full speed on horse- back. ea^. 18£. Mars {s sound- ed). Awil. Mai. Juin, Juillet (liq.)' ^o^^a silent). Septembre, Octobre. Novembre, Vicembre. itendue^ ! en revanche. d. toutes jamhes. a bride abatiue. ventre d terr&. EXERCISE XIV. 1. L'animal diffbre beaucoup de la plante, puisqu il est dou6 de sentiment ; c'est un etre sensible qui, pendant sa vie est sans cesse agile par le d^sir de I'entretenir et la crainte de la perdre. 2. Je lis et relis Lafontaine ; c'est mon auteur favori. 3. L'6tendue de la mer est aussi grande que celle de la terre ; ce n'est point un 616ment froid et sterile, c'est un nouvel empire aussi riche, aussi peuple que le pre- mier 4. Loin d'etre les protecteurs du peuple, lis en sont las oppresseurs. 6. L'homme n'est point homme, parcequ il est animal raisonnable, mais parcequ'il est animal rehgieux. 6. Nous sommes rentrds tard, c'est vrai ; mais en revanche nous nous sommes leves matin. 7. Vous avez beaucoup ecrit, c'est vrai ; mais que d'erreurs dans vos ouvrages. 8. Je suis jeune il est vrai ; mais, aux 4mes bien nfes, la valeur n'attend pas le nombre des annees. 9. Je suis bien agit^e il est vrai ; mais mon cceur de vos sages avis recherche la douceur. 10. Vous soutenez que vous n'et^s pas sorti . c'est faux, car je vous ai vu au theatre. 11. Quelle heure croyez-vous qu'ilsoit ? II est minuit. 12. Quelle heure dtait ilquand vous etes parti? II 6tait neuf heures. 13. Best bien facheux que vous soyez malade. 14. 11 est du devoir 186 ON THE EEQIMEN OV VERBS. d'lm bon citoyen de defendre sa patrio. 15. C'est anjoiir- d'hui Dimanche— VOU8 vous trompez, c^-st Ca-.icdi. 10. C'est demain conge. 17. Ilen.8eracequ'ilplaira5,Dieu. 18. C'est assez de cette d-marche imprudente pour vous perdre. 19. C'est un marchand. 20. Avez-voup« In le voyage d'Ana- charaia, c'eat un ouvrago excellent. 21. Ce Bont de bonnes gens. CHAPTER XT. ON THE REGIMEN OR COMPLEMENT OF THE VERBS— USE OF THE AUXILIARIES. 1. When two verbs require different regimen.s, that is; when one demands a direct regimen and the other an indirect regimen, one gives to each one the complement it requires. Ex. — This officer attacked the town and took it, cet offi,cier attaqua et ^it la ville, but not cet ojfficier attaqua et s^.mpara de la ville. 2. The same rnle applies to the verbs which demand indi- rect complements marked by diflferent prepositions. It would be wrong to say, un grand nomhre de vaisseaiix entrent et snrtent de ce port, because, entrer demands dans, and sortir demands de. The sentence should be thus : nn grand nomhre de vaisseaux entrent dans ce port et en sortent. 3. The two preceding rules are e(iually applicable when the complement of a verb is a pronoun. One cannot say : he has acquired general esteem and rendered himse'f celebrated, il s'est acquis une estime generale et 7endu celkbre, but s'est rendu ce'Jbre. 4. When a verb is followed by several complements united by et, 7n, ou, these complements must be of the same i.ature, that is to say, that these conjunctions can unite two nouns or two verbs, or join a proposition to anof.-or propo!=?ition. One cannot therefore say : il aime le jeu et a etudler^ but il aime lejcn et V elude.— tl se plait d la chasse et a, pecker ^ but il se plait a chasser et a pecker. 6. The past participle joined to the verb etre has for com, plement de or par. De is used usually when the verb and the participle express a passion, a sentiment, an action in which the body has no part. Ex.— He is loved, esteemed, despised, hated by everybody, il est airrJ, cctlmc, mepricc, luii de tout k monde. Far is used when the verb and the par- ON THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 187 aujoiir- LC. C'est 18, C'est perdre. e d'Ana- ) bonnes F THE that is; indirect 'equires, 'i ojlJicier nd indi- ct would itrent et id sortir I nomhre rhen the say : he 3brated, but s'ed 3 united i.ature, o nouns •coition. , but il Ker, but or com-, jrb and ition in kecnied, ncprice, the par- ticiple express an action of the body and in which the body and the sotil have part. Ex.— Abel was killed by nis brother, Ahdfut iue par son frhre. . • xi, 6. Most of the neuter verbs take the auxiliary avoir in the compound tenses. Ex.— I have walked, J'aimarche. thou hast succumbed, tu as succomhe, thou hast slept, tn as dormi. they have lived, ils out ve(^u. •we have triumphed, oious avons triomphe. he has succeeded, they have reigned, they have run. il a succeje. Us out rejne. ils ont cuuru. 7. The following take etre in their compound tenses : Togo, u4iZer — Je svis alle. ^ to arrive, arriver — il est arrive. ( deceder — elle est detidee. to die, I moiirir — elle est morte. to be born, naiire — il est ne. to come 'f'^'"'^'''' — '^^'^''^ sommes venus. to become, devenir—il est devenu. to succeed, parvenir—vous etes parve^m. to return, revenir—elles swd revenues. 8. A few other verbs take either avoir or etre according to the sense that one wishes to express, such as : Eng. To land, to run to, to increase, to encamp, to cease, to change, to grow, to decay, Ekench. Ahorder. accovrir. augmenter, camper, cesser, changer. croUre. dechoir. Eng. French. To diminish, Dimimcer. to expire, expirer. to grow tall, grandir. to ascend, mvnter. to set out, partir. to pass, passer. to perish, i^erir. to grow young, rajeunvi'. to disappear, disparaitre. to fall due, Schoir. to enter, etdrer. to descend, descendre. to grow old, These verbs take avoir when referring particularly to the action of the verb, they take itre when expressing state that to remain, to ring, to go out, to fall, vieillir. rester. soniier. sortir. tomheu 188 ON THE REQIMEN OF VERBS. 18 the result of the action. Ex.— On such and such a day we landed in such a place, teljournous avons aborde d tel endroit but nous sommes aboraes ; that child has grown tall in a short time, cd enfant a bien grandi en pen de temps, but cet enfant eat bien graiidi. 9. Several of these verbs are sometimes employed actively, that 18, with a direct regimen, in this case they take avoir like active verbs. Ex.— I took tixis wine down into the cellar, J at descendu ce vin d la cave ; he went up stairs, il a monte lescalier. 10. A few neuter verbs change auxiliary in changing mean- ing : to escape, echapper—Schappe, construed with the verb avoir, implies that one does not pay attention to a tiling, or that one has forgotten it. Ex.— I have forgotten this song, celte romance w'a echopp6. Construed with etre, it would mean that something had been done through inadvertence. Ex.— That expression escaped him, cette parole Ini est ejiappee. tonvcnu from convenir, to &gree.—Convenu with avoi?- gives the Idea that a thing suits ; with etre it implies admission. Ex. — r It suited her, elle lui a convenu ; she has admitted her wrongs- elleest convenue deses torts. Demeure from demeurer, to re- main.— Demeure with etre is used when the subject does not change condition : three thousand men remained on the field, tl est demeure trois mille hommes sur la place. Demeure is used with avoir when the subject passes from one state to the other. Ex.— He remained a long time on the way, il a de- meure longtemps en chemin. Beste follows the same rule — Jixpire takes etre when speaking of things ; avoir, of per- sons, Ex.— The truce has expired, la treve est expiree; this man has expired, cet homme a expire. Vocabulary. Mind, similar, a depot, will, willingness, garrison, false shame, to put to the sword, advantages, to spare, Esprit, m. semblable. un fonds. volonie, f. bonne volonte. garnison, f. mauvaise honte. * passer aujil de lepee. avantages, m. pi. epargner. Last, Dernier. avoided, ichappS. to draw along, entrainer. to overthrow, renverser, to preside, presider. to rule, regler. to take pos- session, s'emparer. stars, a^tres, m. pi. harbor, port, m. avowal, aveu, m. ON THE EEOIMEN OP VEEBS. 189 Novelty, assault, by means of, window, coal heaver, to occupy one's self, to increase, request, blessing, to remain, how sweet, NmweauUy f. assauty m. au moyen de. fenetre^ f. charhonnier. s'occuper. augtnenter. demandey f. hien, m. rester. quHl est doux. week, To hurt, Faire mal. to feel, sentir. to think a faire grand cos great deal of, de. augmenter, denrieSf f. pi. to increase, provisions, to render one's self master of, dwelling, to recall, storms, semaine, f. serendremaitre, habitationf f. se rappeler. orages, m. pi. EXERCISE XV. 1. L'esprit s'ennuie et se d^goute de ce qui ne se prrfsente pas h. lui avec lea graces de la nouveaute. 2. Le luxe eat semblable k un torrent qui entraine et qui renverse tout ce qu'il rencontre. 3. Le Maiechal attaqua Angers et s'en rendit niaitre. 4. Charlemagne aimait lea lettres ct la society de ceux qui les cultivaient. 5. II y a dans le cceur de celui qui prie un fonda de bonne volontd qui le dispose h embrasser et i sentir la vdrite. 6. Le gt^ndral avait su connaitre ses avan- taaes et s'en servir. 7. Le souverain Crdateur regie le mou- vement des astres et y preside. 8. Un grand nombre de vaisseaux entrent tons lea moia dans ce port et en sortent. 9. Au moyen du chemin de fer on pent mamtenant aller k Versailles et en revenir en une heure. 10. Les Anglais font untres grand cas de Shakspeare ; ila ont voulu non seulement I'opposer k Corneille maia le mettre au-dessus. 11. J ai rest6 plus d'un an en Italie, je n'ai vu que le debris de cette an- cieiine Italie si fameuse autrefois. 12. EUe donnerait pour vous sa vie, le seul bien qui lui soit reste. 13. La procession a passe sous mea f enetrea. 14. Sa fortune a augments dans cette operation. 15. Sa fortune est augment^e du double. 16 Toutea lea denrees aont augmente'ea depuia longtempa. 17'. L'armee est campde entre la montagne et la rivifere. 18 EUe a demeure cinq ans avec moi dans cette memo habi- tation oh voua me voyez. 19. Cinq cents hommea aont demeurea aur le champ de bataille. 20. Quand on est arrive au port, qu'il est doux de se rappeler les orages auxquels on a echapp^. X90 TEKTSEH AND MOODS OP VERBS. CHAPTER XVI. tJSE OF THE TENSES AND MOODS OF THE VERT5S- CORRESPONDENCE OF TENSES. ^ 1. The past or preterite definite can only bo used in speak- ing of a timo absolutely passed. Thus do not say : fetudiai aujou, I'hvi, cette scwcmic, cette annee, but fai etudt etc One could say however : fitndiai hicr, la semaine dtmUre. Ex.— Rome was for a long time the arbiter of the destinies of the world, livme fut pendant longfemps Varhitre des desU- iiics du rvonde ; what did you do then '/ I waited for better times, que jUts-vous alors f fattendis des temps meilleurs. The past definite is used in the historical and generally in the narrative style. Ex.— Zc gen6ral commanda i'assant 8 empara de la vllle, pa«sa la garnison an Jil de Vtpee inais epcrgna les habitants ct de/endit qu'on Icurjit mal. ' 2. The past indefinite is used indiflferently for a past time whether a part still remains or not. Ex.— I studied this morning, yai etiidie ce matin. 3. The imperfect shows the action or state as being abso- lutely past, although present relatively to another action or state past also, both of them happening at the same time. Ex.— iVoits nous promenivns quand il commenga d plenvoii- (to rain). We have here two actions absolutely past, but both having taken place simultaneously must be considered as pre- sent relatively to each other. From this, the imperfect in French is always to be used in answer to the English auxiliary "was" and " were " preceding a present participle. Ex. -We Were breakfasting when he arrived, naiis dijeunions quand il arriva. The imperfect denoting sometimes a past habit may be said to answer to the word ''used to." Ex.— In the country I "worked in the garden " from morning till night, d la cam- pagne je jardinais depuis le matin jusqu'au soir ; under Louis Philip the French press enjoyed the most unlimited liberty, sous Louis Philippe la presse fran^aise jouissait de la liberte la plus illimitie. The imperfect further answers to the expletive form " did " before an infinitive, but only when simultaneity is implied. ■^^•— I^id you not know that you were deceived, ne saviez vous pas que Von vous trompait. The imperfect is also used after the conjunction si when this precedes the words "were to" followed by an infinitive TKN8E8 AND M'^ODS OP VERBS. 191 or with **wero" followed by its subject with a condition. Ex. — If I saw him I should speak to him, sije le voyaiajc lui parleraia. The imperfect is 8ometime«i used for the conditional, espe- cially after si. Ex.— If you had moved you were killed, ai vous boiKjiez vons itiez tni. 4. The two following sentences will show the difference between the imperfect and the past definite : je m'uccupais alots dc sa demande ; je. ni'occtipai alors de sa dtmande, Ist Sentence. — At the time I was attending to his request, some circumstance was taking place simultaneously with that fact as : when you came in. 2nd Sentence.— I attended to his request after another event had passed as : after you had left me. 5. The subjunctive. — After verbs of wish, desire, com- mand, the following verb is put in the subjunctive. Ex. — I wish you to do it, je veux que vous le fassiez. 6. After the locutions il est juste, il est hun, il est w^cewaire, il est esseiUielt il est i7nportaiit, il est possible, il semlle, the fol- lowing verb is put in the subjunctive. Ex. — It is just that ho should perish, il estju^te qu^il periss^,. 7. After impersonal verbs, such as : il faut, il importe, etc., the second verb is put in the subjunctive. Ex. — You must go, il faut qiie vous partiez. 8. The subjunctive is always used after the expressions qiielque . . . que, quelque, qui que, quoi que, si ... , gite, Ex. — Whoever you may be, qui que vous soyez. Also after afin que, a muins que, avant que, de peur que, lien que, etc. Ex. — In order that he may know it, ajin quHl le sache. 9. Every time that the conjunction que seems employed for aJln que, avaut que, etc., the following verb is put in the sub- junctive. Ex. — Apply yourself in order that your parents may bo pleased, appUquez vous que vos parents soient contents. After que of the imperative, the verb is always put in the subjunctive. Ex. — Let him go, quHl parte. 10. After the words le premier, le dernier, le plus, le mains, le meilleur, le senl, I'unique, il n'y a que, iln'estque, il n'y a point, one places the ^erb in the subjunctive. Ex. — He is the only one who is poor, il est le seul qui soit pauvre. 11. Correspondence of the tenses. — In what tense of the subjunctive the verb which follows the conjunction que must be put when it demands tliis mood ; 192 TENSES AND MOODS OF VERBS. 1st Rule.— When the first verb is in the present or in the future of the indicative, one places the second verb in the pre- sent of the subjunctive. Ex. — You must be more attentive, Ilfaudra ) c[ue vons soy ez plus Ilfaut 5 attentif. ^nd Rule.— When the first verb is in one of the past tenses of the indicative, or in the conditional, one puts the second verb in the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex.~Ilfancii il fallut il afalkc il cut fallu ilfaudrait il aura ^0 fallu 1 que vous fussiez plus attentif. 12. Use of the infinitive.— The infinitive is used either as subject or complement. Ex.— To die is nothing, mourirn'est nen, ce n^est rlen de mourir. 13. The infinitive may be used as a noun. Ex.—Lemanqer le boire. ^ ' J 4. Use the infinitive in preference to any other mood. Ex.— He believes he has said every thing, il croit avoir tout aity rather than il croit qu'il a tout dit Vocabulary, To scrape, cursed, in pieces, duties, shivering, to demand, regard, self esteem, to resist, conquest, warrior, extreme, guilty, youth, easily, to envy, Racier. maudit. €71 pieces. devoir, m. frisson, m. exiger. meuagement, m. amour-propre, m. resister. conquete, f. guerrlcr. exti erne. coupable. la jeunesse. facile.v.ient. envier. To inform, within the reach, learned, to study, to exact, demand, others, at last, at the end, rich, to soften, to refuse, true, the envious man, Mander. A la portee. savaid.* etudier. • i exiger. autrui. a la Jin. opulad-e. amolllr. refuser. veritable, Venvieux, TENSES AND MOODS OF VERBS. 193 or in tho u the pre- soyez plus ,tif. ist tenses lie second dif. either as mrir Qi'est e manger f er mood. ivoir tout der. mrtee. it* er. • r. li. In. }it-e. ir. r. hie, mx. Useless , Imitile. our fellow creatures, nos semhlahles. incapacity, imperitiej f. «|^^t' } ombre, f. shadow, ) ' to behave, se comporter. one day, nn jour. to listen, icouter. Relief, Soulagement. to correct one's self, distributea, to besiege, to relieve, laws, doctor, a hair, se cornger. departi. assiejer. de! asset . lois, m. pi. medecin. un cheveu. EXERCISE XVI. 1. L'empereur romain Titus disait h, la fin d un jour qu il n'avait pn signaler par aucun bienfait : mes amis 3 ai perdu ma journeu. 2. Je t'ai defend a cent fois de racier ton niauclit violon ; cependant je t'ai entendu ce matin.— Ce matin ! ne vous souvient il plus qnc vous me le mites hier en pieces ( 3. Les devoirs de la sociele exigent que Ton ait qiielque me- nagement pour I'amour-propre de?* hommes. 4. La sagesse est la seule chose dont la possession soit certame. 5. l^a plus noble vengeance qu'on puisse tirer do scs rivaux est de les Burpasser en talents et en vertus. C. Quoiqiie les in6- chants prosperent quelquefois, ne pensez pas qu ils so:ent heureux. 7- Tais-toi, ou dis quelque chose qui yaille mieux que ton silence. 8. La lecture est I'aliment de 1 esprit ; elie le d^lasse des fatigues de Tetude, quoiciu'ello soit uno e.ude elle-meme. 9. Le plus grand plaisir qn'un honnete homme puisse ressentir c'est de faire plaisir li ses amis. 10. bi je vous aimais moins ie serais plus tranquille. 11. Mme. cie Coulanges m'a mand6 que vous m'aimiez et que vous pariiez de moi. 12. Jean Jacques disait que rien ne rendait les moeursplusaimablesqueretudo delabotanique. 1^. tiier au soir i'eus en me couchant un frisson de fatigue ; liuit lieues dans un jour sont trop. 14. Huit jours apres son dis- part il m'ecrivit une lettre remplie de lamentations, io. rour r6,dster aux Remains, il aurait fallu que Carthage fut moms opulente. 16. Turenne refusa la marchandise qu on lui oflfraitk credit : Je craindrais, disait-il au marchaml, que si je venais ^ mourir, tu n'en perdisses une partie _ ^^\ a^„ crois pas qu'il puisse y avoir d-. veritable auutie entre des personnes qui ne sont pas vertucuses. 18. ^Juoi vous mourez innocent, disait un des disciples de Socrate h co T^hilosophe. Vous voudriez done, repondit Socrate, que je mourusse coupable ? 19. L'envieux voudrait quo tout ce qui M 194 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. est bon appartint h lui seul. 20. La jeunesse est le seul mo- ment de la vio oh Thomm© puisse se corriger facilement* CHAPTER XVII. SYNTAX 01^ THE PARTICIPLE. 1. The present participle and the verbal adjective, both of them end in ant, but the first is always invariable j the second on the contrary is variable. 2. One can recognize that the word in ant is a verbal adjeo. tive every time that one can place before it qui est, qui so't}, qui elait, etc. Ex. — Do you see those leaves wet with dew I one can say : voyez vous ces feuilles qui sont degouttantes U rosee. Tlie opposite is to be observed with regard to the pre- sent participle. 3. The present participle has or can have a direct regi- men : the verbal adjective ciinnot have one. Ex. — A mother caressing her children ; caressant, present participle, followed by direct regimen. 4. Generally the verbal adjective marks a manner of being inherent to the subject : a loving woman, unefemmt aimante; caressing children, des enfants caressants. 5. The present participio en the contrary marks a manner of being which is transitory, accidental, limited. Ex.— Light- ning filling the cloud, des eclairs sillonant la nue. ^ 6. When the present participle is preceded by the preposi- tion en, it is always invariable. Ex. — Young people form their minds in reading good books, les jeunes gens seforment I'esprit en lisant de bons I'lvres. 7. Past participle employed without auxiliary. Istly. — The participle may be used alone without auxiliary : a throne overturned, un trone renverd ; an army conquered, une armee vainc :e. 2ndly. — The participle may be accompanied by the verb TO BE, as : je suis blessS, nous somnies vaincus. 3rdly. — The participle may be joined to the verb avoir, as : I have slept, fai dormi; thou hast played, tu as jouL 4ihly.— The participle may be united to the verb to be, used for the verb avoir, as : I have hurt myself, je me suis hlesse. Othlv. All rifiat ■narf,ir»ir.lAB •arifVirmf. rmniif nv ^t/yit tkya. <«^v>ai aered as adjectives. SYNTAX OP THE PARTICIPLES. 195 Vocabulary. 3 a manner Ix. — Light- Contracts, wavering, to recall, drawn along, to keep back, female, bear, annihilated, her little ones, grief, unlimited, piercing, dolphins, to jump, the approach, snare, to suspect, to go into, Caudine forks, freshness, string, surrounded, true, C'ontrats, m.'pl. chancelant. rappeler. ditrahie. retenir. femelle, ours. aneantis. ses petits. donleur, f. demesure. per^ant. dauphins. santer. Vapproche, f . emb'iiche, f. soup^onntr. s'eiujager. fourches Cau- dines, (defile in the Appe- nines). fraicheur, f. corde, f. endronne. veritable . crowns imaginary, heaped up, rising, parched, continually. slandering, provoking, cares, mistrusts, tomakeyoung, wound, clouds, heard, covered, queen-mother, wandering, poverty, dissimulated, to please, arrow, lips, tcriook at, aspect, safe, 1 strong box, ) ecus, m. pi. Imaginaire. euiasses. naissant. cvtibrase. perpetuelle' ment. medisant. contrariant. soucis, m. pi. defiances, f. pi. rajennir. 2)laie, f. nues. ou'i. couvert. reine-mere. errant. pauvrete, f. dissimule. plaire. Jleche, f. levrcs, f. pi. envisager. pointdevue^m. coffre-fort, m. EXERCISE XVII. 1. Que d'ames chmicelantes dans le devoir ont cte rappelees k la religion par les bons exemples. 2. Que de faibles en- train L ! que d'ames chancelantes retenues dans le devoir. 3. Quand la femelle de I'oarsa perdu ses petits, elle annonce sa douleur, -non par des cris 2iergants, par des rugissements terribles ; mais elle est triste et (jemissante ; c'est une mere pleurant ses enfants. 4. Les dauphins sautants annoncent I'approche do la tempete, 5. Les Romains no soup^onnant pas d'embuches, s'engagferent dans les Fourches Caudines. 6. La fraicheur naissante de la nuit calmait les feux do la terra embrasee. 7= On voit les flammes ondoyantes a'e'lever jusqu'aux nues. 8. Les Turcs ont toujours'des ministres ,.,. «. >f . WW *Pi 190 PAKTiCiPLES WITH itre AND avoir. m etrangers residant contintiellement chez eux. 9. A peine eclo&es, ces fleurs sont dejii, fanees. 10. Animees dii deair de devenir meilleures, les personnes bien nees so corrigent faci- lement de leurs defauts, lors meme qu'elles y sont le plus Bujettes. 11. Quelque dlssimuUs que soient les m^chants Dieu connait lea moindres secreta de leur coeur. 12. Les honimes tds pour vivre ensemble sont itesaussi pourse plaire. 13. II en est de la parole conime de la fleche ; une fois lanch celle-ci ne reyient plus h, la corde, ni Fautre sur les lovres! 14 Unvironnes d'une foule deprdjuges nous envisageons raro- ment les clioses sous leur veritable point de vue. 15. N'ajou- tons point h nos maux par nos craintes oii nos souvenirs : h. chaque temps suffit sa peine ; n evoquons ni dea chagrins paasSs, ni des malheurs imaginaires. 16. Quelles gens que les avares qui passent leur vie h, compter les ecus entasda dans leurs coflfres-forts ! 17. L'orgueil aveuglo se suppose une grandeur et un merite demesuris. 18. Les Arabes ont le visage et le corps hmles ^ I'ardeur du soleil. 19. J'ai vu la foi des contrats hannie^ les lois les plus saintes aneanties, toutes -es lois de la nature renveraees. 20. Quel ceil n'est pas sensible jm riant aspect de I'herbe rajeunie et du bouton ver- meil. CHAPTER XYIII. ON THE PARTICIPLES EXCEPTK SUPPOSE, OUL PASSE, Etc. — ON THE ETRF WITH AVOIR. PARTICIPLES WITH 1. Although employed alone, without avoir and eire the participles excepte, suppose, ot(X, passe, attendn, vu, y compris, non compris, cl-joint, ci-annexe, etc., are invariable every time that they precede the noun ; for in that case they fill accidentally the office of prepositions. Ex?, — Except my purse, excepte ma bourse ; seeing your idleness, attendu voire paresse. 2. These same participles agree when following the noun. Ex. — Except my purse, jna bourse excepiee. 3. The past participle accompanied by etre follows the rules of the adjective : I'homme est estimi, la femme est estimee, etc., «tc. rARTiciPLES WITH itrc AND (ivoir. 197 9. A peine s dii deair de orrigent faci- sont le plus es m^chants, ur. 12. Les our se plaire. le fois lancee, ir lea levres. aageona rare- 15. N'ajou- souvenirs : h. dea chagrins Ilea gena que entasnes dans suppoae une :abea ont le 19. J'ai vu ■■ea aneantics, ceil n'est pas bouton ver- *OSE, OUI, iES WITH and ^tre the I, y comprh, riable every jase they fill -Except my ittendu voire g the noun. ws the rules stimee, etc., 4. All paat participlea constmed with any other verb than Ure and avoir ioWow all the variations of gender and number impoaed by the subject of thia verb, whether this sitbject be placed before or after the participle. Ex.— iWrm time n kur aspect demeure suspendne. Ces nrhnsi tombent ahattus par hs vents. Vous les trouverez toutes iletries. 5. The past participle construed with avoir is always inva- riable when it has no direct regimen. Ex. — Subject. Ces enfants L'alouette Mille hommes Une comete Gettc dame Veeb. ont a ont a a Participie. pleuri. chants. peri. paru. ecrit. 6. The past participle constructed with avoir is equally invariable every time that the direct regimen ia placed after it. Ex.- SUBJECTS. Nous lis Ma cousine La veritS Votre soeur Verbs. avons ont a a a Participles. cnUiv6 fonde icrit diets aimS Direct reghmens. les jardins. des colonies, un th^me. mes observations, mon cousin. 7. Construed with the verb avoir, the past participle agrees always in gender and number with its direct regimen every time that this regimen is placed before the participle. Ex. — Direct regimens. Subjects. Verbs. Participles. La maison que Les Uvrcs que Voyez quelle faute Savez vo^is quels dangers Voyez que de vertus Ditesmoi comhie7i de lettres vous One sees by that, that Lhe direct regimen placed before tho paat participle is usually a noun joined to the word quel, que de, combien, or one of the pronouns le, la, les, etc. 8. Sometimes it happena that the ?.'l'ject is placed after the past participle. Ex. — Les poisons qi.e ses mains ont pre- purv or ics jjoisons qu &iit pvepaves ses -Tnains. y m aclietee. vous ave» Ids. il a commise. la France a courus. un seidjour a detmites. vous avez regues. s^c^ 398 PAHTiciPLES WITH ctrc AND avoxr. 9. A past participle followed by an adjective or another participle or word always agrees with its direct regimen when this is placed before the participle. Subjects. Vous Je Voiis Tn Direct regimens. Ics V Verbs. avcz ai avcz as Paiitk;!- PLES. crue fa its trouvec faitc Ex.— Adjectives, etc. gidrie. tries eyaux. telle. ta complice. 10. \Mien the past participle is preceded by two complc- meiits, one direct, the other indirect, wo must distinguish which is the direct and which is the indirect. Ex. Direct COMrLEMENT. La foi que Lcs services que Subjects. tu vous Indirect complement. m' % leur Terbs. avais avcz Partici- ples. jurSc. rciidus. Vocabulary. Dream, Songe, m. motion, moiivement, in. celestial, celeste. ease, facilite, f. blood, sang, m. without fear, sans peur.'^ without re- proach, sans reproche.* invulncTobie, invulnerable. heel, talon, m. to plunge, plunger. appreciated, gouie. dust, poussiere, f. to shake, secouer. leaves, feuilletsy m. sown, seme. to relieve, soulager. vehicle, vehlcule, m. share, partage, m. to dream, ) to think, I'^^'^'J'"'- motion, mouvement, m. Foolish people. Sots, m. to despise, mepriser. honesty, tortuous, hillock, consent, discovery, degree, to vegetate, to demand, request, require, relief, falsehood, despotic, genius, pardon, forgiveness, alteration, change, cradle, , prohiU Cno plu- ral), f. tortueuscs, f . pi. coteau, m. assentiment, m. decouverte, f. degre, m. vegeter. cxiger. soulagement, m. mensonge, m. despotique. genie, m. grace, f. alteratioUj f. berceau, PARTICIPLES WITH itte AND avoif. 199 Mtans, MoyeUf m. misery, mish-e, f. obligations, engagements, m. toutteracry, pousser un en. to enjoy, jouir. quay, q^iai, m. high street, grande^ rue, f. steep, escarpe. Printing, Imprimeney t frivolous, frivole. impracticable, impraticahle. idol, to lavish, atrocities, to creep, to crawl. idole, f. prodiguer. noirceurSy i Tamper. f.pl. EXERCISE XVIIT. 1 Tout est grand dans lo temple de la faveur, except^ lea portes qui sont si basses qn'il faut y entrer en rampant 2 Les peines passees ne sont plus rien pour ceux qui touchent h. la i4\icit6. 3. L'honneur et la justice sont enti^rement bannisdecemonde. 4. La vertuexceptee, tout passe comma un songe. 5. Suppose la terre en mouvement, les pheno- mfenes celestes s'expliquent avec la plus grande facilite C Les habitants de Sodomo et de Gomorrhe perirent, excepte Lot et sa famille. 7. Thebes fut detruite par Alexandre, la maison de Pindare except^e. 8. En temps de guerre les sauvages de I'Am^riquo sont armds de casse-tete. y. Lies hommes cherchent moins h. etre instruits et meme r6jouis, qu'h, etre goutea et applaudis, et le plaisir lo plus ddlicat est 3e faire celui d'autrui. 10. Les hommes sont mconnus aux autres et h eux-mSmes, jusqu'aux occasions. 1 L La probit6 toute rare qu'elle est, n'est pas estime^e ce qu elle vaut. 12 Que d'hommes, comme les plantes ont vegete sur cette terre 13. Dieu exige que nous employions au soulagement de nos semblables les richesses qu'ils nous a d^parties. 14. l.a religion supplee h toutes les vertus que la nature nous a re- fusles. 15. Le premier degr6 du pardon est de ne pl^s P^r er de riniure qu'on a re§u. 16. Dieu des Chretiens quelles chosesWtu point faites ! Partout ou I'on tourne les yeux on ne voit que les mouvements de tes bienfaits. 17. _ Les Patens eux memes ont toujours reconnu et condairme 1 mdi- Sdumensonge. 18. Les defautsde Pierre le Grand ont temisesgrandesetadmirablesqualit^s. 19. Pour nous con- Boler de nos innombrables misbres, la nature nous a faits fWes. 20. Lea habitants du Rh6no ont longtemps pre- tendu et pretendent encore aujourd'hui parler mieux le fran- cail que la sociel4 des salons du Nord ; mais cette pretention on I'a toujours trouvee un peu ambitieuse. - 200- THE PARTICIPLE WITH AN INFINITIVE. CHAPTER XIX. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE FOLLOWED BY AN \ INFINITIVE— ON THE PARTICIPLE WITH AN INFINITIVE PRECEDED BY A PREPOSITION-, ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY UN BE, UNE DE, UN DEIS, UNE VES. 1. When tlio participle of an active verb is immediately folloved by an infinitive, it agrees with the direct comple- ment which precedes the two verbs, if that complement per- forms the action expressed by the infinitive, which is as- certained by changing this infinitive into a personal mood Ex. — TjTTJ'ppfll COMPLEMENT. ^UBJECT. VeUBS. PaETICIPLE. InFINITIVB. La personve qite f ai vue ecrire. Lea enfants qn' il a vus conrir. ^ icnre there could bo changed into qui icrivaiih- courir into qui couraient. 2. In the following sentences it will be plainly seen that the direct complement does not perform the action expressed by the infinitive, the participle remains then invariable Ex. — La femme que fai v^^ peindre par David. Les enfants que fai vxh punir par leur mattre. 3. When the past participle is followed by an infinitive governed by a preposition, it agrees if it had for regimen the direct complement which precedes ; it is invariable if that complement is that of the infinitive. Ex. — With agreement. La comcJie que fai enipechee d^ctrc represcniee. La hardlesse (boldness) quHl a pri.sc de crltiqucr. La temcr'dc que votis avcz cue de le cuntrcdire. Without agreement. La vSrite qti'll a nejligS de suivre. La place qu'il avait resolu de rendre. Les charges (positions) que fai eu Vlumneur d'exercer. 4. The past participle between two que is always invariable when the direct complement follows. Ex. — Les emharras que fai su que vous auriez. La legon que vous avez voidu que fe'cudiasse. Lcspciiii^s que fai pre cu qm vous causcrait ceite affaire. 5V' THE rABTICIPLK WITH AN INFINITIVE. 201 If tho direct complement is placed before the participle tlie latter agrees. Ex. — Lesjnges que vous avez convamctis qucfetais innocent. Vos amis que vous avez persuades que fctais mort. C When a past participle is preceded by two nouns united bv the preposition de, one must select for the agreement the one that particularly refers to that participle-that is the one which has the principal influence, tho other being only secon- dary. Ex.— With the singulak. | C^est un dcs hons medecins de Paris quHl a considte. Un de nos valets, quefai rcn^ contre, m'a annonce voire de part. With the rLURAL. C'estun desplusgrandshommes que la France ait produits. Voild un dcs plus honnetes avocats que fate vus de ma vie. C. Tho same rule applies to the participle preceded by le peu de. Ex. — Ageeement with iepeu. Le pen d^approhation qu^on y a donnc. Le feu d' approbation gu'a eu ce discouis. Agreement with the fol- lowing WOED. La pen d( talents qu^on a re- marques en iui. Le peu de liberie quefai prise. Vocabulary. Lofty, to appease^ to burst, ages, widows, to shoe, rocks, drought, Baut~e. apaiser, iciater, vc'iiies. ferrer. rochers, m. pi. sechaesse, f. to rol) nests, deiucher. to construct, construire. mediocre, \ ^^^^^i^cre.* middhng, ) poplars, petipliers, m. pi. to start with joy, tressaillirdejoie. Xo thee and thou, t^doyey, . I Quarrels, knowledge, I to harvest, to fertilize, sharply, Chicanes, f . pi. connaissances, f. pi. moissonner. fertiliser. vivement. inclination, incliriaisony f. t>) avenge, vmger. harshness, durcte, i. hotel, hCMlerie, f. displeasure, deplaisir, f. boldness, hardlesse, f. , to realize, realiser. to show, ) devoiler. ito unveil, ) kindiiess i^^nit6,t anuabiuty, $ 202 RECAPITULATORY BXERCISES. Trust, Covfiance. | To undergo, Subir cloisters, clothes, m. pi. I prejudice, prevention, f. , EXERCISE XIX. 1. Les plantes que tu as laissdes croltre. 2. Lafemmeoufl nous avons vue peindre. 3. La cantatrice que vous avez entendue chanter. 4. Les oiseaux que j'ai laiss^a s'envoler 5. Les histoirea quo j'ai entendu raconter. 6. Les courriera que J ai fait partir. 7. Les enfants que vous avez laiss^ battre. 8. Nos aieux vivaient pauvres et vertueux, etmou- raient dans lo champ qui les avaient vus naltre. 9 La soli tude apaise lea mouvements iinp^tueux de l'4me que le desordro a fait ^clater. 10. L'imprimerie, que la viUe de Mayence a vue naitre, a contribud infiniment aux proCT^a que la ciyibsation a faits. 11. La guerre a pour elle I'anti- quit^ elle a ^te dans tous les sidles, on Ta touiours vue remp ir le mondo do veuves ot d'orphelins. 12. Les ennemis do le tutoyer. 16. Les peines qu'il a eu k supporter. 17 La pemo qu'ils ont euo h vous quitter. 18. Les obstacles" quo 3 ai eu k vaincre 19. La conduite que jai suppose que vous tiendriez. 20. Le trop de partialite que vous avez ^ dZ^ cette affaire vous a fait accuser de prevention. RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES.— ConW. 2nd series. EXERCISE IX. SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS, THEIR POSITION. (See Chapter IX, page 167, Syntax.) j 1. Does he wish to do that. 2. Am I awake? Can I be- lieve such a design (a similar design, intention). 3. When dicl (jod show his power by more deeds. 4. Picture to your- self a true Christian, and you will admit that there is nothing so great on the earth. 6. You have received kindnesses from your parents, remember then to forget their wrongs, if they have anjr. 6. The sins which wo have committed, Oh ' God forgive them to us, as we forgive the faults of others. * 7 If your friends commit ffraye faults rfiT^roni-h +h^»" *^~%iJr-^ \ KECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 203 +>.pm 8 £tav in the garden and walk there a moment. oS^eBtUcWld perceive a spider? Instead of being eager ?o Wn U let h n \ake it into his hand 10 Reflect before actii, but, whatever resolution yon take afterwards apply vmirreif to it with ardor and perseverance. 11. Does sue r^ntoUstentomyprayer. 12. Were I to pensh nothmg Ull make me abandon an nnfortnnato friend. 13. la poor Tan asks alms from you, do not refuse them to him God ^iU return o you inliea'ven, the good which Jo^^ ^.^^^ ^^^« V ,V^^« +1.0 p.irfh 14 Do not give it to me. 15. Iney tXn f^^y n ermna {IndiscreU). 12. Holid: ys arc those which scholars prefer. 13. It is no longer wisdom and public in- terest which preside at the councils, but interest of passions 14. loo severe laws must prove (be) a great evil to the state. 15. 1 hose truths which proclaim the existence and immor- tality of tlio soul are comforting truths. 10. Jt is we brave soldiers and friends, that the universe contemplates 'l7 In a hundred years the world will still subsist there will be the same theatre and the same decorations. ' 18. What are the four cardinal pf)int3 : They are the east, the west, the north and the south. 19. Men wish to know everythin^r and they rcr.der themselves miserable by the desire of supe?! fliious things (dn superfin). 20. We are in the middle of Italy like abandoned children who wander among the ruins of the palaces of their ancestors. EXERCISE XIV. ON THE USE OF C'EST AND IL EST. (See Chapter XIV, pagpe 183, Syntax.) 1 . I love my superiors and I am loved by them. 2 Several ships can enter and go out of the harbor at the same time. voulues. . 2. The participle of impersonal verbs is always invariable. Lci chaieui » excessives qnHl a fait. Lv. iisdtp j[u'U J 'X eu cet hivcr. PAST P^RTIOTPLES OF THE REFLECTIVE YEKBS. 3. The participle of reflectivo verbs is always preceded by the yerb Ura used tor avoir 4. The past par+icipie of reflective verbs follows the same ruleo as the participle preceded by the verb avoir, that is to pay, i+ varie:i if tho direct complement precede and is invari- able if otherwise. Ex. — Direct complement placed beforb the participle. lis se sent adressei d> moi. La foulc s'esi an,assee. Mies sesont assureesdi lavinte Direct complement placed AFTER the participle. lis se so7ct adrcsse des lettres. lis se sont amast>e de la fortune. Mies se sont assure itn rcvenu. 5. The neuter verba se plaire, se deplaire, se rire, se sourire, se succeder, se 7iuire, se ressemhler, se corivenir, etc. , employed with tho pronoun se, have always the participles invariable, these verbs having no direct regimen. La vigne s^est phi dans cet endroit. lis se sont snffi, d, eux meme. Les soldats se sont ri de ses ordres. ON THE PARTICIPLE LAISSE FOLLOWED BY AN INFINITIVE. 6. The participle laisse followed by an infinitive, follows the sarao rulea as tho other participles accompanied by an infinit'.ve, that is, it agrees if tho direct complement is placed before tho participle, and is invariable if that complement follows the participle. Ex. — With agreement. Mle s^est laissee mourir. jous 'Myo- Withoitt agreement. Elle s'est laisse vaincre au sommeil. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY THE PRONOUN U FOR LE OR LA. 7. The past participle is invariable when it has for direct complement I' representing part of a sentence, because taen 216 OK PAST PARTICIPLES- V is nsed for cela ; but -when V is used for Ui referring to a feminine noun, the participle agrees. Ex.-— Cette diffi,culii, ouije I'ai rcconnv., est impossible A iever. CttU dijjiculic^ je Cai reconnue comnie imponabU d lever. YocABrLARir. Besult, to kiss, a kiss, to injure, calumny, venom, darkness, to cure, Bhultatf m. haiser. haiser. m. nuire. calomnief f. renin, m. Unebres, i. pi. guerir. sprung from, issu. to be born, naitre. the survivor, dernier vivant. to aggrandize, agrandir. conqueror, vainqueur. to take pos- session, s'emparer. to do &Vf»y, lever. buried, enseveli. assertion, assertion, f. adventure, aventure, f. demonstrate, demontrer. indiscreet, indiscret. forehead, front, m. More, to forbid, to smooth, to do avay with box on the ear, to daub, loins, back, to get rid of. ribbon, uneasiness, burden, prey, to spare, chariot^ to join, rule, to look at, place, to break, news, skilful. Davantage. dejendre. aplanir soujfflet, m, ba'*-bouiller, reins, m. se debarasser. ruban, m. mqwiSttide, f. fardeau, m. prcie, f. epargner. char, m. )oindre. r^gle, £, envisager, endroit, m, casser. nouvelle, f, adroit~€. EXERCISE XXI. 1. On a eu pourlui tous les 6gards qu'on a dil, 2. II y a mis la condition qu'il a voulu 3. lis ont donr.e h leurs en- fants toute I'education que leur a permis leur fortune. 4. Elle m'a pay^ les sommes qu'elle m'a dues. 5. J'ai fait les demarches que mes parents m'ont permises. 6. Les orages multiplies qu'il y a eu. 7. Les mauvais temps qu'il a fait. 8. C'est une des plus grandes disettes qu'il y ait eu, 9. Que de maux il en est resulte. 10. Que de re'flexions n'a t-il pas fallu. 11. Rappelez vous les humiliations qu'il vous en a coCile. 12. Eiles se sent baisees au front. 13. lis se sont jetes k I'eau. 14. EUes se sont baiee la main. 15. lis so Bont donn6 la main. 16. lis se sont caste lo cou. 37. EUes se sout nui diff^rentes f ois. 18. Cette personno est boiteuse. SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. 217 iel'ai Hen remarqu6e. 19. Cotte personne n'est pas aussi idrc^te que je I'avL cm. 20. La nouveUo 6tait pubhquo et il ne I'a paa sue. CHAPTER XXII. SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS 1 The words dessns, dessous, dedans, dehors are adverbs, and never are followed by any regimen or complement, ilms do not say :— , 7 7 t. * Meitez U dessus la table ; placez U dessous le bureau, but Mettez le sur la table ; placez le sous le bureau. However dessus, dessous, dedans become prepositions, and consequently hkve a regimen. Istly. -When they are in oonosition : je Vai cherche dessus et dessoas la table. 2ndly.— When they are preceded by another preposition : au dedans de la tnaison. , , , 1 i ^ 2. Davantage may be preceded by the word en, only cora- Tjlement which it admits of : vom avez de Vesprit, mats %l en a davantage. This adverb cannot receive after it any comple- ment marked by de, or by que. Thus do not say : fa. davan- tage de livres que lul, but fai plus de Livres que lui. 3 Sooner, plus tdt, corresponding to later piit« tard, is written in two words : vous venez plus tot qu d, I ordinaire. Rather, plMot, marks preference or diiference : pmot mounr n "^SucSvSy, de suite, without interruption : il marcha dx jours de suite. Tout de suite means immediately: levez- vous tout de suite. t .• 4-i,^„ 5 Si and trh can only be put before adjectives or other adverbs. Therefore do not say : fetais si m colere, but si fort en coUre-neithev, fai tresfaim, but /at bienfaim. 6 ylitssiioHsanadverbwhichcannothave a regimen. Do not'say therefore: omssitOt sun diner, but aussitot apres son '^T** Tow< A coup means suddenly : cettemaison est tombie tout a coup. Tout d'un coup, all at once ; il gagna mille ecus tout T TtTs a great error to employ pas after ne when there is another negative word in the sentence, such as : m, rien, aucun, jamais. Thus say : je ne vois aucun de vos^uges; run n^est beau que U vrai. I ; 218 SYNTAX OF THE ADVEKBS. 9. The negation tie must not be used after avant que, sans que and dej'endre. Do not say : avant qu'il ne surte, but avant quHl aorte — neither, j'ai di/endu qu^il nejit cette ckose, but j'ai de/endu qu'lljit cette chose. 10. Af tor tlio adverbs of comparison autant, taut, aussi, si, it is no longer allowable to use cunime, but que. Say there- fore : elk aautaut d'csprit que vous, and not comme vous. 1 1. Observe well the diiference between pis and j^irc. Pir» is the opposite of meilleur ; pis is the opposite of mitux. Rien n' est pis qiCune mauvaise lanyue — so much the Avorse, taut pis. 12. Do not confound quaud and quant d, quand signifies when ; qv^nt a aignities as to. Quand le soleil se Uve ; quant d vous. 13. Do not say : c^est ici oiije le vis ; e'est la ou il mourutf but c'est ici que je le vis ; e'est Id qu'il mourut. 14. Petit must never be joined to peu. Say : donnez rn'en un peu, not un petit peu. 15. Nouns must always be followed by ci, and not by ici. Dans ce moment-cif not ici. Vocabulary, Finger, praiseworthy, opportunely, seasonable, appearance, mien, foundation, happiness, to announce, ground floor, to allure, to go by, to fear. JDoigt, m. louable. \^ propos.* i mine, f. fondementj m. felicitS, f. ann^ncer. rez-de-chaus- see, m. leurrer. se regler. craindre. Unmanage- able, thatch, to attract, homage, to wander, to repent, birth, to remark, wooden, to interro- gate, Intraitable. chaume, m. attirer. homrnage, m. s'egarer. se repcntir. naissance, f. remarquer. de bois. interroger. to strengthen, affermir. to disappear, disparaitre. insignificant, petit. EXERCISE XXII. 1. Un sage prince ecrivit avec ses doigts sur les livres de son fils : piutot mourir que de mentir. 2. II est aussi louable de refuser avec raison que de donner k propos. 3. Justinien se montrait aussi petit devant les Perses qu'il se mon trait iutraitablo devant lea Goths. 4. La vertu soua le chaume I ; que, sans l)ut avant i, but j'ai aussi, si, ay Ihere- vous. re. Pir» ux. Rien taut pis. Bignifies quatU e; mourutf nez men ot by id. liable, le, m. age, m. zr. ^ntir. nee, f. quer. s. )ger. dr. aitre. [ivres de i louable ustinien non trait ohauiue SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSTTTONfl. 219 attire nos hommages. 5. II no faut jamais so regler sur a miio G. Cofondement est lual atfonm, nous craignons do batir'desaus. 7. Tous ont disi^ru de dessus la scfene 8. Le travail aux hommes necessaire, fait leur felicitd plfttot quo lenr misfero. 9. Chacun sMgare, et lo moins inirrudent est cXi ^^n plus t6t so repent. 10. No croyons le luul ^uo quand il est venu. CHAPTER XXIIL SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 1 The prepositions vis-cL-vis,* proche, en face, prh, must be followed by the preposition de . Vis-d-vis de mes fenetres ; en face du theatre. Custom however, in famihar language, aUows . vis-oL-visVeijlise; proche lepalais. , . ^^ . 2 Vis-d-vis should not be employed in the sense of cnyers, d, r'egard de. Do not say : U s'cst montri ingrat ms-a-vis de ees parents, say : envers ses parents. , •, -n + .o,r . 3 It is also an error to use contre for prh de. Do not say . il s'est assis contre moi, but prh de moi ; a cote demoi. 4 Au travers must be followed by the preposition de. Au travers des ennemis—d travers does not admit of a preposition : d travers les ennemis. , „ t i. 5. Fr^s de signifies on the point of. Ex.— Les beaux jours sont prh de finir. FrH a signifies disposed to, ready to. ■Ex.—Uignoranceest toujours prete d, s'adm,irer ; celui qm est prh de tmurir n'est pas toujours pret a mounr. ^ , , . 6 The prepositions d, de, en, are usually repeated before each regimen. ■Ex.—Quand jouirons-nous^ de la payx, de la tranquillite ? J'ai voyage en Europe, en Asie, en Amenque. 7 All prepositions of one syllable are repeated when the teaimens do not offer any resemblance in their meanings. Ex.— J'ai lu dans Vhistoire et dans la geographie; dans La mollesse et Voisiveti. 8 Autour and avant are prepositions and demand a regi- tnen. Alentour and auparavant are adverbs and do not demand a regimen. Ex.— JZ est autour de la maison ; il se promene alentour. II est parti avant moi ; six semames aupa- ^^T^'Par terre is said of a body always touching the earth ; d, terre of one accidentally touching the earth. Ce Iwre est tombe d t^re; Us mfants tornbent souvent par terre. 220 SYNTAX OP THB PllEPOSIXIONS. 10. Etrc A la campagne, allcr A la campa(jne is to find one's Bolf in, or to go t(», a country house. Etrc en campagncy alkr OJ- C4xmpa(jnc is to travel, to go on errands, etc. 1 1. Malgre is a preijosition which must always have a noun as regimen. Ex. — Malgic man amitie. mahjye man interet. 12. Ell is \jlacod before nouns employed \> ithout article or equivalent. Ex. — Eh France. Bans is'placed before nouns preceded by the article : dans la France. En is also used in an indeterminate sense ; dans in a deter- minate sense. J( vais tn ville ; je rentre dans cette maison. I}a7is means also at the end of ; en shows tlie relation of an action to the time required for performing it. Ex. — Nona partirons dans quinze jours ; ilfcrtt cc voyaga en nevf jours. Vocabulary. Conspirator, Conjure. Wainscot, LamhriSj m. very near, hicnprt)s. ornament. ornementy m. importunate , importun. hut, huttc, f. to execute^ executer. space. espaccy m. to furnish. tmubler. unknown, inconnu. to flow. couler. audacity. audace, f. to avoid, Soiter. before, a%iparavant. opposite, en face. nfiar ( proche. I nres de. against. contre. lAVUlJ. . alongside, ready to. a'c6t6. prH d. through, ( au t ravers. I d tr avers. idleness. oisivetS. eflfeminacy, rnollcsse, f. whether, soit. relations, nos proches. obliged. force. baseness, hassessCf f. to succumb, succomber. EXERCISE XXIII. 1. Un conjure qui tremble est bien pr^s de perir. 2. Lea nbgres sont prets k tout, en paix comme en guerre. 3. L'hommo marche h travers une nuit importune. 4. Au travers des perils un grand coeur so fait jour. 5. On ne con- nait I'importance d'une action que quand on es4 pr^s de I'exe- cuter. 6. Qui n'est pas genereux est bien pr^s d'etre injuste. 7. La ville do Versailles, situeo proche de Paris, possede ua chateau magnifique et un pare immense. 8. La mort frappo autour de nous, nos proches, nos amis, nos frisres. 9. Chris- topho Colomb n? duutsiit point qu'au travers des espacesim- menses de la mer, 11 ne rencoutia des terres inconnues. SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 221 Ind one's fHc, alter a noun f interet. vrticlo or ro nouua I a deter- maison. ion of an :. — Nous }ours. w, m. td^ m. f. ra. It. . f. :vant. wrs. rs. e, f. K'Jies. 2. Lea guerre. 4. Au I ne con- do I'exe- I in juste, ssede un 't frappo >. Chris- )ace8im- 2onnues. 10. La Seine coule h, travcra lea dtJpartements do I'Aube, de Seine-ot-iViarue, do Soino-ot-Oise, ct so rend h la mer sous Eouen. uiTAPTEU XXIV. SYNTAX ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 1» Tho conjunctions ni, soit, soit que, are repeated in each one of the sentences thoy serve to connect. Ex.— Suit raison, soit indifference, soit qu'il lefasse, soit qu^ilne lefasse pas. e. Instead of repeating tho conjunctions comme, lorsque, puisque, q^iand, quoique, si, thoy are replaced by que. Ex.— Si vouH m'aimcz ct que vous vouliez lefaire. 3. When one opposes plus to plus, mains to moins, mieux to mieux, autant bo autant, do not use the conjunc+ion et. "Ex.— Plus je lis Eacine, plus jeVadmire. ^ 4. Quoi que in two words signifies whatever things. Ex.— Quoi que vous 6criviez, evitez la hassesse. Quoique, in one single word signifies although. Ex.— Oct homme a succomhe quoi- qu'ilfut ids fort. 5. Farce que, in two words, signifies because. Ex. — Jc le fais parce que j'v suis force. In three words it means by that which. Ex. —Par cc que vous dites, je vois que vous avez raison. 6. The e of puisque is onlj elided before il, die, ils, elks, en, am, une, on. Ex.—FmsquHl lefaut. 7. On conjunction does not take an accent and observa that the word bien can always bo placed after it. Ex. — J'irai a Paris, ouje vous attendrai; firai a Paris ou hien a Versailles. Vocabulary. To injure, Nuire. mistrust, defiance, f. to mistrust, se aejier. deceit, faussete. f. they cannot, ils ne sauraient. clown, lourdcau, m. gallant, galant. the whole, tout ensemble.'^ vanity, vanite, f. Bloody, Sanguinaire. death-warrant, arret demort,m. poverty. miserc. to endeavor, sUfforcer. here below, ici-has. aligner de Vceil. abandon,*' m. to wink, freedom, ease in man- ner. laisscr aller,*m. EXERCISE XXIV. 1. Lh. tout est beau parce que tout est vrai. 2. Par co que je vous dis, jugez de ce qu'il est. 3. Les chats no regardent 222 KECAPITULATOEY EXERCISES. jamais en face la personno aim^e, Boit defiance, soit faussete. i. Vols par ce quo jo suis co qn'autrefois je fus. 5, 11 est tnalaclo parco qu'il a trop niang^. 0. Je veux I'embrasscr avant de nionrir. 7. Plus le crime est elovd, plus la honte doit etre grande. 8. Plus on est laborieux, nioins on a h craindro la mis^re. 9. 11 ne faut pas juger d'un homme par ce qu'il ignore mais par co qu'il salt. 10. On parlo peu quand la vanit6 ne fait paa parler. « * • » » END OF RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. EXERCISES XX. ON THE PAST PARTICIPLE PRECEDED BY THE PRONOUN EN. (Seo Chapter XX, page 211, Syntax.) 1. The letters that you have received from hini. 2. He thought (past def.) that he had seen miracles and even performed (faire) some. 3. The jealous sentiments which you felt (iprouve) at this. 4. Many are callod and few chosen (elected). 5. He knows many things and has invented a few of them. 6. The samples which I have seen of them. 7. I have not forgotten this country nor the wonders related about it (qn'on en a raco7iiees). 8. Compliments ! you have never paid (fait) me any. 9. I have known many who were in that position. 10. The two hundred francs which this dress has cost. 11. The hvo pounds of cherries which this child has weighed. 12. The hundred pounds which this bale ^6a^?o< m.) weighed (has weighed). 13. The hundred guineas (lonis) that this horse was worth (valiis). 14. I regret the many years that I have lived without being able to instruct myself. 15. All the days during wliich h** AujQfered ifhaa auf. fered) (a souffert). EXERCISE XXL ON THE PAST PARTICIPLES OF THE VERBS VOU- LOIR, POUVOIR, DEVOIR— 01^ THE PAST PAR- TICIPLES OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. (Seo Chapter XXI, page 214, Syntax.) 1. The bad weather there has been. 2. The scarcity whicli there was (a eu) this winter. 3. A mother does not (point] RECAPITULATOllY EXBKOISE.S. 223 faussete. 5, 11 est mbrasser la honte a on a h mme par BU quand i^a '{ THE , 2. He md even ts which and few invented of them. '8 related yon have vho were liich tliia liich thia this bale I guineas !gret the instruct {Jiaaauf- s roxT- JTPAK- ty whicli t {point] regret the cares nor the troubles which her child has cost her. 4. The crowd assembled (has assembled), 5. She has paid me the sums which she owed mo (a dues). 6. They cast them- selves into the water. 7. They threw stones at one another. 8. They have applied (doriuer) themselves to work. 9, They extended {dunner) their hands to each other. 10. They (fem.) have injured {nidre) one another several times. 11. These houses have begn bought {acquerir) at a low (vll) price. 1 2. They perceived the faults. 13. They perceived one another from afar. 14. They allowed (iaisser) themselves to be struck. 15. They allowed themselves to be surprised by the enemy. IG. They (fem.) abandoned themselves (lais- sies aller) to their passion. 17. This person is lame, I noticed it {bien remanjuec). 18. She is much taller than I had ima- gined. 19. This adventure happened {Hre arrive) as I had anticipated ( privoir). 20. This thing took place without his knowing it {I'ait su). EXERCISE XXII. SYNTAX OF THE ADVERBS. (See Chapter XXII, page 217, Syntax.) 1. Rise immediately. 2. He became rich all at once. 3. The rich are intended (made) to spend much. 4. I have more pens than you. 5. All have disappeared from the 3cene. 6. All go astray and the least imprudent is the one who repents soonest. 7. As for the city it is composed {formee) of wooden houses which have only the ground floor {rez-de-chanssee). 8. Before you praise a man examine {inter- rogez) his life. 9. She has as much wit as you. 10. Imme- diately after liia dinner he went for a walk {aller /aire un tour). EXERCISE XXIII. SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS. (See Chapter XXIII, page 219, Syntax.) 1. That inkstand has fallen to the ground. 2. He is always travelling. 3. I shall go into that house for a moment, will you wait for me. 4. One does not govern with violence. 5. Talents yield {produisent) according to cultivation. 6. He lives near the boulevard. 7. Work is a better resource against ennui tham pleasure. 8. The earth is small with regard to the sun. 9. A true Christian tramples under foot {fouler auxpieds) all the vanities lof this world. 10. Sion. dear Sion, what sayest 224 FRENCH WORDS IN ENGLISH USB. thou when thou seest an impious stranger alas ! seated on tho throne of thy kings. EXERCISE XXIV. SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. (See Chapter XXIV, page 221, Syntax.) 1 One is always esteemed when one is an honest man. 2 Fortune, either (soit) good or bad, transitoiy iP^'^^re)?! constant, has no influence (ne peid nen) on the mmdof the ^se 3 Some people care but little about the means {route) Zvided it lead them to the source of r ches. 4 I should be vour friend even {quand blen mime) ii you did not wish it. r God forrives as soon as he sees repentance in the heart 6 Whilst the Romans despised riches they were sober and virtuous 7 God sometimes lets the wicked sleep (accorder loS in order that the good may be quiet 8. One must hZ a good memory after having told a ll.^ (^t Lis ihe ffem ) shall return alone and in despair 10. Envy feels tHe value of merit although it endeavors to lessen it {avihr), FRENCH WORDS AND PHRASES IN COMMON USE IN THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE. A. French. Abandon f aidc-de-campf a VA nglaise,^ a la Frangaise, a la mode, amateur, amende honorable, apergii, aplomb, db propos, artiste, au fait, au revoir, aux armes,^ avant-courier, A votre sante. Enq. A giving way, a certain ease in manner. an assistant to a general. after the English fashion. after the French fashion. according to prevailing fashion. an admirer of . . . satisfactory apology. a sketch. assurance. to the po"nt. artist. well informed, master of. to our next meeting. to arms. a forerunner. your health. leated on lest man. ssag^re) oi ind of the ms (roxite) should be ot wish it. the heart. sober and I {accorder^ One must nti). 9. I fy feels the ivilir). EON USE FRENCH WORDS IN ENGLISH USB. 225 m manner. on. French. BadinagCf hagatellej ballet, hean monde, helles-lettres, hel-esprit, bete noire, billet-doux, bizarre, blase, bon-bon, bonne bouche, bon-gre, mal-gri, bonhomie, bon mot, bon soir, bon t07L, bon vivant, boudoir, bourgeois, buffet, bureau. Cafe, cafe au lait^ canaille, cap d pie, carte blanche, carte-de-vidte, ehacun d son goUt, Champs Elysees, chateau, chef-d'oeuvre, chevaux de frise, ci-devant, clique, coiffure, collaborateiir, comm^. il faut, connaisse\tr. Eno. Banter. a trifle. ballet. the fashionable world. polite literature. a brilliant mind. ' bugbear. a love letter. odd, fantastic. worn out. a sweet meat. tit-bit. willing or not. good nature. witticism. good evening. high fashion. a high liver, a man fond of good cheer. lady's private room. a citizen. sideboard. office. C. Coffee, coffee house. coffee and milk. rabble. from head to foot. full power. a small picture. each one to his taste. Elysian fields. Public park in Paris. a country seat. a master piece. a sort of spiked fence. formerly. a faction. head dress. colleague. as it should be, fashionable* a judge. 226 FEBNCB WOEDS IN ENQLISH USE. Febnch. ConfrhCj conge, contouVy corUgej couleur de rosCf coup de grace, coup d^etat, coup de main, coup d'o&il, Danseuse, debris, {s silent), debut, decollete, degagi, dejeuner A la four chette, denotement, depot, dernier ressort, de trop, devoiVf Bieu et mon droit, distingue, domicile, double entente C^ot double entendre), douce^ir, Eclaircissement, eclat, eUve, ilite, embonpoint, embouchure, imeute, encore, en masse^ Eno. Fellow menjber. dismissal. outline. a procession. set, club, gang. rose color, f. * -^^ finishing stroi ■ .... a bold attack, . istet stroke m politics. a bold stroke. a £lance of the eye. A female dancer, broken remains, a first appearance, wearing a low-necked dress, free in manners. a breakfast with meat, fowls, etc. the end of a plot. a store or magazine. a last resource. too much, duty. God and my right. refined. abode, residence. double meaning. a bribe, a present, a gratuity. E. Explanation. brightness, splendor. pupil, choice. stoutness. mouth. riot. again. in a body. „ siy*i :n FRENCH W0KD8 IK ENGLISH U8K. 227 E. French. En regie, entrie, entre nouSj omui, envelope, epaulette, espionnage, esprit de corps, estafette, etiquettCf expos^. Facade, fagon de parler, fante de mieux, faux-pas, fete, femme de chamhre, feu-de-joie, fichu, fracas, friandise, Gamin, gargon, getidarmes, gourmand, gout {t silent), Habitant, hauteur, honi soit qui mal y pense, hors de combat, Eno. In order. admission, side dish. between ourselves. weariness. covering for letters. epaulet. the act of a spy. nice understanding, union, bond of friendship, express, ceremonial, disclosure. F. Front. way of speaking. for want of better. a mistake, a fault, an error. a holiday. lady's maid. bonfire. handkerchief. disorder, confusion. daintiness. O. A street boy. waiter. French body of soldiers, mounted police. a glutton, a gastronomist. taste. H. Inhabitant. height, haughtiness, evil be to him that evil thinks. (Honi should be written Honni. It comes from Honnir, to dishonor), unable to fight, disabled. 228 FRENCH WORDS IN ENGLISH USE. French. Insoitciancef Je ne sais quoij jeu de motSt jeu d'esprity Laisser alter j levee, liaison, liqueur^ Maitre d^hotely manoeuvre, * marriage de conve- nance, mauvaise honte, mSsalliance, m>essieurs, mitrailleuse, NoXf, ^ tMivete, ni or nee, nom de guerre, nom de plume, nonchalaii,cef nonpareil, On dit, outre, Papier-mache, parole. I. Eno. ^ Carelesanesa. J. Something that one cannot express. play on the words. witticism. L.. Freedom, public reception, connection. a sweet drink. M. Head cook, tactics. a business marriage<. bashfulness. disparaging match, gentlemen. a breach loading cannon with several barrels. Ingenuous. ingenuousness. born. nickname. fictitious name. ease, indifference. not to be equalled, matchless. It is reported, one says, preposterous, beyond what is proper. P. Papier-mache, word of honor. '! FRENCH WORDS IN ENGLISH USB. 229 P. French. Enq. Parterre, A flower garden, a border. passe-partout, a means of introduction. passe, withered, having lost its freshness. penchant, an inclination. persiflage, jesting. petit maitre, a fop. physiqK^e, appearance, face. (The true meaning of this word in French is Natural Philosophy.) plaisanterie, ^^^®' . • point d'appui. point of support, fulcrum. porte-moiichoir, handkerchief case. potpourri, medley. prairie, a field, a meadow. protege^ one looked after, one cared for. R. Baffinementf Nicety. raffini. refined. recherche. sought after, in good taste. regime. system, form of government. rencontre. meeting. rendez-vous, a place of meeting, appointment. restaura7it. an eating house. restaurateur, purveyor, the keeper of the restaurax'.t. revenons A nos movr tons, let us come back to the question. reverie. dream. roue. a worn out rake. ruse, trick. ruse de guerre. a trick or stratagem. S. Coolness. Sang froid. sans. without. sans culotte, republican rowdy. sans f agon, without ceremony. savant. a learned man. silhouette. profile likeness. soi disant, would be, self-styled. 230 FRENCH WOKDS IN ENGLISH USE. French. Soirie, soubriquetf soujffietf souveniVj suite, surtout, Tapis (s silent), Ute A Ute, tour, tout ensemblef trait, Uniqiie, Valet, ralet de c?iam6re, viis a vis, Eno. An evening entertainment, nickname. blow on the cheek. a keepsake. retinue. an overcoat. T. Talked of. a private interview. a trip, the whole, feature. IJ. Sole, the only one of the kind. V. I A servant, opposite, face to face. Fin. m y